






























































Copyright N°C< p\ / £j 


COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 









Terrain Exercises 

By 

Lt. Col. William H. Waldron 
Infantry, U. S. Army 




Washington 

United States Infantry Association 

I 9 2 3 






Copyright, 1923 By 
United States Infantry Association 




HAYWORTH PUBLISHING HOUSE, WASHINGTON, D. C 

JAN -4 23 / A 

©C1A704711 c/ ' 


'VIC? 


Table of Contents 


Introduction. ^ 

Terrain Exercise No. 1 

Attack of Strong Point—Rifle Company. n 

Terrain Exercise No. 2 

Approach March and Deployment. 52 

Terrain Exercise No. 3 

Defensive Position. 207 

Terrain Exercise No. 4 

A Machine Gun Company in Attack. 141 

Terrain Exercise No. 5 

An Advance Guard... 169 

Terrain Exercise No. 6 

A Flank Guard. 221 

Terrain Exercise No. 7 

Posting an Outpost. 255 

Terrain Exercise No. 8 

A Visiting Patrol. 299 

Terrain Exercise No. 9 

A Reconnoitering Patrol. 337 


3 














Introduction 

Terrain Exercises are those military exercises in 
which the students carry on the operations of imagi¬ 
nary bodies of troops over the actual terrain. As 
these exercises involve the study of the utilization of 
the ground itself and the application of tactical for¬ 
mations and methods to it, they are the best means, 
aside from practical field work with troops, of giving 
officers and noncommissioned officers practice in 
carrying out the duties that fall to them in war. 

In the Terrain Exercise is found the logical step 
in tactical training, between the theory and practice 
of the classroom and the practical training with 
troops. This method of training is suited to all arms 
and services, and in view of its practical value is 
constantly employed by unit commanders in the 
training of their officers and noncommissioned 
officers. 

Any class of military operations may be practiced, 
such as the operations of covering troops—advance 
guards, flank guards and outposts; the operations of 
the various kinds of patrols; combat—attack and 
defense; approach march and deployment, and the 
tactical cooperation of all special arms. 

The Director 

The smooth working and success of the Terrain 
Exercise depends almost entirely on the ability and 
tactical knowledge of the Director, the care he de¬ 
votes to the selection of the ground, the preparation 
of the problem, and his own personal preparation for 

5 


6 


Terrain Exercises 


the conduct of the Terrain Exercise. To this end a 
study should be made of the tactical training it is 
desired to impart. A problem designed to bring out 
these points should be drawn up and fitted to the 
ground. The successive special situations must 
follow in logical sequence. 

The Director must have in his mind a solution of 
the various situations of the problem and must fa¬ 
miliarize himself with all of its phases to the extent 
that he will be able to make reasonable answer to 
any question that may be propounded. 

He must receive ail the ideas presented by the 
members of the class; take out the good and tact¬ 
fully discard the poor and indifferent. He must take 
care that he does not unduly criticize the members 
of the. class when they make mistakes and faulty 
dispositions. Above all, he must never hold up a 
solution to ridicule. 

Preparation of the Problem 

Having determined upon the tactical subject to be 
studied, the next essential is a problem, clearly and 
tersely stated, logically drawn and easily under¬ 
stood. The several tactical situations should follow 
one another in their natural sequence. Each should 
bring out the tactical points that it is desired to im¬ 
press upon the members of the class. Long and 
complex situations, difficult for the average man to 
grasp,, should be avoided. Situations should be in¬ 
teresting and instructive, natural and simple. 

The next step is to fit the problem to a particular 
section of the terrain that may be available. In this 
connection it is well to draw up a tentative problem 


Introduction 


7 


with its several situations. Then go out on the 
ground and fit the problem to it. 

The Director should carefully work out on the 
ground beforehand the several situations that he 
desires to develop. He should work out the details 
or all possible solutions and prepare himself to dis- 
cuss the advantages and disadvantages of measures 
that may be proposed by members of the class and 
to state the solution that he, himself, prefers, with 
the reasons therefor. 

A sufficient number of copies of the initial prob¬ 
lem, together with the special situations, should be 
prepared so that a copy may be available for each 
member of the class. This is a more satisfactory 
method than the Director explaining them verbally. 
Time is saved and misunderstandings avoided. The 
special situations are numbered serially and issued 
at the proper time, as the Exercise progresses. It is 
a good idea to have an envelope in which to carry 
the cards or slips of paper bearing each special 
situation. 

General Conduct of a Terrain Exercise 

. The problem will ordinarily consist of a general 
situation and several situations. 

Take the class to the point where the Exercise is 
to begin. Distribute copies of the problem and allow 
a few minutes for the members of the class to look 
over the problem and the terrain. The Director then 
reads the problem aloud and points out the topo¬ 
graphical features and places that are referred to. 
The members of the class follow from the copies in 
their possession. 


8 


Terrain Exercises 


Questions are asked by the Director. One or more 
members of the class are required to make a brief 
statement of the problem, the idea being to make 
certain that every man is entirely familiar with the 
tactical situation under consideration. This insures 
a solid foundation on which the succeeding situa¬ 
tions may be developed. 

The first situation is then handed to members of 
the class. The Director cautions them that each 
man is to consider himself as being the commander 
of the unit whose operations are to be considered. 

The solution of the situation is then proceeded 
with. This solution may be required to be reduced 
to writing; it may be given orally; or a combination 
of the two systems may be employed. 

For example: The situation involves the prepara¬ 
tion of a verbal field order. The Director proceeds 
step by step with the details of the matter to be in¬ 
cluded in each successive paragraph, arriving at a 
decision as to just what the wording should be. 

1. Information of the enemy and our supporting 
troops. 

2. Plan of the commander. 

3. Distribution of troops and tactical order for 
each element. 

4. Administration arrangements, where applic¬ 
able. 

5. Place of commander or where messages are to 
be sent. 

Having determined upon the wording of each 
paragraph, the members of the class are required to 
write out the body of the order. 

Where the members of the class have sufficiently 
progressd in their tactical training some of the pre- 


Introduction 


9 


liminary discussion and solution may be omitted and 
the men be required to write out the body of the 
order based on the tactical situation. The written 
solutions are collected by the Director and redis¬ 
tributed to the class, taking care that no man re¬ 
ceives his own solution back again. This is produc¬ 
tive of good results, for if a man knows that his work 
is to be seen by another he will put forth his best 
effort and be more careful with his work. Again, 
the entire solution may be given orally and nothing 
reduced to writing. In this case the Director brings 
out the elements by questions and discussion, and in 
the end one or more members of the class are called 
upon to state the contents of the body of the order. 
This method is excellent for the training of officers 
in the giving of verbal tactical orders. 

The solution having been completed, the subject 
is opened up for discussion. The members of the 
class are encouraged to to ask questions and express 
their views on the various elements under consider¬ 
ation. 

The class is then conducted to the place where the 

next special situation is to be taken up for solution, 

and here the same procedure as outlined above is 

taken. The Terrain Exercise concludes with a short 

conference, in which the Director makes a resume of 

the problems, discusses the several lessons of the 

day, and shows the application of tactical principles 

to them. n . , 

General Rules 


The following general rules should be observed as 
far as practicable: 

a. Weather and climatic conditions should be ac- 


10 


Terrain Exercises 


cepted as they actually exist on the day of the 
Exercise. 

b. Interest is best maintained by bringing up a 
succession of instructive situations, each designed to 
teach some tactical lesson, dealing with each one 
concisely but thoroughly, and promptly passing on 
to the next. Long discussion and personal arguments 
between members of the class are to be avoided. Un¬ 
important phases are passed over quickly, thus al¬ 
lowing the requisite amount of time to be devoted to 
those that are really worth while. 

c. Odinarily four or five situations are about all 
that may be profitably included in one Terrain 
Exercise. 

d. All members of the class should be equipped 
with blank paper of uniform size (to facilitate the 
handling of written solutions), message blanks, pen¬ 
cils, sketching equipment for making rough sketches 
on which tactical depositions may be shown. 

e. Ordinarily large scale maps should not be used. 
One of the valuable features of the Terrain Exercise 
is that all tactical decisions and dispositions are 
based on a study of the ground itself. If the mem¬ 
bers of the class are allowed to have large scale maps, 
the exercise may resolve itself into the solution of a 
map problem whereby the advantage of the study of 
the ground itself is detracted from. 

However, sheets of the United States Geological 
Survey maps should, if practicable, be obtained and 
issued, as it is desirable to accustom officers and non¬ 
commissioned officers to work with small scale maps 
and to familiarize them with this particular map. 

/. The number of men in a class should be limited 
to the number that one director is able to handle. 


Terrain Exercise No. 1. 

Attack of Strong Point—Rifle Company 

General Situation: 

The ( a ) forms the boundary between hostile 
states. An invading Red force was counter attacked 
by Blue troops and after severe fighting the Reds 
have retired. The Blue advance has been stubbornly 
contested. 

Special Situation—Blue: 

The Blue advance was resumed this morning. The 
1st Infantry advancing on the extreme right of the 
Blue line, has been held up. 

After a short delay, the 2nd battalion resumed its 
forward movement, but attempts of the assault 
waves of companies A and B (on its right) to ad¬ 
vance beyond (&) were stopped by fire from the front 
and especially by enfilading machine gun fire 
from (c). 

Heavy firing—artillery and small arms—can be 
heard along the line to the left. Shells fall occasion¬ 
ally within and in front of the area occupied by the 
1st battalion. 

Lieutenant Colonel X, commanding the 1st bat¬ 
talion, has arrived at this point (d) accompanied by 
a part of his staff; Captain C, commanding the sup¬ 
port company C; Captain D, commanding the ma¬ 
chine gun company; and Lieutenant Z, commanding 
a platoon of the Howitzer company, which organi¬ 
zation has been attached to the battalion. 

After studying the situation in his front Lieuten- 


11 



12 


Terrain Exercises 


ant Colonel X summoned Captains A and B, com¬ 
manding the assault companies, and issued verbal 
orders for continuing the attack. 

Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(a) In designating the boundary line some natu¬ 
ral topographical feature should be selected, such as 
a river, creek, canal, crest of ridge, etc. In this prob¬ 
lem it may be assumed that the Red invading force 
has advanced several miles into Blue territory be¬ 
fore its advance was checked by the counter attack. 

(b) The general front occupied by the 1st bat¬ 
talion where it is held up by the fire from the front 
and that from the enemy strong point to the right 
front. In fitting this problem to the ground care 
will have to be taken to get all the features properly 
coordinated. The line of departure for Company C 
may be selected first and the general line of the 1st 
battalion prolonged to the left. Then select the loca¬ 
tion of the strong point with reference to the line of 
departure of Company C. Cover for the deploy¬ 
ment of the company should be available. 

(c) Location of the enemy strong point. This 
should be some topographical feature that might be 
logically occupied as a strong point by the enemy and 
from which the advance of the 1st battalion might be 
interfered with. 

(d) This point should be near the center of the 
front covered by the 1st battalion and should com¬ 
mand a view of the front. There should be reason¬ 
able cover for the battalion commander and his staff. 
In other words, it should not be so exposed to enemy 
fire that the battalion commander could not go there 
to make his personal reconnaissance. 


13 


Attack of Strong Point 
Procedure 

The class will be assembled at (d) where the Ter¬ 
rain Exercise is to begin. 

The Director distributes the sheets containing the 
problem (General Situation and Special Situation— 
•Dlue). A few minutes are allowed the members of 
the class to read oyer the problem after which the 
Director will read it aloud and point out the places 
of importance. One or more members of the class 
will be called upon to state his understanding of the 
tactical situation. 

Care will be taken to indicate the right of the line 
occupied by Company A and the location of the 
enemy strong point will be accurately pointed out. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Before going further into the 
problem it is necessary for every member of the class 
to have an accurate understanding of the formation 
in which the first battalion is advancing. It is neces¬ 
sary for you to visualize the situation just as it would 
appear if the operation were actually taking place. 

The battalion is advancing in attack formation 
with two companies as assault companies (Company 
A is on the right and Company B on the left) and 
one company (C) as battalion reserve. The front 
covered is about 750 yards. The right of Company A 
is at (indicate). Company C is marching about the 
center of the battalion sector and about 500 yards in 
rear of the front lines of the assault companies. The 
1st battalion, being on the right of the Blue line has 
a combat patrol of one squad from the battalion re¬ 
serve covering the right flank. This patrol is ad- 


14 


Terrain Exercises 


vancing about 150 yards to the right and rear of the 
assault echelon. A connecting group of two or three 
men also from the reserve company, maintains com¬ 
munication with the 2nd battalion on the left. As the 
reserve company may be called into action at any 
moment, these detachments are taken from the sup¬ 
port platoon of the company, the 3rd. The battalion 
commander and his staff march between the assault 
echelon and the reserve company. 

When the battalion was held up by the enemy, in¬ 
formation of this fact was sent back to Lieutenant 
Colonel X by the commanders of the assault com¬ 
panies and it was also brought back by the battalion 
intelligence scouts who are with the assault com¬ 
panies. On receipt of the information Lieutenant 
Colonel X came forward to this point to ascertain 
the situation and by a personal reconnaissance, see it 
for himself. Accompanying him were his staff offi¬ 
cers Bn-2; Bn-3, Captains C and D; and Lieutenant 
Z. This is the situation in which we find the bat¬ 
talion commander at the beginning of this Terrain 
Exercise. I hope every member of the class under¬ 
stands this formation and all the details of it. If 
there are any doubts about it now is the time to clear 
them up. If there are no questions we will proceed. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Director will now distribute the sheets bearine- 
Situation No. 1. S 

The Problem 

Situation No. 1: 

You, Captain C, commanding Company C, the bat¬ 
talion reserve, took down the following notes from 
the battalion commander’s orders: 


Attack of Strong Point 


15 


“The 1st battalion will resume its advance, attacking 
the enemy in front and enveloping his left, including the 
strong point.” 

Time of attack—signal from battalion commander.” 

“Line of departure—present front line.” 

Companies A and B make frontal attack covering 
present front of 750 yards. Company A, Base Company.” 

1 Company C will attack the strong point, enveloping 
its left.” 

“One platoon company D and the 1 st platoon Howitzer 
Company will support the attack of Company C. Captain 
D and Lieutenant Z will confer with Captain C regarding 
the assistance to be rendered.” 

“Captain C will notify the battalion commander when 
he is ready to attack.” 

. ‘‘ The attack will be pushed hard. ’ ’ 

You, Captain C, have with you three platoon run¬ 
ners and two company runners. 

Required: 

Your action and orders during the next 20 minutes. 

Procedure 

A few minutes are allowed the members of the 
class to look over the situation. It is then read aloud 
and the necessary explanations made. 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what is the 
formation of Company C, at the time the battalion 
commander’s order is received by Captain C?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “The formation would de¬ 
pend upon the cover available, the distance from the 
front line and the class of fire it is being subjected to. 
In this case I should say that the company will be in 


16 


Terrain Exercises 


dispersed formation either in squad columns or pla- 
oon columns. I would prefer the platoon columns 
because they are more easily controlled. I think I 
would have each platoon in a platoon column. The 
hrst and second platoons would march abreast with 
an interval of at least 40 yards with the third platoon 
marching about 50 yards to the rear and opposite the 
interval between the first and second. Companv 
headquarters would be in the lead.” 

Ihe Director: “That seems to be a very good for¬ 
mation under the circumstances. ? ’ 


(f «on\ted?n%hX°of1Sf g rS a ) e t0 thiS qU6S ' 

“How do you arrive at the interval of 40 yards be¬ 
tween the two leading platoons?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “That is about the minimum 
distance to avoid casualties in more than one column 
from the burst of one shell and it is about the max¬ 
imum distance for control and visibility in the 
woods.” J 


Solution 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, let us assume 

that you are Captain C. You have received the 

orders of the battalion commander. What is vour 
mission?” J 

Captain Hastings: “To attack the enemy’s strong 
point enveloping its left.” 8 

The Director: “In sizing up the situation what 
points would you consider?” 

Captain Hastings: “I would consider the enemy’s 
position, and if possible, go to a point where I can 
make a personal reconnaissance of it. I would con¬ 
sider the route by which I can get my company up to 
he point where I can make the attack and select the 


17 


Attack of Strong Point 

line of departure for the company. I will then de¬ 
cide upon my plan of maneuver and the formation 
of the company for attack.” 

The Director: “In other words, you will make an 
■Estimate of the Situation and upon this you will base 
your decision and in turn your orders 7 * ’ 

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir. That is the idea.” 

The Director: “I want to emphasize the necessity 
oi this process of sizing up the situation on the part 
of all officers charged with a tactical operation. If 
you come to a decision without doing so you may be 
light and you may be wrong. The chances are 
greatly in favor of the latter. If you stop and con¬ 
sider the elements of the problem as outlined by Cap¬ 
tain Hastings the chances are that you will be right. 
In any event you have the odds on your side. Lieu¬ 
tenant Wallace, what troops have been designated to 
support your company?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “A part of the machine gun 
company and a howitzer platoon. ’’ 

The Director: “You will note that these two units 
have been ordered to support your attack. They are 
not attached to your company. What do you under¬ 
stand to be the difference between a supporting unit 
and an attached unit?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “An attached unit becomes 
an integral part of the force and is subject to its com¬ 
mander’s orders. A supporting unit receives its 
orders, not from the commander of the force being- 
supported, but from another source, usually a com¬ 
mon superior.” 

The Director: “That is right. I hope you all note 
the distinction. It is the rule, however, that the sup- 


18 


Terrain Exercises 


porting unit must work with the unit that it is sup¬ 
porting in every way possible so as to insure team¬ 
work in the accomplishment of the common mis¬ 
sion. ” 

Lieutenant Ralston, how would you get your in- 
structions to your platoon leaders, who are back with 
the company ?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I have a runner with me 
from each of the three platoons. I would send these 
runners back to their respective platoons to tell the 

platoon commanders to report to me at.” 

(Lieutenant Ralston would indicate where the pla¬ 
toon commanders are to report.) 

The Director: “Let us assume that you are Cap¬ 
tain C. Just what would you say to the runners V’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would call the platoon 
runners to me and say: 

Do you see that. V (Designating a 

tree or other well defined object.) ‘Each platoon run¬ 
ner will deliver this message to his platoon leader—Pla¬ 
toon leaders will join Captain C at once at . 

(Place). Repeat the message.’ ” 

The Director: “All right. Now let us assume that 
the platoon runners have started back to their pla¬ 
toons, what would you do now?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would go over to the right 
t° make a personal reconnaissance of the enemy 
strong point, select my line of departure for the at¬ 
tack ^and get the 6 line-up’ of the supporting weap¬ 
The Director: “That would seem to be the reason¬ 
able thing to do.” 

The Class is now conducted over to the right, to 





Attack of Strong Point 19 

cl point about the center of the line of departure for 
the attack. 

D y’ ector: “Captain Harvey, let us assume 
ia >ou iave come to this point. You have with you 

e commanders of the machine gun company, Cap¬ 
tain D, and the Howitzer platoon, Lieutenant Z. 
1 ou decide that the line of departure for your attack 
shal be along here (indicating). What instructions 
would you give to Captain D and Lieutenant Z?” 

Captain Harvey: “I would indicate to them where 
I want the machine guns, light mortars, and one 
pounders to be located to support the attack.” 

The Director: “Lou would tell exactly where to 
place the weapons, would you?” 

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “Captain Hodges, do you agree with 
that solution to the problem?” 

Captain Hodges: “No, sir, I do not. It seems to 
me that it would be better for Captain C to indicate 
to Captain D and Lieutenant Z the dispositions that 
he proposes to make—where the line of departure is 
to be and the direction of the attack. Then to leave 
it up to those officers to select the firing positions for 
the weapons. I think Captain C would verify the 
positions selected, but he would at least give the men 
who are supposed to be the experts an opportunity 
to use their knowledge of the subject.” 

The Director: “I think you are right. I believe in 
requiring every man to do his job. These officers 
have been ordered to support the attack. It is up to 
them to select the position where they can get the 
best fire effect with their weapons and to get them 
into position ready to do business. ’ ’ 


20 


Terrain Exercises 


‘ Wliat precautions would you take to indicate the 
Place where the platoon leaders are to assemble, 
Captain James ?” 

Captain Jantes: “I would send one of my company 
runners to the assembly point and order him to tell 
the platoon leaders to wait there for me. ' * 

The Director: “I think that is a wise precaution, 
do not want to take a chance on anything going 
wrong and failing to effect an assembly of the pla¬ 
toon leaders. ” 

“Now, let us consider how the attack is to be made. 

What would be your tactical dispositions, Captain 
James?” 

Captain J antes: X would attack with one Platoon 
(the first), advancing directly against the enemy 
stiong point, and another (the second) working 
around the enemy's left flank and enveloping it. I 
would hold the remaining platoon (the third) as 
company support.” 

The Director: “Where is your line of departure?” 

Captain James: “My line of departure would be 
along here. The right of the first platoon would be 
(indicate). The left of the second platoon will be 
(indicate). Each platoon will cover about 150 yards 
of front. The third platoon will follow in rear of the 
second platoon as company support . 9 9 

The Director: “That seems to be a logical dispo¬ 
sition. Now having decided all of this you should 
give the information to Captain D and Lieutenant X 
so they can go about the task of selecting positions 
for their weapons. How would you do this, Lieuten¬ 
ant Baker?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “Assuming that Lieutenant Z 


Attack of Strong 1 Point 21 

cind Captain D have been with me all the while, I 
would say: 

My first platoon will attack with its right about (in¬ 
dicate). The second platoon with its left about (indicate). 
Each will cover a front of about 150 yards. Select your 
firing positions to cover the attack.’ 

“That is all that should be required. Before issu¬ 
ing final orders for the attack I would verify the 
positions selected/ ’ 

Explanation 

The Director: I hope you have all followed the pro¬ 
cess that we have gone through during the 20 min¬ 
utes, in order to arrive at a decision and the point 
where Captain C is ready to issue his orders for the 
attack. Let us review them briefly: 

1. Send for the platoon commanders to come to 
the front. 

2. Accompanied by Captain D and Lieutenant Z, 
and two runners, make a personal reconnaissance of 
the enemy's position and the terrain and determine: 

(a) The line of departure. 

(b) The tactical formation. 

(c) Direction of the attack. 

( d ) The position of the supporting weapons. 

3. Arrange for a rendezvous where the attack 
order can be issued. 

From all of this you will appreciate that there are 
many things that must be done before an attack of 
this kind can be launched. Battalion and other com¬ 
manders should appreciate that it takes time to do 
all of these things and should have patience with the 
officers whom he has ordered to do it. 


22 


Terrain Exercises 


Attack of Strong Point Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Assemble class at initial point where the Terrain Exercise 

is to begin. 

2. Distribute sheets containing the general situation and 

special situation Blue. Read and explain. Have mem¬ 
bers of class state understanding of situation. 

3. Formation of battalion for attack—Assault companies, re¬ 

serve company, covering patrol on right, connecting pa¬ 
trol on left. 

4. Information system. 

5. Distribute Situation No. 1. Read and discuss. 

6. Formaion of Company C. 

7. Mission of Company C. Personal Reconnaissance. Estimate 

of the situation. Attached and supporting units. 

8. Message to platoon commanders. 

9. Proceed to right and make personal reconnaissance. Firing 

position for the auxiliary weapons. 

10. Mark assembly point for platoon commanders. 

11. Tactical dispositions. Line of departure. Instructions to 

Captain D and Lieutenant Z. 

12. Resume of what has taken place. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

The platoon commanders have assembled at the ap¬ 
pointed redezvous. You, Captain C, have come to 
a decision to attack the enemy strong point with two 
platoons and hold the third as company support. 

Required: 

The orders that you would issue for the attack. 

Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situa¬ 
tion No. 2, reads it aloud and makes such explanation 
as may be necessary. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Before going further with the 





23 


Attack of Strong Point 

problem I desire to again call your attention to the 
five paragraph field order that we use in our service. 
This form of field order was evolved before the war 
and used in our service schools. It is prescribed by 
our Field Service Regulations. When we entered 
the war and our troops went to France we found on 
both the British and French fronts a system of field 
orders that did not agree with our American ideas. 
The orders were most voluminous. They went into 
every detail of procedure and left little to the initi¬ 
ative of the commanders of tactical units. The con¬ 
sequence was that many of these commanders lost 
their initiative. When their orders ran out and 
nothing further had been prescribed for them to do, 
they just naturally did not know what to do and 
stopped until more orders were sent up to them. I 
am not so sure but what this system was responsible 
in the proposition of limited objectives that we found 
when we entered into the campaign. Many of our 
own officers fell for the voluminous order system but 
it did not last long after we got into action. It was 
then abandoned and we reverted to our own five 
paragraph order which filled the bill and met all our 
requirements. You remember that after an attack 
started and was seen to be under way, how quickly 
orders came up to disregard all objectives and push 
on. Our own simple field order system stood the test 
of war and I do not think it will ever be abandoned 
again for any other system. 

The paragraphs of the order include: 

1st paragraph:—Information of the enemy and 
our own troops. 

2nd paragraph:—The plans of the commander. 


24 


Terrain Exercises 


3id paragraph:—Disposition of troops. Orders 
or each element of the command and the tactical in¬ 
structions that pertain to all elements. 

4th paragraph: Administrative arrangements. 

5th paragraph:—Where messages are to be sent 
or location of the command post. 

In preparing the order for the attack under the re¬ 
quirement to our Situation No. 2, I wish you would 
use this form of order. 


Solution 

The Director: “Captain Hall, just what would you 
include m the first paragraph of the order?” 

aptain Hall: I would include the information 
about the enemy holding up our attack and the part 
that his strong point has played with the affair. 1 
would include information of the fact that our sec- 
oncl battalion is resuming the advance and how the 

rest of our battalion is to attack. That is all that 
would be necessary. ” 

The Director: " What would you include in the sec- 
ond paragraph? 

Captain Hall: “My plan—To attack the enemy 
strong point enveloping its left ” 

m \ ect ° r . : “Lieutenant Barry, tell us what you 
\ ould include in the third paragraph 9 9 7 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would include orders for 

e macllme guns, the light mortars and the 37 mm 
guns; orders for the assault platoons, indicating the 

1 °,° ps ’ ] me ° f departure, frontage and the objective • 
orders for the support platoon; orders for covering 
and connecting patrols; indicate the base platoon^ 




25 


Attack of Strong Point 

01 deis for the action to be taken when the enemy 
strong point is captured. ” 

Th e Director: “There will be very little to be pro¬ 
vided for in an administrative way. The location of 
the battalion aid station should be noted and if there 
are any instructions regarding extra ammunition, 
it should be included here. The C. P. of the com¬ 
pany will be near the support platoon and this in¬ 
formation should be placed in the last paragraph of 
the order. ” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now I want each member of the 
class to write out the order of Captain C for the 
attack. ” 

The necessary time is allowed for this and after 
the orders are completed they are collected and again 
distributed to the members of the class, making sure 
that no man gets his own order back again. 

Members of the class are called upon to read the 
order in his possession and it is discussed. 

At the conclusion of this the Director will submit 
the following order for discussion: 

Order 

“The enemy has held up the advance of our battalion 
by fire from that (ridge, edge of woods or other feature) 
and especially by machine gun fire from that enemy strong 
point (describe and indicate location of the enemy strong 
point). The second battalion on our left has resumed 
its advance. Our battalion will attack. Companies A 
and B will advance from their present positions on our 
left and attack the enemy in their front (indicate the 
present positions of Companies A and B). 

“Our Company will attack and capture the enemy 
strong point, enveloping its left. 


26 


Terrain Exercises 


The first platoon Company D, will support our ad¬ 
vance by direct overhead machine gun fire from (indicate 
firing position of the machine guns). 

The 1st platoon howitzer company will support our ad¬ 
vance with light mortar fire from (indicate firing position 
of light mortars) and 37 mm. gun fire from (indicate fir- 
ing position of the 37 mm. gun). 

Lieutenant M. with the 1st platoon, will attack the 
front of the enemy strong point. Line of departure (in¬ 
dicate). Frontage about 150 yards from that (designate) 
to that (designate). Objective enemy strong point. Di¬ 
rection . degrees, magnetic. 

Lieutenant 0, with the 2nd platoon, will attack and 
envelop the left of the enemy strong point. Line of de¬ 
parture (indicate). Frontage, about 150 yards, left of 
platoon at (indicate). Route of advance (designate). 
Objective enemy left. 


Lieutenant P, with the 3rd platoon (less detachments), 
will constitute the Company support and await orders 
(indicate where—should be in rear of the 2nd platoon). 
A combat patrol will be sent out to cover the right flank. 
A connecting group of two men will maintain connection 
with the right of Company A on our left. 

“The 1st platoon, base platoon. 


“After capture the enemy’s strong point will be imme¬ 
diately organized for defense. 

“The battalion aid station is at a point 700 yards in 
rear of Company A. 

“Messages to the support platoon. 

“After issuing the order Captain C will say: 

^ It is now-o’clock, set your watches to agree. 

“Join your platoons. Get them up to the line of de- 
parture. 





27 


Attack of Strong Point 


Notify me at this point when you are ready to attack. 

Begin the attack at my signal.’’ 

Procedure 

The Director will distribute mimeograph copies of 
this order to the members of the class. He will read 
the order. The members of the class follow from the 
copy in their possession. He will point out the fea¬ 
tures of the terrain referred to in the order as he 
reads it and make such comment and explanation as 
may be necessary. 

The Director: “You now see what the order for an 
attack of an infantry company must contain. If you 
omit any of these things the order is not complete. 
Note how the order conforms to the requirements of 
our Field Service Regulations. Are there any ques¬ 
tions V 9 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I note that the 1st and 2nd 
platoons are to attack on a front of about 150 yards. 
How does a platoon cover such a front V’ 

The Director: “The normal interval between 
skirmishers is 5 paces. This should be adhered to 
rigidly in extended order drill. Men will, under the 
stress of danger and excitement, do as they have been 
trained. In spite of the inj miction of the Infantry 
Drill Regulations, I would not change this interval 
in drill for it may lead to bunching and the conse¬ 
quent loss of lives in action. 

The platoon fights in two waves with a section in 
each wave. This gives a wave and consequently a 
platoon a front of 120 yards in action. Where a 
larger front than 120 yards is assigned to a platoon 
to cover, the platoon is placed at about the center of 


28 


Terrain Exercises 


the front and held responsible for the interval on 
each flank to the boundary of the zone of action as¬ 
signed.^ The support section forming the second 
wave, following at a convenient distance, is used by 
the platoon leader in any required part of the pla¬ 
toon zone of action as the situation develops. 

In rare instances a platoon may be deployed with 
both sections on one line, covering a front of 240 
yards. Such a line is very difficult for the platoon 
leader to control and is to be avoided. ” 
i Lieutenant Wallace: “I note the designation of a 
‘base platoon’ in Captain C.’s orders. What is the 
significance of that in a converging attack, such as is 
contemplated?” 

The Director: “A Base Platoon is designated only 
as an aid to the initial formation of the company. 

uiing an approach march, in deploying on the line 
of departure and in advancing to the first firing posi¬ 
tion, the base platoon forms the guide for the com¬ 
pany and helps ensure a coordinated attack. But as 
soon as enemy opposition is met, each platoon makes 
its own fight within its own zone of action and all 
consideration of the ‘base platoon’ is dropped. In 
action, each platoon must observe the action of adja¬ 
cent units and be prepared to assist them. But the 
best possible aid consists in the vast majority of 
cases, in pushing ahead, ‘where the pushing is good’ 
and then threatening in the flank or rear enemy re¬ 
sistances holding up adjacent units. 

In this case, the first firing position’ may be very 
close to, or even coincide with the Line of Departure 
so that the base platoon designation is of especial 
value m the initial deployment.” 





29 


Attack of Strong* Point 


Captain Hastings: “Will the Director please dis¬ 
cuss the personnel of the headquarters of Company 
O m action its positions and formations V 7 

Ike Director: “A rifle company headquarters in 
action consists of: 

^1* The Captain. 

Sergeant, Signal Sergeant, Agents from 
the supporting Machine Gun unit (platoon or com- 
pany), and two company runners all following in two 
short columns behind the captain. When halted 

these men take cover within reach of the captain's 
voice. 


“3. Two buglers, one well to the left flank observ¬ 
ing the connecting group keeping connection with 
Company A and the other observing combat patrol 
covering the right. These buglers will report to the 
Captain any item of information they note. 

“4. Three platoon runners, arranged in a rough 
triangle each between his own platoon and the com¬ 
pany headquarters. These runners keep within call 
or signaling distance of the Captain and each knows 
always the position of his own platoon. By these 
runners the Captain communicates with his three 
platoons. 


“5. Two Company runners at the Battalion Com¬ 
mand Post. These runners keep track of the posi¬ 
tion of their own company and are prepared to take 
messages to it from Battalion headquarters. 

“The position of Company Headquarters is such 
that the Captain can maintain connection with his 
assault platoons, observe the progress of the fight 
personally and especially be ready to throw his sup¬ 
port platoon into the action when and where most 


30 


Terrain Exercises 


needed. During the approach the Captain precedes 
his assault echelon. When the fire opens, Company 
Headquarters drops back to a position between the 
assault echelon and the support platoon. ” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “ Where is the second in com¬ 
mand of the company? There is no mention of him 
in the orders. * ’ 

The Director: “ Yes, I am glad you noted the omis¬ 
sion. The senior Lieutenant, or ‘ second-in-com¬ 
mand ’ remains back at the Company rear echelon 
during a fight. Here he is responsible that ammuni¬ 
tion is forwarded as necessary, that meals are pre¬ 
pared and that all men drifting to the rear are held. 

“ Further, as the casualties among rifle company 
officers are higher than in any other unit in the en¬ 
tire army, keeping this officer out of the fight ensures 
a trained officer to replace the Captain, in case the 
latter becomes a casualty and to reorganize the com¬ 
pany after each battle. 

“ Whenever the Captain becomes incapacitated for 
any reason a runner is sent at once from Company 
Headquarters back to the rear echelon and the sec¬ 
ond in command hastens forward to take command 
of the company. The first sergeant or others of the 
personnel at Company Headquarters acquaint him 
with the situation. It is considered most important 
to have this trained officer in reserve ready to take 
command on short notice. ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: Where will the combat pa¬ 
trol on the right flank march ? ? 7 

The Director: “It will march well out on the right 
flank and i ear of the 2nd platoon, so that if an enemy 
machine gun or patrol fires on the platoon from that 




31 


Attack of Strong Point 

direction the patrol will be in position to attack it.” 

Captain Harvey: “The Director mentioned some- 

tmng about extra ammunition. I did not understand 
what was said?” 

The Director.- “All riflemen of the units of an as¬ 
sault battalion should carry an extra bandolier of 
ammunition when they go into action. This applies 
to the battalion reserve company as well as the as¬ 
sault companies. You can see in this case how delay 
would.be occasioned by stopping to issue extra am¬ 
munition to the men. ’ ’ 

Captain Hodges: “It is noted that you give orders 
for the consolidation and preparation of the enemy 
strong point for defense as soon as it is captured 
Just what is the purpose of this?” 

. TJle Director: “At this time Captain C cannot tell 
just what will happen when he gets into the enemy 
strong point. That is the objective of the attack for 
the time being. He would want the platoon com¬ 
manders to have orders that will carry them until 
he can get up there and decide what to do. The Com¬ 
pany may not stop at the strong point. If the enemy 
is on the run they will follow him up probably. This 
will depend upon the action of the rest of the bat¬ 
talion. In any event we will want a position on 
which to reorganize the company and prepare for 
future eventualities and by preparing the position 
for defense we gain such a position and at the same 

time we are ready to meet a counter attack if it 
comes.’’ 


32 


Terrain Exercises 


Attack of Strong Point Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Assemble class at point designated for the assembly of 

platoon commanders. Distribute Situation No. 2 and ex¬ 
plain. 

2. Explain five paragraph field order. 

3. Consider order for attack in detail, paragraph by paragraph. 

4. Have class write out order. Collect, read and comment on 

solutions. 

5. Comments of problem. Frontage of platoon. Explanation 

of base platoon. Company headquarters in action. Second 
in command. Covering patrol. Extra ammunition prepara¬ 
tions for defense. 


Explanation 

The Director: “Before going further with the 
problem I want to explain to you what happens be¬ 
tween the time the Captain issues his orders for the 
attack and the time that it starts. 

“Having received and understood their orders, the 
platoon commanders go back and join their platoons. 
In doing so they select the route over which they are 
going to conduct their commands up to the line of de¬ 
parture for the attack. 

“Each platoon commander conducts his platoon 
oyer to the right and gets it into approach formation 
diiectly in lear of and with its front as nearly par¬ 
allel to the line of departure as possible. The propo¬ 
sition of bringing a platoon or any other unit up to 
a point immediately in rear of the line of departure 
in a column of files and making the deployment from 
that foimation is fraught with great danger and is 
almost sure to result in confusion, losses and great 
consumption of time. The platoons must be gotten 
into an approcach formation from which they can 



33 


Attack of Strong Point 

leadily deploy on nearing the line of departure. Cap¬ 
tain James, suppose you were commanding the first 
platoon. What formation would you take up in 
bimgmg your platoon up to the line of departure V y 

Captain James: k ‘I would form it in two lines or 
waves each consisting of one section. Each section 
would be in line of squad columns. From this for¬ 
mation I can readily deploy the leading wave in to a 
line of skirmishes covering the front allotted to the 
platoon and hold the rear wave in a line of squad 
columns or deploy it as the circumstances may re¬ 
quire. In any event I have my platoon under com¬ 
plete control all the time.” 

The Director: “I think we can all agree that your 
formation is correct. ’ ’ 

“Now, each platoon commander must get the or¬ 
ders to the men who are to make the attack. When the 
platoon arrives at a point in rear of the line of de¬ 
parture the platoon commanders will assemble their 
noncommissioned officers and scouts at a covered lo¬ 
cation near the line of departure where they can 
command a view of the front. Here he will explain 
the situation and give his orders for the attack. 
These orders will be issued in the regular five para- 
praph order form which I have already explained to 
you. The noncommissioned officers join their units. 
The leading wave is brought up and deployed on the 
line of departure. The scouts move out to the front. 
The second section is held in proper formation (line 
of squad columns or line of skirmishers) from 50 to 
100 yards in rear of the leading wave. The platoon 
commanders signal Captain C that they are ready to 
launch the attack. 


34 


Terrain Exercises 


The special weapons, machine guns and light mor¬ 
tars and the 37 mm. gun, are gotten to their respec¬ 
tive firing positions and the unit commanders signal 

Captain C that they are ready to cover the attacking 
troops with their fire. 

The company support platoon is conducted to its 
position in rear of the second platoon and the pla¬ 
toon commander signals that he is ready. 

Captain C then signals the battalion commander 
that he is all ready to launch the attack. When he 
gets the signal from the battalion commander, he sig¬ 
nals the supporting weapon commanders and the 
platoon commanders to proceed. 

“Now, you may say that all of this sounds well in 
theory, but, you ask, how is it done in actual prac¬ 
tice ? What is the enemy doing all this time ? I ask 
you to visualize the situation from the enemy point 
of view. What would you be doing if you were in 
his place ? You occupy a strong point on the left of 
your line. You have been placed there to protect the 
flank and to bring machine gun fire to bear on our at¬ 
tacking troops to your right. The attack is progress¬ 
ing oft to your right. The firing seems to be getting 
further and further to your rear. You have fears 
that the line is not holding. You have visions of be¬ 
ing left to your fate. You get no information of 
what is taking place over there. In your own im¬ 
mediate front there is little doing. You see nothing 
to indicate what we are doing over here. You have 
no well defined target to fire on. A few scouts are 
seen off to the right oblique (scouts of Companies A 
and B). There is nothing in your front that would 
afford you a target. The scouts that you send out 


35 


Attack of Strong Point 

fi'om the strong point run into our covering patrol 
and either become casualties or are driven back, 
i our strength does not permit sending out a recon- 
noitermg party of sufficient strength to break 
hrough and get any real information of what is 
taking place in your front. You simply have to sit 
and wait for something to develop. I am sure if 
you will place yourself in the enemy’s position at 
this time, you must realize his situation and the con¬ 
flicting thoughts that come across his mind. He is 
just a human as you are. He is just as much afraid. 
He has just the same feeling about the danger of 
the situation as you have, only his situation is worse 
than yours. He must sit and wait for something to 
happen while your activities and preparations oc- 
p u Py your thoughts and attention. You have the 
initiative, you lead and he must follow. 

“When you consider all of these things you will see 
how it is possible to go about the preparation process 
in a comparatively deliberate manner. If you have 
fairly good cover from the fire and view of the enemy 
it is not at all difficult. 

“The greatest danger in all of this is from our own 
side. From the impatience of our own higher com¬ 
manders who think the preparations are taking too 
much time. Brigade and regimental commanders 
who are to the rear and cannot see what is going on 
get impatient with the apparent delays and demand 
that the attack be delivered at once. Even the bat¬ 
talion commander, who is up at the front and ought 
to know better, cannot see how you can possibly con¬ 
sume so much time getting ready. 

6 ‘ That is one of the valuable features of these Ter- 


36 


Terrain Exercises 


rain Exercises. They illustrate and demonstrate to 
officers of all ranks that a certain amount of time 
must be allowed a combat unit to get ready to launch 
an attack and that they may as well sit down and 
take it easy until everything is ready. The war is 
not to be fought in a day. 

^ “Let us take our problem as an example. Our 
Company (C) could be brought up and rushed in¬ 
to action in its attack on the enemy strong point. 
The rifleman would have fought it out with his bare 
hands, so to speak. There would be no supporting 
fire from machine guns, light mortars and one 
pounders. It would have been a direct frontal at¬ 
tack, with no enveloping movement. The chances 
are that it would be a complete failure and the whole 
affair would have to be reorganized and done over 
again. Even if it were successful it would be accom¬ 
panied by ruinous losses that would render the com¬ 
pany totally ineffective for further combat service in 
the near future. 

“By going about the preparations systematically, 
as we have done, the chances for success are infinitely 
greater, the losses will be very much smaller and in 
the long run, a lot of time saved. I hope you will 
all consider these things when you give orders to a 
unit under your command, be it a battalion or a 
small patrol, to embark upon a tactical undertaking. 
Give the commander time to perfect his prepara¬ 
tions. Do not rush him into action until he is ready. 

Procedure 

The class is now conducted up to the line of depar- 
tuie of the platoon. The Director distributes the 
sheets containing Situation No. 3. 


Attack of Strong Point 


37 


The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

The 1st platoon is deployed on the line of depar¬ 
ture—one section in the leading wave in a line of 
skirmishers, with intervals of 5 yards. The second 
section is about 100 yards to the rear in line of squad 
columns. The platoon scouts have worked their 
way forward to.(indicate). 

The supporting troops are in position ready to 
open fire. 

At this moment Captain C signals ‘ 4 Forward 
March”. The supporting weapons open fire on the 
enemy strong point and shots are heard off to the 
right indicating that the 2nd platoon has launched 
its attack. 

You, Lieutenant M, commanding the 1st platoon, 
are at this point when the signal is received. 

Required: 

Describe how the attack is conducted. 

Procedure 

The Director reads over the situation and indi¬ 
cates the position of the troops on the ground. Any 
points that may be in doubt are cleared up at this 
time. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, I wish you 
would explain to the class, just what you think takes 
place.” 

Lieutenant Baker: “During the preparation pro¬ 
cess my platoon scouts would have worked their way 
forward to (indicate on the ground). I assume 
that they have kept under cover and have drawn lit- 




38 


Terrain Exercises 


tie fire from the enemy. The instant I give my sig¬ 
nal to advance they will start forward to get to (in¬ 
dicate) where they can open an effective fire on the 
enemy and thus establish the first firing position. 

“When our supporting weapons open their first 
burst of fire on the enemy strong point it will come 
as a surprise and his men will naturally seek cover. 
I will take advantage of this fact to advance my line 
as far as possible to the front. If he opens effective 
fire I will have to take cover. If not I will keep on 
my rush with the platoon until he does and thus take 
advantage of the few moments when the enemy is 
surprised from the sudden burst of fire from our 
supporting weapons. When he recovers and opens 
fire I will take cover. 

U I will then advance my men by filtration up to the 
line established by the scouts, each man opening fire 
as soon as he arrives on the line. The scouts will 
indicate the target to the men by the use of tracer 
bullets. By this process of fire and movement, I 
will build up my firing line and keep up a well direct¬ 
ed fire on the enemy position.’’ 

The Director: “What kind of fire will your auto¬ 
matic riflemen employ?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “They will employ aimed fire, 
semi-automatic. ’ ’ 

The Director: “About what is the rate of this fire 
with well trained automatic riflemen?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I should say that it would be 
about 30 to 40 shots per minute.” 

Procedure 

The Class is now conducted to the point where the 
first fire position is located. 


39 


Attack of Strong Point 

The Director: 4 'Captain Hall, the first section is 
along this front firing on the enemy strong point, 
rhey are returning the fire, the volume of which is 
just about at a balance with your fire. You hear the 
firing of the 2nd platoon off to the right. You have 
had. a few casualties. What would you do now ? ’ ’ 

Captain Hall: “By a process of fire and movement 
I would work my section further to the front and 
build up a new firing line. (indicate the loca¬ 

tion of the new line).” 

The Director: “What would your second section 
be doing?” 

Captain Hall: “It would be following the advance 
ready to join the firing line when I call upon it to do 
so.” 

The class is now conducted up to the new fire posi¬ 
tion. 

The Director: 44 The line has worked forward to 
this position with a few more casualties. It is ap¬ 
parent that the enemy’s fire is increasing in volume 
and you find that it will be impossible for you to con¬ 
tinue the advance. In other words you cannot at¬ 
tain fire superiority with your present force on the 
firing line. What would you do about that, Lieuten¬ 
ant Barry?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would signal the section 
Fire Faster” and under cover of this increased 
volume of fire I would bring my 2nd section up onto 
the line, and have the men join in the firing.” 

(Note.—The solution of all the above will depend upon the 
lay of the ground where the Terrain Exercise is staged. The 
points to be brought out by the Director are that the first wave 
will continue its advance by its own efforts as far to the front 
as possible. When it cannot longer maintain the superiority of 



40 


Terrain Exercises 


fire necessary to enable it to continue, the 2nd section must be 
brought up and continue the forward movement. When the 
2nd section has joined the 1st on the line the subsequent prog¬ 
ress of the action will depend upon how well the superiority 
of fire can be maintained. If the volume is such that the 
enemy can be kept down and prevented from firing effectively 
the advance can be continued, by the utilization of fire and 
movement. Ordinarly the enemy will realize the hopelessness 
of the situation and evacuate his position before it is necessary 
to carry it by assault.) 


Attack of Strong Point Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1. Explain what happens between the time the attack order is 

issued and the time the attack is ready to start: Pla¬ 
toon commanders join platoons, and conduct them to the 
front. Approach march formation. Column of files to 
be avoided. Orders of platoon commanders. Deploy¬ 
ment for attack. Action of special weapons. Signals in¬ 
dicating readiness for attack. 

2. Discuss necessity for thorough preparation for the attack. 

Describe the situation from the enemy’s point of view. 
Advantage of the initiative. 

3. Explain necessity for time being allowed subordinate com¬ 

manders to prepare to launch attack. 

4. Conduct class to line of departure for 1st platoon. 

5. Distribute sheets bearing Situation No. 3; read and explain. 

6. Description of attack. Initial advance. Scouts. Advance 

of platoon. Building up first fire position. Superiority 
of fire. Continue advance by fire and movement. Em¬ 
ployment of automatic rifles. 

7. Conduct class to next fire position. Failure to hold superior¬ 

ity of fire. Bring up second section. Subsequent pro¬ 
gress. Assault. 


Procedure 

The Class is now conducted to a point where the 
operation of both the 1st and 2nd platoons may be 
observed by the company commander. 



Attack of Strong Point 


41 


The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

r You, Captain C, have come forward to this point. 
You see your assault platoons covered by their own 
fire and that of the supporting weapons advancing 
rapidly on the enemy strong point. They are now 
(indicate the general line that each platoon occu¬ 
pies.) The volume of fire of the enemy has mater¬ 
ially decreased. You note that the supporting weap¬ 
ons have lifted their fire and are now firing well 
beyond the strong point. A few moments later you 
note that both platoons rush towards the strong point 
with bayonets fixed. 

The 3rd platoon has now arrived at the line of de¬ 
parture of the 2nd platoon. Companies A and B 
seem to be carrying out their attack on your left; 
there is no machine gun fire to interefere with them 
now. 

Required . 

What do you, Captain C, do ? 

Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situa¬ 
tion No. 4 to the class, reads it aloud to them, points 
out the location of the troops and makes any verbal 
explanations that may be necessary. 

Explanation 

The Director: “I want each member of the class to 
visualize the situation as it now stands. In the be¬ 
ginning Captain C assigned definite missions to each 
of his platoons. He left the essential details to the 
platoon commanders. He is driving a team of two 
units with a third held in reserve. His team has 


42 


Terrain Exercises 


been driven into the enemy’s position. They have 
accomplished the main part of their mission and 
something more is necessary on the part of the Cap¬ 
tain. Lieutenant Barry, knowing the situation as 
it is, what would you do ?” 

Solution 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would go forward and join 
my two platoons at the enemy strong point.’’ 

The Director: “Would you take any other action 
before doing that?” 

Lieutenant Barry: ki I think not, sir. I would want 
to know the situation up there as soon as possible.” 

The Director: “What would you do, Lieutenant 
Himt ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send a messenger back 
to the 3rd platoon to get started on its way to the 
captured position. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Just how would you do that?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would turn to the runner of 
the 3rd platoon, who is with me and tell him: 

‘Take this message to the leader of the 3rd platoon: 

The 3rd platoon will report to Captain C at the enemy 
strong point at once, moving by the shortest route.’ ’ 

I would have the runner repeat the message and 
make sure that he, himself, understands what is 
wanted.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “You are right. There is no doubt 
but that the presence of the 3rd platoon will be re¬ 
quired at the enemy position just as soon as it can 
be gotten up there. The assault platoons will be 
more or less disorganized by their attack. They will 


43 


Attack of Strong Point 

be out of hand. Squads, sections and platoons will 
be mixed up. There will be some hand to hand fight¬ 
ing with some of the enemy who have failed to make 
their get-away or with some determined men who 
will hold on to their local position until they are 
driven out with cold steel. 

“It is to provide for just such a situation as this, 
that we hold out a resexwe—a formed body of troops 
that has not been in the assault. A body that is ab¬ 
solutely in hand and under control. It can be con¬ 
ducted up to the enemy position, take it over and he- 
ready for any eventually that may occur. 

“As a matter of fact the assault troops should not 
be allowed to go into the captured position unless it 
is absolutely necessary to do so to drive out or cap¬ 
ture those remaining. The reasons for this are ob¬ 
vious. When the enemy abandons the position, he 
assumes that it is occupied by his opponent and will 
turn as great a volume of fire on it as possible with 
a view to inflicting losses on our disorganized troops. 
With a formed body of troops, under control, we 
can make such tactical distribution of the units as 
may be required, posting them where the greatest 
amount of shelter exists and thereby reduce casual¬ 
ties to a minimum.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, let us as¬ 
sume that you have sent back the message to the com¬ 
mander of the 3rd platoon. What would you do 
now?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would go forward and 
join my assault platoons.” 

The Director: “Would you do anything about get- 



44 


Terrain Exercises 


ting some of the special weapons up to the captured 
position ?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “No sir, not yet. It is my 
understanding that the machine gun and howitzer 
platoons were only detailed with Company C to sup¬ 
port the attack on the enemy strong point. At the 
conclusion of the affair that they are to report back 
to the battalion commander. ” 

The Director: “You are right. If, however, Cap¬ 
tain C decides that he needs them he can send a run¬ 
ner to the battalion commander and request that they 
be detailed for further duty with the company.” 


Attack of Strong Point Card No 4 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to point where operations of both 1st and 2nd 

platoons can be observed. 

2. Distribute the sheets bearing Situation No. 4. Read and ex¬ 

plain. 

3. Visualize situation. Teamwork. Action taken by Captain 

4 ' Sen Mes 0 sag * 1 2 3 * 5 6 7 e rd in Pl dete 0 i?. C ° me e ” emy position - 

5. Explain necessity for Reserve Platoon. Assault platoons 

disorganized by attack and out hand. Value of formed 
body under control. 

6. Danger of entering captured positions. 

7. Action with respect to supporting troops. 


Procedure 

The Class is now conducted forward to the cap¬ 
tured enemy strongpoint. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

r ^arriving at captured strong point, Captain 
C finds the 1st and 2nd platoons somewhat mixed up 











45 


Attack of Strong Point 

and disorganized. Some of the men are on the far 
side firing on the retreating enemy. Some are seen 
to be hunting souvenirs. There are a considerable 
number of enemy dead and wounded lying about. 
About a dozen enemy prisoners are standing oft to 
one side with their hands up. 

The 3rd platoon is seen advancing in the distance. 
Lieutenant P, with the platoon headquarters is com¬ 
ing forward at a run. 

Companies A and B to the left are advancing and 
the whole enemy line is apparently retreating. 

Required . 

What action do you, Captain C, take? 

Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets bearing the sit¬ 
uation to the class, reads it over and makes the neces¬ 
sary explanations, points out the places mentioned, 
etc. 

Solution 

The Director :“ Captain Hastings, what would you 
do under the circumstances V 9 

Captain Hastings: “In the first place I would want 
to see the platoon commanders and give them instruc¬ 
tions as to the action to be taken. I would call the 
runners of the 1st and 2nd platoons and order them: 

“ ‘Find your platoon commanders. Tell them to re¬ 
port to me here, at once.’ 

“While waiting for the platoon commanders to 
come I would size up the situation and be prepared 
to issue my orders soon after their arrival.” 

The Director: “I think we can all agree that that 
is the logical procedure. In sizing up the situation, 


46 


Terrain Exercises 


what points would you consider, Lieutenant Wal¬ 
lace ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant TV allace: “T would consider what my 
mission is now. The company is the battalion re¬ 
serve. It was thrown into the attack for the definite 
purpose of capturing the enemy strong point that 
was holding up the advance of the battalion. We 
have completed that mission, the battalion is con¬ 
tinuing the advance. Up to the moment no other 
mission has been assigned. I would not know 
whether it is the desire of the battalion commander 
that we continue the advance as an assault unit of 
the battalion or revert to the former status of batta- 
lon leserve. Until I receive definite orders on the 
subject I would stay right here and cover the right 
fiank of the battalion. I estimate that I will <mt 
such orders in a very short time. & 

“ The enemy has several courses of action open to 
him. He may continue to fall back and not molest 
us. He may make a counter attack, though this is 

ri £ ^ e . ma T concentrate a large volume 

of me on this particular point with a view to causing 
serious casualties in our disorganized ranks. 

Our own battalion is continuing its advance and 
does not seem to need our support for the time being. 
The 1st and 2nd platoons must be withdrawn and 
1 eoi ganized. The 3rd platoon can take over the duty 
of security. The enemy prisoners must be taken 
care of and others that may be in the position must 
be rounded up. Souvenir hunters and stragglers 
must be rounded up and sent to their proper units. 


Attack of Strong Point 47 

“The sanitary troops are now taking care of our 
wounded. 

6 4 The battalion commander will want to know what 
has happened on our front and I would send him a 
message telling him about it. 

4 4 My decision would be to withdraw and reorgan¬ 
ize the 1st and 2nd platoons. Have the 3rd platoon 
take over the duty of security, mop up the position 
and take charge of the prisoners. Send a message 
to the battalion commander. 

“All of this would constitute my hurried estimate 
of the situation. When the platoon commanders as¬ 
semble I will give the necessary orders to put my 
decision into effect.” 

The Director: “That is very good. Now, Lieuten¬ 
ant Ralston, let us assume that the platoon comman¬ 
ders are assembled and you are ready to give them 
their orders. What is the first thing you would do ? ” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would want to get my re¬ 
port off to the battalion commander as soon as pos¬ 
sible.” 

The Director: “Just how would you do this7” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would write it out and 
send it by a runner.” 

The Director: “Do you think you would take the 
time to do that? You have your first sergeant with 
you. He should be able to write out the message and 
I think you would have him do it. That leaves you 
free to go ahead with your orders to the platoon 
commanders. You would indicate roughly what you 
want to go into the message to the battalion comman¬ 
der and leave the rest to the first sergeant. Now, 
tell us what you would include in the orders to the 
platoon commanders, Captain Harvey?” 


48 


Terrain Exercises 


Captain Harvey: “I would give the orders about 
as follows: 

“The other companies of our battalion are advancing 
on our left. 

“This company will reorganize and prepare for further 
service. 

“The 3rd platoon will relieve the firing line with one 
section and take over the security of the position. Have 
the men of the 1st and 2nd platoons fall back and as¬ 
semble by squads on this side (indicate) of the position. 
The remaining section will take charge of the prisoners, 
mop up the position, collect other prisoners and stragglers. 
The covering patrol of one squad will remain out on the 
right. 

“The 1st platoon will assemble at (indicate place). 

“The 2nd platoon will assemble at (indicate place). 

The 1st and 2nd platoons will reorganize, check casual¬ 
ties and report results. Secure ammunition from dead 
and wounded. 

“Messages to me here.” 

The Director C‘I think that order will meet the im¬ 
mediate requirements of the situation. Now, Cap¬ 
tain Hodges, what would you include in the message 
to the battalion commander?” 

Captain Hodges: “I would make it very brief. 
Something to this effect: 

“ ‘ Enemy strong point captured at.(Time). My 

casualties about., killed;.wounded. Prisoners 

.(number). Am reorganizing. (Such additional in¬ 
formation about enemy that would be of value to the Bat¬ 
talion commander). Await your further instructions.’ ” 

The Director: “I think that message will give the 
battalion commander all the information that he re- 






49 


Attack of Strong Point 

quires immediately. It informs him of the fact that 
you have accomplished your mission. It tells him 
how many casualties you have had which will enable 
him to determine the further effective strength of the 
company and what it is capable of doing in the fu¬ 
ture. It tells him what you are now doing and in¬ 
dicates that further instructions are desired. His 
reaction should be to send you instructions what to 
do, either to continue to the front as an assault unit 
of the battalion or to revert to the role of battalion 
reserve. Now, I want each member of the class to 
write out the orders of Captain C and the message 
that he would send to the battalion commander. Fol¬ 
low out the five paragraph order system. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

When the orders and the message are complete 
they will be collected and redistributed. One or 
more members of the class will be called upon to read 
the order and message in his possession and to criti¬ 
cize it. 

Explanation 

The Director: “This situation concludes the Ter¬ 
rain Exercise. I hope that it has been valuable to all 
of you and has brought out some points that will 
stand you well in hand if you ever be called upon to 
undertake an operation of this kind in actual service. 

“I hope you all now appreciate what training is 
necessary on the part of officers and noncommis¬ 
sioned officers to carry on such an operation. 

“I thank you for your attention.” 


50 


Terrain Exercises 


Attack of Strong Point Card No. 5 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to captured enemy strong point. 

2. Hand out Situation No. 5. Read and discuss. Point out 

places mentioned. 

3. Order platoon commanders to report to Captain C. 

4. Estimate of the Situation. Mission, action of enemy, action 

of own troops, withdrawal of the 1st and 2nd platoons to 
reorganize. Relief by 3rd platoon. Decision. 

5. Report to battalion commander. First sergeant to prepare 

message. 

6. Orders: Information of enemy and own troops. Plan of com¬ 

mander. 3rd platoon take over duty of security. Re¬ 
lieve 1st and 2nd platoons. Prisoners and stragglers. 
Mop up position. 1st and 2nd platoons assemble and re¬ 
organize, check casualties, replenish ammunition. 

7. Message to battalion commander: Accomplished mission. 

Casualties. Prisoners. Reorganization. Await further 
instructions. Reaction of battalion commander to mes¬ 
sage. 


Note.—Acknowledgment is made to Major Reginald H. 
Kelly, Infantry, for the background on which this Terrain Exer¬ 
cise is based.— The Author. 



Terrain Exercise No. 2. 

Approacn March and Deployment 

The Problem 

Special Situation—Blue: 

The Red forces have been retreating (a) before 
the attack of the Blues for the past two days, con¬ 
testing every yard of the advance. 

The 10th Blue division is operating in the Sector: 

Right boundary: (6) 

Left boundary: (c) 

The Division is disposed: 

19th Brigade as attacking brigade. 

20th Brigade as division reserve. 

The attacking brigade is disposed regiments side 

by side, the- Infantry in the right half of the 

sector: the-Infantry in the left half of the sec¬ 

tor. Regiments are echeloned by battalion; one as 
assault; one as support and one as reserve. 

The-Infantry has the 2nd battalion as assault; 

the 1st battalion as support and the 3rd battalion as 
reserve. 

After an all day fight the assault battalion (2nd) 
has halted along (d) where it has been ordered to 
stabilize for the night in order to permit arrange¬ 
ments to be made for the continuation of the attack 
tomorrow morning. 

The support battalion (1st) has reached (e) where 

it is halted. 





52 


Terrain Exercises 


Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(a) The compass direction of the retreat of the 
red forces: North, south, east. west. 

(b) State the right boundary of the sector over 
which the division is operating. 

(c) State the left boundary of the sector over 
which the division is operating. 

If practicable the problem should be staged so that 
there may be a well defined topographical feature 
that will mark one of these boundaries of the Divi¬ 
sion sector. 

( d ) The general location of the front lines of the 
assault battalion. This line should in general, be 
perpendicular to the lines of advance of the division 
and if practicable should lay along some well defined 
topographical feature of the terrain so that it may 
be readily indicated to the class. 

0) The location of the halting place of the 1st 
Battalion. This should be at least 1500 to 1800 yards 
in rear of the line ( d ) above. 

Procedure 

The class is conducted to ( e ) where the Terrain 
Exercise is to begin. The Director will distribute 
the sheets containing Special Situation Blue and a 
few minutes are allowed the members of the class to 
read it over. 

The Director will then read the Situation aloud, 
point out the places mentioned where practicable and 
make such explanations as may be necessary. 

The Director: ‘‘Lieutenant Williams, the situation 
states that the 10th division is operating on a certain 
sector. What do you understand by that?” 


Approach March 


53 


Lieutenant Williams: “It is the area lying be¬ 
tween the two designated boundaries which has been 
allotted to the division and to which, in general, the 
division confines its operations. As I understand it 
there is a division on our right and another on our 
left. If each were not given a definite area to oper¬ 
ate over I can readily see how there might be great 
confusion over the question as to just who is respon¬ 
sible for a certain area. By assigning definite boun¬ 
daries this question is eliminated. The division as¬ 
signed to the particular sector is responsible for 
everything in the sector.” 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what do you 
understand by the term attacking brigade?” 

Captain Hastings: “It is the term used to desig¬ 
nate the Brigade that is leading—the brigade that is 
making the attack against the enemy—as distin¬ 
guished from the brigade that is held in reserve. ’ ’ 

Explanation 

The Director: “There are several ways of dispos¬ 
ing the infantry of a division for combat. I will 
outline them briefly in order that you may see what 
the formations are and the relation that our bat¬ 
talion has to them. 

“The division may be deployed with the two bri¬ 
gades side by side, each brigade being echeloned in a 
column of regiments. The leading regiment of each 
brigade is in turn echeloned in a column of battalions, 
one as assault, one as support and one as local re¬ 
serve. The second regiment (less 1 battalion) of 
each brigade forms the brigade reserve. The re¬ 
maining battalion from each of these regiments is 


54 


Terrain Exercises 


held out by the division commander as a division re¬ 
serve. In this case the division commander is driv¬ 
ing a two unit team with the units abreast. Under 
exceptional circumstances the division may be de¬ 
ployed with the brigades side by side with all four 
regiments in line each echeloned in a column of bat¬ 
talions. This formation uses up a division very rap¬ 
idly and is only employed where an exceptionally 
wide front has been assigned. 

The third method of deployment is that indicated 
in the problem we have under consideration. There 
is an attacking brigade with the regiments side by 
side, each regiment echeloned in a column of bat¬ 
talions, one as attacking, one as support and one as 
reserve. This is a very good formation and has 
many advantages. It is one that was employed by 
many of the successful divisions in France. The 
Reserve brigade is held far back in order to reduce 
fatigue and casualties to a minimum, so that when it 
is called upon to relieve the attacking brigade it is in 
the best of condition and comparatively fresh and 
rested. In this formation the division commander 
drives his team of units in tandem. Now, I want 
every member of the class to visualize this formation 
and get it firmly fixed in your minds. Let us review 
it again: 

“Our brigade, the 19th is the attacking Brigade. 
We have our two regiments abreast. Our regiment 
occupies the half of the sector which extends 
right up through here (indicates) ; the other regi¬ 
ment occupies the-half of the sector which ex¬ 

tends right along parallel to us along there (indicat¬ 
ing). Our 2nd battalion has been the assault bat- 





Approach March 


55 


talion and has carried the advance forward today. 
We have been following as support battalion, and at 
the end of the day’s work have arrived here. Our 
3rd battalion has been following us at a distance of 
about 1,000 yards as the reserve. 

“The 1st battalion has gotten as far forward as it 

possibly can today and has halted along the. 

(indicate the general line of the battalion) where it 
has been ordered to stabilize for the night in order to 
permit arrangements to be made for continuing the 
advance tomorrow morning. The problem of this 
Terrain Exercise has to do with those arrangements, 
in so far as the Infantry is concerned. We are the 
support battalion, it is up to us to relieve the assault 
battalion tonight and carry on the fight tomorrow. 
How are we going to do it V’ 

The Problem 

Situation No. 1. 

It is now (/) p. m. 

You, Major A, commanding the 1st battalion, 
which is now support battalion of the regiment, re¬ 
ceive an order from the regimental commander, the 
body of which reads as follows: 

1. The enemy has continued to retreat during the day. Our 
Army is pushing him to the limit. Our 2nd battalion 

has reached the. (state general line that has been 

reached) where it is in close contact with the enemy. 
The general attack will be continued all along the line 
tomorrow morning. 

2. A redistribution of troops in the regimental sector will 
be effected tonight. 

3. (a) The 1st battalion will relieve the 2nd battalion on 




56 


Terrain Exercises 


the front line and be prepared to continue the at¬ 
tack tomorrow morning. Details of Artillery prepa¬ 
ration, tank assistance and zero hour will be com¬ 
municated later. 

(b) The 3rd battalion will relieve the 1st battalion as 

support and take position at . (location of 

the 1st battalion). This relief will be completed by 

( g ) o’clock p. m. 

(c) When relieved the 2nd battalion will fall back to 

(h) , reorganize and replenish ammunition, equip¬ 
ment and supplies. It will be the reserve battalion. 

( d ) Detachments of the Howitzer Company now with 
the 2nd battalion will remain in position and be 
reported to the commanding officer 2nd battalion, 
when the relief is effected. 

(e) Details of reliefs will be arranged by battalion com¬ 
manders concerned. 

4. Completion of reliefs and moves will be reported to 

Regimental C. P. by telephone and runner. 

5. Messages to Regimental C. P. at . ( i ). 

Required: 

Your order for the approach march and arrange- 

ments for carrying out the orders of the regimental 
commander. 

Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(/) The time at which the order of the regimental 
commander is received by the battalion commander, 
ihis should be before dark. 

(g) The time by which the 3rd battalion should 
relieve the 1st battalion. This should be an hour or 
more after the time indicated by (/). 

(h) The location to which the 2nd battalion is to 




Approach March 57 

march and assemble when it is relieved by the 1st 
battalion. 

O’) The location of the regimental C. P. It should 
be some where in the regimental sector between the 
support and reserve battalions. 

Procedure 

The Director will distribute the sheets containing 
Situation No. 1 to the members of the class. He will 
read the situation aloud, point out the places and lo¬ 
cations referred to and make such explanations as 
may be necessary. 

One or more members of the class will be called 
upon to state his understanding of the situation and 
this will be continued until it is apparent that all 
members of the class understand it and are ready to 
proceed with a solution on the same basis of under¬ 
standing. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Before going ahead with the prob¬ 
lem I want to say a few words about the importance 
of this subject of approach march and deployment. 

Prior to the war we did not appreciate the neces¬ 
sity for extensive drill and instruction in the subject 
of approach march, deployment and the relief of 
units on the firing line. There was little literature 
on the subjects and what there was dealt only in glit¬ 
tering generalities. Once in a while a training pro¬ 
gram included the subject 4 Deployment,’ but no one 
took it seriously and such as we carried out, were ex¬ 
ecuted in a purely perfunctory manner. 

“In the training of troops for modern warfare the 
subject must be given the place and attention that it 


58 


Terrain Exercises 


deserves. Troops must be trained to take up the ap¬ 
proach march formation, and make a deployment 
therefrom, both day and night, over all kinds of 
ground. They must be trained in the methods and 
technique of making a relief of a force on the firing 
line at night and overcome the obstacles that are 
habitually encountered. The great danger at night 
is in losing direction. This results in a command 
getting lost and failure to get to the line of departure 
ready to 'Jump off’ at H Hour. 

The failure of a single battalion in this respect 
may imperil a whole military operation and cost the 
lives of thousands of men. Unless the troops told 
off to make the attack are in place ready to 'jump 
off’ and follow the barrage at H Hour there is not 
the slightest chance for success. The barrage goes 
on. The enemy is given time to man his positions 
and machine guns and the attack on that particular 
front is held up, usually with enormous losses. The 
whole attack has to be reorganized and started anew. 
Those of you who have had experience with an attack 
which was a failure know how much time is lost and 
how many casualties may result from such affairs.” 

Procedure 

The Director: "Now, let us take up the problem as 
it concerns our battalion. The battalion command 
post we will say is right here where we are standing. 

Just how do you visualize the distribution of the bat¬ 
talion, Lieutenant Wallace?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: "The battalion headquarters 
company would be in this vicinity. Company A 
would be the leading company on the right; Com- 




Approach March 


59 


pany B would be the leading company on the left; 
Company C would be following Company A at a dis¬ 
tance of say 100 yards and Company D would be fol¬ 
lowing Company B at about the same distance. Each 
company would be in two echelons, an assault echelon 
of two platoons and a support echelon of one pla¬ 
toon, the latter following at about 50 yards. The 
men have taken advantage of such natural cover that 
exists and where there is none they have dug individ¬ 
ual fox holes to get into. These afford a lot of cover 
from shrapnel fire.” 

The Director: “ You have given a very good picture 
of the formation. Are there any questions ? If you 
do not understand all that is being said, now is the 
time to speak out. We must all approach the solu¬ 
tion of the problem on the same basis to get the great¬ 
est benefit from it.” 

The Director will point out to the members of the 
class the location of the various elements of the bat¬ 
talion on the ground and go into the details of the 
formation if it is deemed necessary. 

Solution 

The Director: “The requirement of the problem 
involves Major A’s order for the approach march. 
Lieutenant Ralston, what must the Major do before 
he is ready to issue his orders?” 

< Lieutenant Ralston: “He must size up the situa¬ 
tion, arrive at a decision as to what he is going to do 
and then put this decision in the form of an order.” 

The Director: “What is the first part of his Esti¬ 
mate of this Situation?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “He will determine upon his 


60 


Terrain Exercises 


mission. I would say that the immediate mission is 
to relieve the 2nd battalion and that the next phase 

of it is to prepare to continue the attack tomorrow 
morning.” 

The Director: “Very good. What is the next 
point he will consider, Captain Harvey V 9 

Captain Harvey: “He must consider the enemy. 
The enemy has been retreating before our attack for 
the past two days. This shows that he is inferior in 
strength and morale. His defense arrangements 
must be very much impaired and the confusion that 
exists behind his lines may readily be imagined. The 
fact that he is doggedly contesting our advance and 
that his retreat has nowhere broken down to the ex¬ 
tent that we have been able to break through his lines 
with a deep penetration shows that he still has a lot 
of fight in him. As soon as it is sufficiently dark to 
preclude the possibility of aerial observation the 
enemy will begin shifting his defense elements with a 
view to preparations to resist our advance again to- 
morrow. He will be effecting a relief of his worn- 
out troops, shifting his machine guns to more advan¬ 
tageous positions, changing his artillery so as to more 
effectively cover the ground which we will have to 
pass over tomorrow if our attack is a success. All 
of this will consume several hours. During the 
peiiod of readjustment and redistribution of troops 
the hostile activity and fire will naturally be very 
much diminished. During this same period from 
dusk until several hours later these same things will 
be happening in our lines, as you can see. Our artil¬ 
lery will have to be brought up to new positions for 
the destructive bombardment and the barrage. Our 


Approach March 


61 


machine guns have to be placed in position to better 
support the riflemen. Our tanks have to be gotten 
up i eady for the 6 jump off 1 to morrow morning and 
our worn-out troops on the front lines have to be 
lelieved. It will be a period of lessened activity on 
both sides. During this period we will take advan¬ 
tage of the opportunity to effect the relief of the 2nd 
battalion on the line. ” 


(Note.—The terrain over which the 
relief should now be discussed.) 


approach march and the 


D lrec t° r: “That is a very good discussion of 
the consideration of the enemy and our troops. Cap¬ 
tain Hodges, what other factors enter into the esti¬ 
mate of the situation V 9 

Captain Hodges: “Our plans, I should say, the 
Major would want to determine on the formation 
that he will adopt for the approach march. He wants 
to anive on the front line with his assault elements 
in the best possible formation to go into action. It 
will be more and more difficult to make changes in the 
formation as he approaches the location of the front 
lines. He will therefore start his approach march in 
as nearly the formation that he wants to be in when 
he arrives on the line. ’ ’ 

The Director: “You are right. In making a re¬ 
lief of this kind you cannot march a battalion up 
within the zone of rifle and machine-gun fire in a 
column of files and then expect to get into combat 
formation and effect a relief properly. It simply 
cannot be done. You must get into your formation 
sufficiently far back to make sure of it and then take 
advantage of the various invulnerable formations to 
cross dangerous ground to the best advantage and 


62 


Terrain Exercises 


with a minimum of losses. Now, Captain James, 
what would be your decision ?” 

Captain James: “To march to the front and effect 
the relief of the 2nd battalion as soon as possible 
after dusk.” 

The Director: “Very good. Now all of what we 
have said is termed the ‘Estimate of the Situation.’ 
I hope you all appreciate the necessity for the bat¬ 
talion commander going through this process of 
thought before arriving at his decision and framing 
up his order based on it. 

“We are now ready to proceed with a discussion of 
the Major’s order. Lieutenant Baker, what would 
you include in the first paragraph?” 

Lieutenant Laker: “The information of the enemy 
and our own troops. This would include information 
about the enemy’s retreat all along the line during 
the day; of the point reached by the front lines of 
our 2nd battalion; of the proposed attack tomorrow 
morning; of the fact that the 3rd battalion will re¬ 
lieve our battalion tonight; of the action to be taken 
by the 2nd battalion after we relieve it. This is all 
that it would be necessary for the troops to know at 
this time.” 

The Director: “I think you have covered the essen¬ 
tial points. Captain Hall, what would you include in 
the second paragraph of the order?” 

Captain Hall: “I would state my plan, to the effect 
that we are to relieve the 2nd battalion tonight. ’ ’ 

The Director: “What is the next part of the order, 
Lieutenant Barry?” 

Lieutenant Barry ; “The disposition of the troops 
and the orders for each element of the battalion: I 


Approach March 


63 


would want the intelligence section of my headquar¬ 
ters company to get to the front at the earliest pos¬ 
sible moment, secure the intelligence ‘dope’ and be 
Prepared to take over the intelligence functions as 
soon as the relief is effected. I would order the sec¬ 
tion to proceed up to the C. P. of the 2nd battalion 
right away and instinct them to get on the job. I 
would also want my communications platoon to get 
up to the front and make arrangements to take over 
the communication net and the message center of the 
2nd battalion. If these outfits get an early start they 
will be able to accomplish much before it gets dark. 
They should lose no time in getting to the front.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what would you 
include in the orders for the companies of the Bat¬ 
talion?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “The Major has decided upon 
the formation already. There only remains the task 
of putting the decision into an order. I would pre¬ 
serve the present dispositions of the units and direct: 

Company A to march at- (time), in approach 

march formation; designate the sector of the com¬ 
pany ; announce the guide (right or left) towards the 
base company; give the compass bearing of the di¬ 
rection of the march and to make sure that contact 
will not be lost with the base company will caution 
to that effect. I would also include in this part of the 
order the fact that Company A is to relieve the As¬ 
sault Company of the 2nd battalion which is immedi¬ 
ately in its front. The orders for Company B, which 
is to be the other Assault Company, would contain 
the same instructions as Company A with the addi¬ 
tion of a sentence giving the Company a directing 



64 


Terrain Exercises 


line in addition to the compass bearing of the line of 
march. 

“I would include in the orders for Company C the 
same line of instructions as for Company A except 
that I would tell them the distance they are to follow 
Company A and the fact that they are to relieve the 
local support company of the 2nd battalion. 

‘ Company D’s orders will include the same in¬ 
structions contained in these for Company C except 
directions for them to relieve the machine gun ele¬ 
ments of the 2nd Battalion. 

“I think these instructions would be all that are 
necessary for the four companies of the battalion to 
get them started on the march. ” 

The Director: “You have covered the points very 
well. But, there are some instructions that pertain 
to all of the units of the battalion. These would be 
included in the final sub-paragraph of paragraph 3 
of the order. This paragraph is denominated (x) 
m the order. What are they, Lieutenant Hunt V ’ 
Lieutenant Hunt: “I should think they would in¬ 
clude : The designation of the base Company; in¬ 
structions for sending a reconnaissance officer and 
party of guides forward at once; designating the 
place where the leading elements of the battalion are 
to halt for the purpose of receiving final orders for 
the lelief of the units of the 2nd battalion; designa¬ 
tion of the place where unit commanders are to as¬ 
semble to receive orders for the relief.’’ 

The Director: “Paragraph 4 of a field order in¬ 
cludes administrative arrangements. Can you think 
of anything that would be necessary to be included 
in that paragraph of Major A’s orders?” 


Approach March 


65 


Lieutenant Hunt: “I can think of nothing. That 
would depend upon circumstances. These adminis¬ 
trative arrangements include: instructions for the 
trains—which have already been attended to; col¬ 
lecting station for wounded—which will be an¬ 
nounced in a later order. It may be assumed that as 
soon as the advance halted that the rolling kitchen 
was brought up and the men given a hot meal before 
relieving the 2nd battalion. If such is the case the 
kitchen will have to be disposed of in paragraph 4.’ 1 

The Director: “What will paragraph 5 contain?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “It will contain information of 
the time when the present command post of the bat¬ 
talion will close and when and where it will next be 
opened. ’ ’ 

The Director: “We have now covered the elements 
of the Major’s order. Let us review them briefly: 

“Paragraph 1: Information of the enemy and our 
own troops. 

“Paragraph 2: The Major’s plan of action in gen¬ 
eral terms. 

“Paragraph 3: Distribution of troops—orders for 
the various elements of the battalion. 

“Paragraph 4: Administrative arrangements. 

“Paragraph 5: Time of closing the present C. P. 
and when and where it will next open. 

“Now, I want each member of the class to write 
out the battalion commander’s order on his pad. 
Base your order on the dispositions that we have dis¬ 
cussed in the solution of the problem; use the 5 para¬ 
graph order system; endeavor to include all the in¬ 
structions that we have included in our solution. ’ ’ 



66 


Terrain Exercises 


Procedure 

The necessary time is allowed for the preparation 
of the order by the members of the class. As soon as 
the orders are completed the Director will distribute 
to the class the mimeograph sheets containing the 
order that he has prepared as a solution to the situ¬ 
ation. 

He will read it aloud to the class and have each 
man compare it with the order that he, himself, has 
prepared. 

This solution order will be as follows: 

1. The enemy continued his retreat during the day. Our 
2nd battalion has halted along (d)* where it is in close 
contact with the enemy. Details of location of units 
will be given later. The attack will be continued to¬ 
morrow morning. The 3rd battalion relieves our bat¬ 
talion before ( g)* tonight. When relieved the 2nd 
battalion goes to the regimental reserve. 

2. This battalion will relieve the 2nd battalion tonight. 

3. (a) The Intelligence Section, Headquarters’ Company 

will proceed at once to the C. P. 2nd battalion and 
be prepared to take over the intelligence func¬ 
tions. 

(&) The Communications platoon, Headquarters’ Com¬ 
pany will proceed at once to the C. P. 2nd bat¬ 
talion and be prepared to take over the communi¬ 
cations net and message center. 

(c) Captain A, with Company A, will march at. 

(hour) p. m., in approach march formation in the 

. ** half of the regimental sector, prepara 

tory to relieving the .** Assault Company 


* See explanation of Letter Symbols. 

** Right or left as the case may be. 








Approach March 


67 


of the 2nd battalion. The guide will be.**. 

Compass bearing . degrees, magnetic. Con¬ 
tact with the .* of Company B will be 

maintained. 

(d) Captain B, with Company B, will march at. 

(hour) p. m., in approach march formation in the 
.* half of the regimental sector, prepara¬ 
tory to relieving the .* assault company of 


the 2nd battalion. Directing line . (state 

directing line). Compass bearing.degrees, 

magnetic. 


(e) Captain C, with Company C, will follow Company 
A in approach march formation at a distance of 
300 yards, preparatory to relieving local support 
company of the 2nd Battalion. Compass bearing 
. degrees, magnetic. 

(/) Captain D, with Company D, will follow Company 
B, in approach march formation at a distance of 
300 yards, preparatory to relieving the Machine 
Gun elements of the 2nd battalion. Directing line 

.... (state). Compass bearing . degrees, 

magnetic. 

( x ) Company B, base company. 

A reconnaissance officer from each company, accom¬ 
panied by scouts and guides will be sent forward 
at once. 

When the leading elements of the battalion have 

arrived at. (state place), the entire battalion 

will halt, take cover and await orders. 

Company Commanders will assemble at . 


* Right or left as the case may be. 
















Terrain Exercises 

(state point) to receive orders covering the details 
of the relief. 

4. Rolling Kitchens will join the combat train of the re¬ 
serve battalion. 

5. The battalion C. P. will close here at. (time) and 

open at the C. P. 2nd battalion at the same hour. 



Explanation 

The Director: “After issuing this order and mak¬ 
ing sme that it is understood the battalion com¬ 
mander accompanied by his battalion staff, rimners 
etc.,, and the remainder of the battalion Headquar¬ 
ters Company will proceed to the front. One officer 
will be left at the old C. P. until the troops have 
moved out. He will then go to the front. The Major 
will get in personal communication with the Com¬ 
manding Officer of the 2nd Battalion, secure all the 
information he has of the situation and the location 
of the troops to be relieved. He will make such re¬ 
connaissance as is practicable and necessary to a com¬ 
plete understanding of the situation and then pre¬ 
pare his orders for the relief of the 2nd battalion. ” 


rroceaure 


The Director: “Are there any questions?” 

le , ecto f endeavors to answer any questions 
that may be asked. 







Approach March 


69 


Approach March and Deployment Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct the class to (e) where the Terrain exercise is to 

begin. 

2. Distribute the sheets containing Special Situation, Blue, 

read and explain. 

3. Meaning of Sector; attacking brigade; attack formations— 

brigades side by side; regiments side by side; attacking 
brigade and reserve brigade—tandem; formation of 19th 
brigade. 

4. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 1, read and ex¬ 

plain. 

5. Approach march and deployment; importance of; necessity 

for training; training programs; failure of battalion to 
jump off. 

6. Visualize formation of 1st Battalion. Point out relative 

location of units. 

7. Estimate of situation; mission; enemy; own troops; terrain 

plans of operation; decision. 

8. Order: Information of Enemy and own troops (Refer to 

copy of order to be submitted as solution in bringing out 
points of order. Make discussion along lines of solu¬ 
tion). Plan of commander. Orders for each unit. Put 
in paragraph (x). Administrative arrangements. Loca¬ 
tion of C. P. Review the paragraphs of the order. 

9. Have class write out order on pads. 

10. Distribute sheets containing the solution (copy of Order). 

Read and explain. Have members of class compare their 
order with the solution. 

11. Explain subsequent actions of Major A. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the area supposed to 
be occupied by Company B. The Director will dis¬ 
tribute the sheets containing Situation No. 2 to the 
members of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

You, Captain B, are commanding Company B. 
You have the order of the battalion commander re¬ 
lating to your company as follows: 



70 


Terrain Exercises 


( d ) Captain B, with Company B, will march at 

V."7. (^ ou ^) p. hi., in approach march formation 

ln ^ ^ (left) half of the regimental sector, pre¬ 

paratory to relieving the right (left) assault com¬ 
pany of the 2nd battalion. Directing line 
(state directing line). Compass bearing. de¬ 

grees, magnetic. 

Or) Company B, base company. 

A reconnaissance officer from each company, ac- 

ompanied by scouts and guides will be sent forward 
at once. 

ji ^ -K°Hirig kitchens will join the combat train of 
the reserve battalion. 

You have returned to your Company. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 


■rroceaure 


The Director will read the situation aloud, make 
such explanations as may be necessary and point out 
the aiea occupied by Company B. One or more 

members of the class may be called upon to state his 
understanding of the situation. 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what do you 
undei stand to be the formation of Company B at 
this moment?” y y 1 

Pa^woS.'i 1 w »' lld ^ that the com- 
pany wem^ be m approach march formation. There 

would be two platoons, let us say the 1st and 2nd in 

echelon^ (lltbi 1011 ° n ?’ the 3rd ’ in the su PPort 
S li ; ° f the pIatoons would at thi s time 

in 2 wave wJ? 68 ’ a , Section of three squads 
each wave, I think each section would be de- 







Approach March 


71 


ployed in a line of skirmishers while at a halt. The 
company headquarters would be here, about midway 
between the assault echelon and the support eche¬ 
lon.’ J 

(Note.—Lieutenant Williams will point out the location of 
the various elements of the Company on the ground.) 

The Director: “Why do you think the Company 
would be deployed in a line of skirmishers at this 
time ? ’’ 

Lieutenant Williams: “When the company halts 
the men will want to take advantage of existing 
cover. If there is little cover available, as in this 
case, each man will dig himself in—he will dig a ‘ fox 
hole’ big enough to give him some cover. Shell holes 
will be improved along their forward lips to give 
cover and if large ones are available as much as a 
half squad may occupy one of them. Another reason 
for the support battalion deploying into a line of 
skirmishers when it halts for any length is this: If 
the enemy should make a counter attack and break 
through our assault battalion, and the companies of 
our support battalion are ‘dug in’ in a line of skirm¬ 
ishers they are in position to meet him without any 
change in the formation. Everything is all set and 
ready to receive the counter attack. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think you have sized up the for¬ 
mation pretty well. I think if any member of this 
class is ever in command of an assault company of a 
support battalion in action he will remember this 
phase of this Terrain Exercise and when he halts for 
any length of time he will get the company into a line 
of skirmishers and have them dig in. You may say 
‘why dig in for such a short halt.’ I answer that you 


72 


Terrain Exercises 


will have no trouble getting the men to dig fox holes 
after they have been in action a few times. They 
soon learn the value of them and automatically 
do it.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, let us assume 
that you are Captain B. How do you size up the 
situation V 7 

Captain Hastings: “My immediate mission is to 
get my company ready to march at the appointed 
hour. 

“I have little information of the detailed disposi¬ 
tions of the enemy that is opposing our 1st battalion 
but my reconnaissance officer whom I will send for¬ 
ward right away will secure it and have it available 
for me before the orders for the actual relief are to 
be issued. 

“We are to relieve the right (left) assault com¬ 
pany of the 1st battalion which is now in close con¬ 
tact with the enemy along the front lines. Due to 
casualties and the progress of the day's action it is 
probable that each of his assault platoons have both 
waves in the firing line and it is highly probable that 
some or all of the support platoon has also been ab¬ 
sorbed in the firing line. It is necessary for Com¬ 
pany B in making the relief to get the assault troops 
in the proper formation to make the attack tomor¬ 
row morning. 

“The present formation of the company is suitable 
for the purpose and will need no change. We can 
maich straight to the front in our present general 
formation. We will change from a line of skirm¬ 
ishers into a line of squad columns for each of the 


Approach March 


73 


waves of the 1st and 2nd platoons and the 3rd pla¬ 
toon will march in a column of section columns with 
the second section staggered to the right of the first. ’ ’ 

(Note.—Discuss features of the terrain as they actually exist.) 

The Director: “Your decision will be to march to 
the front in the general formation you are now in.’' 

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “Now let us go into details a little. 
Lieutenant Wallace, what do you understand to be 
the purpose of the ‘Directing line’ assigned to the 
company by the Major?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “The directing line was as¬ 
signed in addition to the compass bearing to make 
doubly sure that the company would keep the right 
direction and that there would be little chance for 
getting lost. It is a well defined topographical fea¬ 
ture and will serve the purpose very well.” 

The Director: “You note that the company has 
been designated as ‘base company.’ What do you 
understand by that?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “It is the company on which 
ail the units of the battalion will guide during the 
approach march.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “This places an additional respon¬ 
sibility on the company. If Company B loses its di¬ 
rection the whole battalion will do the same and it is 
probable that the troops will not be in position ready 
to ‘jump off’ tomorrow morning. You have no idea 
of the confusion that can take place in an outfit that 
loses its direction and gets lost in an operation of this 
kind. Every possible precaution must be taken to 


74 


Terrain Exercises 


prevent it. In this case the Captain must charge the 
platoon that is to march nearest to the directing line 
to guide on that line throughout the march and for 
the other platoons to guide on it. In this case the 
right (left) assault platoon will be designated ‘base 
platoon ' and will take every precaution to keep the 
right (left) element of the platoon absolutely on the 
directing line. You can see that this places the re¬ 
sponsibility for the march direction of the whole 
battalion on the squad that is nearest the directing 
line. I want you to keep this in mind throughout the 
problem. " 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, what prelimi¬ 
nary arrangements would Captain B make for is¬ 
suing his orders to the company ?' ' 

Lieutenant Ralston: “The company command 
post is supposed to be located here. 

(Note.—In framing up the problem the Director should lo¬ 
cate the Company C. P. where there is cover. If it is imprac¬ 
ticable to do so, it may be assumed that there is a shell hole 
available.) 

The Captain will assemble the platoon com¬ 
manders and platoon sergeants and issue the orders 
for the initial operation of the Company.'' 

The Director: “What will be included in the first 
paragraph of the order?" 

Lieutenant Ralston: “The information of the 
enemy and our own troops. This will be a repetition 
of paragraph 1 of the Major's order with the addi¬ 
tion of information as to what the other companies 
of the battalion are going to do. Captain B will go 
into details, for it must be remembered, that none of 


Approach March 


75 


the platoon commanders were present when Major 
A issued his orders and they know nothing of the 
situation except what they have been able to observe 
for themselves. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I am glad to hear you bring out 
that point. It takes only a few minutes to explain 
the situation in detail and is most valuable to subor¬ 
dinate officers who are charged with the task of actu¬ 
ally carrying out the operations. They must know 
the details of the situation. Now, Captain Harvey, 
what would you include in the second paragraph of 
the order ? ’ ’ 

Captain Harvey: “My plans. To march at the 
designated hour, preparatory to relieving the right 
(left) assault company of the 1st battalion. In order 
to save questions regarding the relief I would state 
to the effect that detailed instructions would be is¬ 
sued later.” 

The Director: “Very good. Now comes the distri¬ 
bution of troops. That is paragraph 3 of the field 
order. What points would you include in it?” 

Captain Harvey: “I would give the orders for each 
platoon separately. Those for the right assault pla¬ 
toon would come first. I would designate the platoon 
by number and the name of the platoon commander; 
state the formation; the sector that the platoon is to 
march in; announce the guide; and the compass bear¬ 
ing of the march. In the case of the base platoon I 
would indicate the directing line of the march in 
addition. 

“I will then follow with instructions for the recon¬ 
naissance party and guides to go to the front right 
away. 


76 


Terrain Exercises 


“Then will come that part of the order that is of 
interest to all the elements of the Company. The 
announcement of the base platoon; where the halt is 
to be made to receive detailed orders for the relief. 
Then will follow the final paragraph of the order 
designating the place where the Company Headquar¬ 
ters is to march. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think you have covered the ele¬ 
ments of the company order very well. I hope all of 
you see the necessity for such an order. You may 
say: why all of this long-winded order for the oper¬ 
ation of a single rifle company ? Why not have Cap¬ 
tain B simply give the signal for the advance when 
the time comes and have the company go ahead? 
Suppose you were one of the platoon commanders in 
the company, would you rather have the detailed 
order for your operation or would you be more satis¬ 
fied with a mere extended order drill formation ? I 
am sure you will all favor the order procedure and 
that is the answer to the question. If every man has 
information of what is going on and he knows the 
part that his unit is to take in the operation he can 
go about his work in a much more intelligent manner. 
I am pleased to note that many of you are taking 
notes on the technique of the Captain’s order. They 
will now stand you in good stead. Are there any 
questions?” 

Captain Hodges: “I note that Captain Harvey 
made a statement about sending forward the recon¬ 
naissance party. Who would head that party and 
just what would it be composed of?” 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what are your 
ideas about this?” 


Approach March 


77 


Captain Harvey: “I would have the second in com¬ 
mand lead the party. It would be composed of two 
runners from each of the platoons and two from 
company headquarters.” 

The Director: “You cannot have the second in 
command lead the party. He is not up with the com¬ 
pany at this time. He is back with the rear echelon 
of the company. The idea is that he will remain 
there so as to be available to take charge in case the 
company commander becomes a casualty.” 

Captain Harvey: “That is right. I had overlooked 
that fact. I would have the commander of the 3rd 
platoon conduct the reconnaissance party. His pla¬ 
toon is to be in support and is the most available of¬ 
ficer. The platoon sergeant can conduct the platoon 
on the approach march. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think you are right. Does that 
answer your question, Captain Hodges?” 

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to write out Captain B’s order on his pad. 
Place yourself in the Captain’s shoes; visualize the 
situation just as it is before you; refer to the notes 
you have made during the solution and explanations; 
and write out the order. This is the very best train¬ 
ing you can possibly get. It puts the proposition 
right up to you for solution. In writing the order 
leave a margin of P /2 inches on the left.” 

When the class has finished with the order the Di¬ 
rector will direct each member to pass his order to 
the member at his left. Each officer will then correct 


78 


Terrain Exercises 


the order in his possession and make comments on 
the margin. 

When this has been completed the Director will 
distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the 
order of Captain B and the members of the class will 
be allowed a few minutes to compare the order he 
has written with the one distributed by the Director. 

The Director: “Now I want each member of the 
class to write his name at the top of the order he has 
prepared and to place the name of the officer who 
commented on it at the top of the left-hand margin. ’ ? 

When this is done the orders will be collected. The 
Director will examine them at his leisure for the pur¬ 
pose of determining the quality of the work that the 
class is doing. 

Captain B ’s order distributed by the Director will 
be as follows: 

1. The enemy continued his retreat during the day. Our 

2nd battalion has halted along ( d )* where it is in close 
contact with the enemy. Details of location of units 
will be given later. The attack will be continued to¬ 
morrow morning. The 3d battalion relieves our battal¬ 
ion before-* tonight. When relieved the 2nd bat¬ 

talion goes to the regimental reserve. Our battalion re¬ 
lieves the 2nd battalion tonight. Company A marches 
on our left (right) ; Company C follows Company A at 
a distance of 300 yards; Company D follows us at a 
distance of 300 yards. 

2. This company, as base company of the battalion, will 

march at . (hour), preparatory to relieving the 

right (left) assault company of the 2nd battalion. De¬ 
tailed instructions for the relief later. 


*See explanation of Letter Symbols. 





Approach March 


79 


3. (a) Lieutenant X, with the 1st platoon, will march the 
right (left) half of our company sector. Guide 
will be left (right). Contact with the 2nd platoon 
will be maintained. Compass bearing of march 
. degrees, magnetic. 

( b ) Lieutenant Y, with the 2nd platoon, will march in 

the left (right) half of our company sector. Guid¬ 
ing line (indicate in detail) compass bearing of 
march . degrees, magnetic. 

(c) Sergeant M with the 3rd platoon will march in the 
center of our company sector following the 1st and 
2nd platoons at a distance of 200 yards. 

( d ) Lieutenant Z with 8 runners (2 from Company 
Headquarters and 2 from each platoon) will pro¬ 
ceed at once to the front, reconnoiter the sector oc¬ 
cupied by the left (right) assault company, 2nd 
battalion, and instruct the runners in order that 
they may act as guides for the elements of the com¬ 
pany in effecting the relief. 

(x) The 2nd platoon Base platoon. 

When the leading elements of the 1st and 2rd pla¬ 
toons reach the . (state line) a halt will be 

made until further orders. 

4. The rolling kitchen will join the combat train of the 

reserve battalion at. 

5. I will march ahead of the 3rd platoon. 

Explanation 

The Director: “The platoon commanders will re¬ 
turn to their platoons, assemble their non-commis¬ 
sioned officers and issue their instructions. Through 
this chain of command the instructions for the oper- 






80 


Terrain Exercises 


ation will be gotten right down to the last member of 
the battalion. ’ ’ 


Approach March and Deployment Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct the class to the area supposed to be occupied by 

Company B. 

2. Distribute Situation No. 2; read and explain. Call upon one 

or more members of class to state understanding of the 
situation. 

3. Formation of Company B; cover; formation for advance. 

4. Make estimate of situation; mission; enemy; own troops; 

plan; decision. 

5. Purpose of directing line; meaning of base company. Loss 

of direction. 

6. Preliminary arrangements for issuing order. 

7. Contents of order: information of enemy and own troops; 

plan of commander; dispositions—detailed instructions 
for elements of company. 

8. Necessity for issuing orders. 

9. Reconnaissance party. Second in command. 

10. Write out Captain B’s order. Pass to officer at left. Criti¬ 

cise. Distribute solution. Compare. Collect for future 
examination. 

11. Procedure for platoon commanders. Get order down to last 

man of battalion. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the area over which 
the 2nd platoon is to advance. 

On arriving at a selected point the class will be 
halted. 

The Director: “Captain James, we are now in the 
area over which the 2nd platoon is advancing to the 
front. Lieutenant Y, the platoon commander, is at 
this point. What do you estimate to be the approach 
march formation of the platoon V’ 

Captain James: “I will first locate the platoon 



Approach March 


81 


commander and then designate the location of the 
elements of the platoon with reference to him. I 
think that the platoon commander would be march¬ 
ing at this time about midway between the assault 
and the support waves. The 1st Section would be 
marching in a line of squad columns with the right 
(left) squad near the directing line which is right 
there (indicating). It is the base section and the 
squad nearest the directing line is the base squad. 
The head of the squad columns is about 25 yards in 
advance of the platoon commander. 

“The 2nd platoon is following the platoon com¬ 
mander at a distance of about 25 yards in a line of 
squad columns.’ 7 

Lieutenant Baker: “It seems to me that the pla¬ 
toon commander would be out in front of his platoon 
at this time.” 

The Director: “The platoon commander is free to 
go wherever he pleases. But you must remember he 
has two section leaders—one for each section of the 
platoon. These men are supposed to be competent 
to do their job. The platoon commander should 
march where he can best direct the operations of his 
platoon through his section leaders. In this case I 
think Captain James has located the platoon leader 
in the proper place. 

“Now having definitely fixed in our minds the lo¬ 
cation of the elements of the platoon let us proceed 
with the next situation. ’ ’ 

The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

You. Lieutenant Y. commanding the 2nd platoon 
have arrived at this point (indicate). 




82 


Terrain Exercises 


The 1st section is in a line of squad columns 25 
yards to the front; the 2nd section is in a line of 
squad columns 25 yards in rear of you. For some 
minutes enemy shells have been falling in the area 
which is occupied by one of our batteries at the rate 
of about 4 per minute. At this moment the fire in¬ 
creased materially. The men have left the guns tem¬ 
porarily. 

Required: 

What do you do ? 

Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets containing 
Situation No. 3 and points out to the class the extent 
of the shelled area. It should be in the direct line 
of march of the 2nd platoon. 

Solution 

The Director: “ Captain Hall, how do you size up 
the immediate situation V ’ 

Captain Hall: “Our original mission has not 
changed. We must continue the march to the front 
regardless of what the enemy does. The 2nd bat¬ 
talion must be relieved tonight and our battalion 
must make the relief. We cannot stand here and 
wait for the enemy’s fire to let up. It is obvious that 
we cannot go through the shelled area without ruin¬ 
ous losses. The only thing left for us to do is to go 
around it.” 

The Director: “Those are the points I wanted to 
bring out. The question before us is: How are we 
going to get around the shelled area? What have 
you to suggest Lieutenant Barry?” 


Approach March 


83 


Lieiitenant Barry: “In the first place I will have 
to decide the question as to which side of the shelled 
area we are to use in getting around it. If the whole 
platoon goes around one side and the enemy fire shifts 
in that direction we may get caught in it and lose a 
lot of men. I think we would reduce our chances of 
loss by using both sides and having one platoon go 
around to the right and one to the left.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what do you 
think of that proposition?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I think it is all right. The 
question that arises in my mind is that of loss of con¬ 
trol by the platoon commander and the difficulties of 
getting into the proper formation on the other side 
of the shelled area again.” 

The Director: “When you consider that the pla¬ 
toon commander has a team of two sections each 
under the charge of a competent leader the difficul¬ 
ties are really not so great as they would at first ap¬ 
pear. Let us decide that we are to go around the 
shelled area on both sides of it, a section on each side. 
On which side will you have the leading section go, 
Lieutenant Williams?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “The 1st Section is the base 
section of the platoon—as such it is the base element 
of the company and the whole battalion. It is the 
unit on which the whole battalion is guiding its 

march. It should therefore go around on the. 

side so that the 1st platoon can keep in touch with it 
and guide on it. When it gets to the other side of 
the shelled area it can deploy and get its.ele¬ 

ment on the directing line again. By employing 
this method there will be no chance for the 1st pla- 





84 


Terrain Exercises 


toon losing connection with it. The 2nd section 
will go around to the . 

The Director: “I think your reasoning is logical 
and if there are no objections we will accept that 
method. Now the battery commander of the battery 
being shelled will want to know what is going on. 
Captain Hastings, how will you provide for this?” 

Captain Hastings: “I will send a runner to him 
with a message giving him the necessary informa¬ 
tion. ’ ? 

The Director: “Let us assume that we have arrived 
at the decision indicated in our discussion. How 
would you get the orders to the troops?” 

Captain Hastings: “When we get up as far as it 
is safe to go I will signal the platoon to halt. And 
then call for the section leaders to report to me. 
When they get here I will give them the orders 
necessary for the execution of the maneuver. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Class is now conducted forward to the point 
where it is as far as it is safe to go and still avoid 
casualties from the enemy shell fire. 

The Director: “It is considered that this is as far 
forward as it is reasonably safe to go. Lieutenant Y 
has halted the platoon and the section leaders have 
reported to him for orders. Now I want each mem¬ 
ber of the class to consider himself being Lieutenant 
Y and to write out on your pads the exact words that 
Lieutenant Y will say to the section leaders. Then 
follow this with the contents of the verbal message 
that you will send by runner to the battery com¬ 
mander. ’ ’ 



Approach March 


85 


The necessary time is allowed for this. When the 
solutions are completed the Director will have one or 
more members of the class read aloud what they have 
written. The solutions are discussed and comment¬ 
ed upon. 

The Director will then distribute to the class the 
mimeograph slips containing the orders of Lieuten¬ 
ant Y and a few minutes are allowed for the members 
of the class to compare them with their work: 

The order of Lieutenant Y will be as follows: 

“The enemy is shelling the battery in our immediate 
front. There is no further information of our own 
troops.” 

“This platoon will go around the shelled area.” 


“The 1st section will go around to the . (right) 

(left) side towards the rest of the battalion.” 

“The 2nd section will go around to the . (left) 

(right) side towards the directing line. 


“On arriving at the other side of the shelled area the 
platoon will again take up the same formation that it is 
in now.” 

“I will go in rear of the 1st platoon.” 

The following message will be sent to the battery 
commander: 

“Second Platoon Company B . Infantry is going 

around your battery position to the right and left. Will 
deploy again on the other side of the shelled area.” 





86 


Terrain Exercises 


Approach March and Deployment Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to area over which the 2nd platoon is march¬ 

ing. 

2. Formation of 2nd platoon. Column of sections in line of 

squad columns. Locate each element on the ground. 
Location of platoon commander. 

3. Distribute Situation No. 3. Read and explain. 

4. Estimate of Situation; mission; action of enemy; decision 

to go around shelled area, on both sides. Base section 
to keep in contact with rest of battalion. Message to the 
battery commander. 

5. Conduct class to safe edge of shelled area. Write out orders 

and message of platoon commander. 

6. Distribute solution. Discuss same. Allow time to compare 

with work of class. 


Procedure 

The Class will now be conducted up to the place 
where the company commanders have been ordered 
to meet the battalion commander to receive orders 
for the relief of the 2nd battalion. 

The Director: “This is the place where Major A 
directed the Company Commanders to rendezvous to 
receive the final orders for the relief of the 1st bat¬ 
talion. We assume that the troops have been halted 

along the line . (indicate) where they have 

taken advantage of such cover as is available and are 
preparing individual cover where none is available/’ 

The Director will now distribute the sheets con¬ 
taining Situation No. 4. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

You, Major A, have arrived at this point. You 
have had a conference with the commander of the 




Approach March 


87 


2nd battalion, made a reconnaissance of the position 
and determined the location of the units to be re¬ 
lieved. 

The latter are as follows: 

Company E occupies the right half of the sector 
with all three platoons on the firing line. 

Company F occupies the left half of the sector 
with two platoons and a part of the third in the 
firing line and the remainder of the third as local 
support. 

Company C is located in fox holes at.(indi¬ 

cate the location) as battalion reserve. A part of 
the company has participated in the day’s action but 
the men are all now at the location indicated. 

Company D has one platoon divided among the 
assault companies, and the company (less this pla¬ 
toon) is with the battalion reserve with guns located 
to cover approaches and to execute overhead harass¬ 
ing fire on enemy back areas. 

Detachments of the Howitzer Company are in 
position in the platoon sectors and are to remain with 
the 1st battalion for tomorrow’s attack. 

The battalion headquarters company has taken 
over the intelligence duties, the communications net 
and the message center. 

It is now.o’clock p. m. 

The enemy occupies the.(give general loca¬ 

tion of front lines). 

There is considerable shelling throughout the area 
and occasioral burst of machine gun and rifle fire 

along the entire battle front. 

Your company commanders are assembled here in 
accordance with the instructions contained in your 

last order. 





88 


Terrain Exercises 


Required: 

Your orders and instructions. 

Procedure 

The Director will read the situation aloud, make 
such explanations as may be necessary and point out 
the places mentioned. One or more members of the 
class will be called upon to state their understanding 
of the tactical situation at this time. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, we have now 
to consider the orders and instructions that Major 
A would issue to his assembled Company command¬ 
ers. What is the first thing you would put into the 
Major’s order?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “The Major has been out to 
the front and made a personal reconnaissance as far 
as practicable. He has interviewed the Commander 
of the 2nd battalion and the officers of his staff who 
have detailed information as to the situation. He 
ought to have pretty definite information of just 
how the different elements of the 2nd battalion are 
disposed. He should give his Company Command¬ 
ers all of this information in the first paragraph of 
the order. We note that this information is all con¬ 
tained in Situation No. 3.” 

The Director: “What would you include in the 
next paragraph of the order, Lieutenant Ralston?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “My plan, to the effect that 
our battalion is to relieve the 2nd battalion. 

Captain Harvey: “But we are going to do more 
than that. We are going to make the attack tomor- 


Approach March 


89 




row morning. It seems to me that the Major would 
include in the order all the instructions he wants to 
give the Company Commanders not only for the re¬ 
lief, but for the attack also. What do you think 
about that, sir?” 

The Director: “The Major would certainly not let 
his Company Commanders get away without giving 
them all the instructions possible regarding the part 
they are to play in the attack tomorrow morning. 
But there are several things that he must get from 
higher up before he can complete his plans for the 
attack and give them to his Company Commanders. 
He must know the time the attack is to begin. He 
must know about the artillery preparation and the 
rate of advance of the rolling barrage. He must 
have information regarding the cooperation of the 
tanks. While he is waiting for this information, 
which he momentarily expects, he will go ahead and 
issue his orders for the relief. Then if the other es¬ 
sential information is not at hand by the time the 
Company Commanders must join their companies, he 
will issue as much of the attack order as possible and 
leave the rest to go out later. He certainly will not 
let his Captains get away until they have all the in¬ 
structions it is possible to give them up to the time it 
is necessary for them to leave—the arrangements to 
continue the attack tomorrow morning.” 

Captain Harvey: “Those are the points I wanted 
to know about.” 

The Director: “Now, Captain Hodges, what is the 
next part of the order?” 

Captain Hodges: “The tactical dispositions. Or¬ 
ders for each element of the battalion. Designate the 



90 


Terrain Exercises 


relieving unit and the unit to be relieved. For ex¬ 
ample : 4 Company A will relieve Company E. ’ This 
same form will pertain with all the elements of the 
battalion. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Just how much detail would you 
include ? To what extent would you go in prescrib¬ 
ing the formation of the company when the relief 
is completed? For instance: Company E has all 
three platoons in the assault echelon at this time. 
Would you want Company A to do the same and hold 
out no company supports V 9 

Captain Hodges: “Now, that is quite a point. I 
had not thought of it. I might assume that Captain 
A would take up the proper formation without my 
specifying it, but to make sure I believe I would add 
another sentence or two and specify the formation. 
I should say he ought to have two platoons in the 
assault echelon and one held out as local support. I 
think it would be better to specify that. There 
would be less chance for a misunderstanding. I 
would also give these same instructions to the Cap¬ 
tain of Company B.” 

The Director: “I think you are right. It will cer¬ 
tainly do no harm. In any event you have no doubt 
as to what you want done. Now, what about the 
machine-gun company, Captain James? You will 
note that there is only one platoon up on the lines 
now. The rest of the company is back with the re¬ 
serve with their guns covering the approaches and set 
up for overhead fire on back areas. Do you want to 
leave them that way ?” 

Captain James: “No, sir. I think I would need 
the supporting fire of all the machine guns in the 


Approach March 91 

‘jump off’ tomorrow morning. I would assign one 
platoon to support Company A and the company 
(less 1 platoon) to support Company B. I think 
that would be better. If the attack goes over with a 
good gain in ground tomorrow morning the machine 
guns will not be able to keep up with it, and the Major 
will have an opportunity to make an adjustment of 
their position in the battalion. I certainly would 
want the advantage of their fire in the ‘jump off.’ 

The Director: “I think you are right. Let us de¬ 
cide on that disposition.’’ 

Explanation 

The Director: “Now, there is arother point I want 
to bring out at this time. You have pictured in your 
own mind this formation and advance of one bat¬ 
talion of Infantry and the relief and retirement of 
another. Along side of you to the right are two other 
battalions going through the same process. The 
same is happening to your left and all along the line. 
Behind you there are other battalions effecting re¬ 
liefs. There are batteries of artillery and transport 
vehicles, innumerable. In other words the back area 
of a force in action is crowded with troops. There 
is much activity effecting reliefs, getting up supplies 
and ammunition and evacuating the wounded. 

“The enemy is doing these same things. His 
back areas are just as crowded as our own. He is 
no better off than we are in this respect. 

“It is our job to interfere with him as much as pos¬ 
sible—to prevent or curtail movement, and inflict 
losses on him. The wounding or killing of one man 
by harassing fire will have no effect on the outcome 



92 


Terrain Exercises 


of the war, but if we can kill and wound a thousand 
every night it will in time have its effect. 

“The enemy can get away from artillery tire by 
avoiding shelled areas but he cannot get away from 
rifle and machine gun harassing fire for he never 
knows when and where it is going to come. 

“If there is sufficient small arms ammunition 
available and it can be gotten up to the riflemen and 
machine gunners on the front lines the back areas 
of the enemy can be made a perfect ‘hell-hole’ by 
means of systematic harassing fire. 

“Many of the men whom our men will relieve to¬ 
night will have ammunition in bandoliers with them. 
By having our men take over this ammunition and 
expending it tonight we can get a big increase in fire 
over the enemy back areas. Our ammunition supply 
for tomorrow will not be impaired. The men being 
relieved will be re-supplied when they get back to 
the regimental reserve. I think arrangments should 
be made for this procedure by the Major.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “The Major has made arrangements 
with the Commanding Officer 2nd battalion as to 
when the command of the sector is to pass to the 1st 
battalion. He will now have to tell his company 
commanders when their full responsibility is to de¬ 
volve upon them for their respective sectors within 
the battalion. What would you do about that Lieu¬ 
tenant Baker?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “When a relief is made in lar¬ 
ger commands the orders state the hour when the 
command is to pass to the relieving troops. But in 


Approach March 


93 


a case like this I judge that it passes when the relief 
is completed. In order to make sure that the point 
is understood I would specify: 

Command of company sectors will pass when 
reliefs have been completed.’ ” 

The Director: “I think that would be a good idea.” 

Lieutenant Baker: “There is another point that 
should be included in the order. Let us say I am 
Captain B. My company is relieving Company F 
on the lines. The Captain of Company F either has 
not received definite orders as to what he is to do on 
being relieved or has overlooked the instructions in 
the confusion. It seems to me that it might be well 
for the Major to tell us just what Major B’s instruc¬ 
tions are as to that point. It might save a lot of 
confusion in getting the 2nd battalion troops disen¬ 
gaged and out of the battalion sector. It might save 
a lot of casualties from men wandering around in the 
darkness for my section and squad leaders to be able 
to tell the men they are relieving just where to go.” 

The Director: “I do not know that such instruc¬ 
tions have a place in the regular order form. But 
I see no objection to putting it in. It can do no harm 
I am sure. 

“Now, the Major will want to know when the re¬ 
liefs have been completed and he will give instruc¬ 
tions to that effect. He will then announce the loca¬ 
tion of the battalion command post and this will 
complete the details of the order. 

“Now, I want each member of the class to write 
out Major A’s orders for the relief of the 2nd bat¬ 
talion. ’ 9 

The necessary time is allowed for this. When 


94 


Terrain Exercises 


completed the Director will call upon one or more of 
the members of the class to read his orders aloud and 
comments are invited from other members of the 
class. 

The Director will then distribute the mimeograph 
sheets containing the Major’s order and an oppor¬ 
tunity will be given the members of the class to com¬ 
pare the work with the solution presented. 

The Major’s order will be as follows: 

Solution 

“The enemy occupies (describe the enemy’s front line 
in the necessary detail in the light of information gained 
by the Major’s reconnaissance). 

“Our 2nd battalion is in close contact all along the 
line. Troops are disposed as follows in the battalion 
sector: 

“Company E, right half of sector, with all three pla¬ 
toons on the line. Right of company at. (describe 

location). 

“Company F, left half of sector, with two platoons 
and part of the third on the line and the remainder as 
local support. Left of company at . (describe lo¬ 

cation). 

“Company G is located at. (indicate location of 

company). 

“Company H has one platoon divided among the as¬ 
sault companies and the company (less 1 platoon) is in 
the battalion reserve with guns now located to cover ap¬ 
proaches and execute overhead harassing fire in the 
enemy back areas. 

“This battalion will relieve the 2nd battalion. 

“The Headquarters’ Company will relieve the Head- 





Approach March 


95 


quarters* Company, 2nd battalion, and take over the 
duties pertaining thereto. 

“ Company A will relieve Company E in the right 
sector with two platoons in the assault echelon and one 
as local support. 

“ Company B will relieve Company F in the left sector 
with two platoons in the assault echelon and one as local 
support. 

“Company C will relieve Company G as battalion re¬ 
serve. 

‘ 4 Company D will relieve Company H, one platoon will 
support Company A and the company (less 1 platoon) 
will support Company B. 

“Detachments of the Howitzer Company are to remain 
with the battalion. Company commanders will confer 
with the commanders of detachments in their respective 
sectors and arrange for the support of their special weap¬ 
ons. Men of Companies A and B will take over from the 
men of Companies E and F whom they relieve, all ammu¬ 
nition in bandoliers, which will be expended to "keep up 
harassing fire during the remainder of the night, with a 
view to curtailing movement within the enemy lines. 
Company D will take over surplus ammunition from 
Company H and expend it for the same purpose. The 
regular ammunition supply will be reserved for the action 
tomorrow. 

“Command of company sectors will pass when reliefs 
have been completed. 

“When relieved, troops of the 2nd Battalion are to fall 
back to the line . (describe). 

“Report when reliefs are effected. 

“Battalion C. P. at.” 




96 


Terrain Exercises 


Approach March and Deployment Card No. 4 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to the point where the company commanders 

have been ordered to assemble to meet the Major. 

2. Distribute Situation No. 4, read aloud, and make necessary 

explanations. 

3. Contents of Order: Information of enemy obtained by recon¬ 

naissance and reports; plan of commander; question of 
including orders for attack also; zero hour; artillery prepa¬ 
ration; progress of barrage; tactical dispositions; orders 
for each element of command; orders for machine gun 
units; when command passes; action to be taken by troops 
when relieved. 

4. Have members of class write out the Major’s order. When 

completed distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the 
solution. Read orders and compare. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

Just as the order for the relief is completed, you, 
Major A, receive the following message from the 
regimental commander: 

“No further information of the enemy. 

“The general attack will be resumed tomorrow morn¬ 
ing at 5.00 o’clock. Your battalion will attack in regi¬ 
mental sector. 

“Mission: To pierce enemy position and assist division 
in penetrating the position. 

“Zone of action: No change. 

“Line of departure: (Describe in detail). 

“The attack will be preceded by 30 minutes’ artillery 
preparation. The advance of the infantry will be pre¬ 
ceded by a rolling barrage. Rate of advance of barrage 
100 yards in 4 minutes. 

“Station for slightly wounded at . 

“Regimental C. P. no change.” 




Approach March 


97 


Required: 

What orders do you give ? 

Procedure 

The Director will distribute the sheets containing 
Situation No. 5, read the situation aloud and explain 
the message from the regimental commander. One 
or more members of the class will be called upon to 
state his understanding of the situation. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Let us visualize the situation. The 
Major has been expecting to receive just such a mes¬ 
sage from the regimental commander. As a matter 
of fact he anticipated it when he made the estimate of 
the situation before issuing his first order for the ap¬ 
proach march before dark. He ordered his forma¬ 
tion for the approach march so that when the order 
for the attack came there would be few changes 
necessary. By his foresight and knowledge of in¬ 
fantry tactics he now his his battalion in the proper 
formation to make the relief of the 2nd battalion and 
when this is accomplished he will have his units prop- 
erly disposed to make the attack tomorrow morning. 
In other words, the Major started his attack when he 
made his initial dispositions. And this must be so in 
every case. "When you get into the infantry aiea of 
a battle you must get your troops into a formation 
from which they can make an attack or repel an 
enemy counter attack and you must keep them in that 
formation. That is why the subject of approach 
march and deployment is so important and that is 
why troops must be so thoroughly trained in it. Dur- 


98 


Terrain Exercises 


ing the war the subject was given little attention in 
our divisions. The British and French instructors 
brought nothing of it over from the other side. They 
had communication trenches as lanes of approach 
and gave little heed to the open warfare end of the 
game. The American divisions soon realized the 
necessity for thorough training and the most suc¬ 
cessful ones were those that spent many of their 
nights with units from battalions to brigades chasing 
through the woods, up hill and down dale, practicing 
the approach march formation. I am sure that when 
you consider the proposition seriously and visualize 
what can happen in a situation such as we have had 
to do with today you will realize the necessity for 
thorough training in the subject.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Now let us consider what must be 
included in the Major’s order for the attack. Cap¬ 
tain Hall, what have you to suggest for the first para¬ 
graph'?” 

Captain Hall: “The Major has already given the 
company commanders everything he knows about the 
enemy. He has a little additional information to the 
effect that the general attack all along the line will be 
resumed tomorrow. This will be included in the first 
paragraph of the order.” 

The Director: “That is all that is necessary. 
Our second paragraph is a much more complicated 
affair. What have you to suggest to go into it ?” 

Captain Hall: “The first thing would be the time 
of the attack. The orders from regimental head¬ 
quarters say 5.00 o’clock. That will be included in 


Approach March 


99 


the order. We have a definite mission for the bat¬ 
talion. To pierce the enemy position and assist our 
division to penetrate the position—that is, to make a 
break through, if possible. In order to do this we 
have got to drive hard. There is no change in the 
zone of action of the battalion; it remains the same 
as it was for today. The line of departure should be 
given. The information about the artillery prepara¬ 
tion and the rolling barrage should be included. I 
think that is about all that must go into paragraph 
two of the order.” 

The Director: “Yes. But you have skimped over 
two very important points without the explanation 
they deserve. These are the line of departure and 
the information about the artillery preparation and 
the rolling barrage. Let us go into these things a 
little more in detail. 

‘ ‘ The division staff has made arrangements for the 
artillery preparation to come down along a certain 
line, and stand there for a period of thirty minutes. 
Then the barrage will begin to advance at exactly 
5.00 o’clock. Unless we have a definite line of de¬ 
parture some parts of our front line may work their 
way to the front and be caught under our own bar¬ 
rage and you can see what would happen. In case 
any men do work forward during the night on recon¬ 
naissance they must get back a little before 4.30 so 
as not to get caught under the barrage. 

Lieutenant Barry: “I appreciate all the Director 
has said. But we have to keep up a reconnaissance 
during the night to keep in contact with the enemy. 
He might pull his lines back during the night and if 
he had decided to make a general retreat we would 




100 


Terrain Exercises 


lose touch and with it a lot of time in conducting the 
pursuit. I think some of our patrols would have to 
take a chance on getting back so as not to lose con¬ 
tact. Then, too, if the enemy had pretty definite in¬ 
formation that our artillery preparation is coming 
down on a certain line and we have no men out in 
front he may move his machine gun squads a little 
to the front and avoid the barrage altogether and be 
ready to receive our attack when our first wave goes 
over the top. If I were commanding one of those 
assault companies I would keep my front thoroughly 
patrolled during the night and keep my scouts right 
up in the enemy’s lines until a minute or two before 
the barrage comes down. I would have them beat it 
back a hundred yards and take a chance on escaping 
from the barrage. As soon as they are out of the way 
I would then have my special weapons and riflemen 
keep up a fire on any enemy troops that showed 
themselves trying to get to a position in front of 
where the barrage is coming down. ’ ’ 

Explanation 

The Director: 6i That is all very interesting. Those 
are important points that we must not lose sight of 
in our operations against an active and crafty enemy. 
He will pull all kinds of stunts on you and you have 
to be just a lap ahead of him to best him. All of this 
shows the great necessity for combat training. We 
must have patrol leaders and scouts that know the 
importance of all these things and know how to go 
about them. We hear so much about the technical 
branches and the high order of training that is re¬ 
quired. If there is any training more difficult than 



Approach March 


101 


that of the ‘doughboy’ I have yet to see it. Take the 
training of patrol leaders and scouts for the single 
phase of infantry combat that we have just been dis¬ 
cussing. I leave it to you if there is anything more 
technical and difficult in the training of soldiers. If 
these men fail the whole military operation falls 
down and may be an utter failure. A half dozen ma¬ 
chine guns on a battalion front that have moved for¬ 
ward a few yards and escaped the barrage will be 
able to hold up a whole battalion. So let us not 
neglect the training of our scouts. 

“If the enemy should fall back during the night 
our scouts will follow him up and keep in touch with 
him, word will go back to the battalion and on back 
to the division so that arrangements can be made to 
alter the plans. In that case the battalion com¬ 
mander will order a general advance to keep in 
contact. ’ ’ 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what would you 
include in paragraph 3 of the Major’s order?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “The detail orders for each ele¬ 
ment of the battalion, giving the designation of the 
organization and the particular part that it is to play 
in the operation. There will be orders for Company 
A, the right assault company; Company B, the left 
assault company; Company C, the battalion reserve, 
and Company D, the machine gun company. Then 
the orders for the elements of the Howitzer Company 
hold off to support the attack. I believe that would 
complete paragraph 3 of the order.” 

The Director: “What would you include in para¬ 
graph 4, Lieutenant Williams?” 


102 


Terrain Exercises 


Lieutenant Williams: “I would include the loca¬ 
tion of the station for slightly wounded. I do not 
know of anything else. ’ ’ 

The Director: “And paragraph 5 would contain 
what?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “The location of the regi¬ 
mental and battalion command posts.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “I think we have discussed every¬ 
thing that must be included in the battalion order. 
If you will compare all of this with some of the bat¬ 
talion orders you, as Company Commanders, re¬ 
ceived in Prance, you will see how sadly lacking some 
of them were. What we want to do is to prevent a 
repetition of those conditions and that is why we are 
devoting our time and attention to these things now. 
We want to be prepared to solve these problems if 
the time ever comes when we have to do so again.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to write out the Major’s order on his pad. See 
how much of the details that we have discussed you 
can get into the order. ? ’ 

Sufficient time is allowed for the purpose. 

After the orders have been completed the Director 
will distribute the mimeograph sheets containing the 
order and one or more of the members of the class 
will be called upon to read his order and follow with 
the corresponding paragraph of the solution. 

The order will be as follows: 



Approach March 


103 


“There is no further information of the enemy. The 
general attack all along the line will be resumed tomor¬ 
row. 

“Our battalion will attack at 5.00 o’clock a. m. 

“Mission: To drive hard, pierce the enemy position 
and assist our division in making a penetration of the 
position. 

“Zone of action: No change. 

“Line of departure: (Describe line in detail.) 

“The attack will be preceded by 30 minutes artillery 
preparation. The advance of the infantry will be pre¬ 
ceded by a rolling barrage. Rate of advance of barrage 
100 yards in 4 minutes. 

“Company A will attack in the right (left) half of the 
battalion sector. 

“Company B will attack in the left (right) half of the 
battalion sector. 

“Company C will be battalion reserve and follow at a 
distance of about 300 yards. One squad will be sent to 
the (east) and one to the (west) boundary of the bat¬ 
talion sector to maintain connection with adjoining 

units. 

“Company D will support the attack of Companies A 
and B in accordance with previous instructions. 

“Elements of the howitzer company in each company 
sector will support the attack. 

“Station for slightly wounded at. (indicate). 

“Plan of signal communication: No change. 

“Command posts: 

“Regiment: At. (indicate). 

“Regiment: At . (indicate.)” 


V 





104 


Terrain Exercises 


Approach March and Deployment Card No. 5 

Director’s Key 

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 5. Read and ex¬ 

plain. Have one or more members of class state his un¬ 
derstanding of the situation. 

2. Explain situation. Prepared to receive order for attack. 

Formation from the time of taking up the approach march. 
Training of troops in approach march formation. 

3. Discuss Major’s order. Information of enemy; information 

of our own troops; time of attack; mission of battalion; 
line of departure; artillery preparation. 

4. Details of solution. Necessity for designating line of de¬ 

parture. Artillery barrage. Scouting and patrolling. 
Keeping contact with the enemy. 

5. Necessity for infantry combat training. 

6. Paragraph 3 of the order: Orders for each element. Assault 

companies; battalion reserve; machine gun company; 
howitzer elements. 

7. Paragraph 4 station for slightly wounded. 

8. Paragraph 5 of order. Signal communications and location 

of C. P.’s. 

9. Have class write out order. Distribute solution. Have one 

or more members of class read their order and compare 
it with the solution. 


Explanation 

The Director: “When the battalion commander 
has finished giving his orders the Company Com¬ 
manders will go back to their respective companies 
and the Major will go to his command post. By this 
time the company reconnaissance parties should be 
back at their companies and ready to guide the vari¬ 
ous elements up to the lines where they are to make 
the reliefs. 

“The Company Commander will assemble his offi¬ 
cers and non-commissioned officers and go over the 
whole situation with them and issue the orders for 
the company. This order will conform to the five 



Approach March 


105 


paragraph system; will contain the essentail ele¬ 
ments of the Major’s order and detailed instructions 
for each element of the company. 

“The Company Commander will then conduct his 
company to the front in such formation as to take 
advantage of the natural cover afforded and so as to 
be as invulnerable as possible to the enemy’s fire. 

“The details of the actual relief will depend upon 
the cover available and what the enemy is doing to 
interfere with it. ’ ’ 



















Terrain Exercise No. 3. 

Defensive Position 

The Problem 
Special Situation—Blue: 

The Blue forces, after severe fighting, have 
reached the line (a). The reds have vigorously de¬ 
fended every foot of the ground, and it is apparent 
that the resistance is growing stronger. 

On account of the exhausted condition of the 
troops and the lack of fresh reserves, the Blues are 
unable to continue the advance and it has been de¬ 
cided to assume the defensive, temporarily. 

The 2nd battalion, which has been the assault bat¬ 
talion, has been stopped and is now holding the line 
( b-c ). It has suffered heavy casualties. 

The 1st battalion, which has been in regimental 
support, has had comparatively few casualties. 

The 3rd battalion is the regimental reserve. 

It is now 4.30 p. m. 

It has been decided to have the 1st battalion, with 
one platoon of the howitzer company attached, or¬ 
ganize and hold a defensive position covering the 
front of the regimental sector just in rear of the 
line now occupied by the 2nd battalion. 

Major A, the battalion commander, accompanied 
by his company commanders and Lieutenant Z, com¬ 
manding the howitzer platoon, has made a personal 
reconnaissance of the position and issued the follow¬ 
ing verbal orders to the assembled officers: 


107 


108 


Terrain Exercises 


“The enemy has stopped our advance temporarily. It 
is necessary for us to assume the defensive until our troops 
can be reorganized and arrangements made to resume the 
advance. 

“Our 2nd battalion is now holding the line ( b-c ). It 
will withdraw after dark. Our 3rd battalion relieves us 
as support battalion. 

“The - infantry on our right will hold the front 

from (d to e); the-infantry on our left will hold the 

front from (/ to g). 

“This battalion, with one howitzer platoon attached, 
will organize and hold the line from (h to ?•). 

Company H will be disposed as follows: 

“One section at ( j ), covering ( k ). 

“One section at ( l ), covering (m). 

“One section at (n), covering ( 0 ). 

“One section at (p), covering ( q). 

“The platoon from the howitzer company will be dis¬ 
posed as follows: 

“The 37 mm. gun at (r) and the light mortar at (s), 
covering the front of the battalion. 

“The firing line and support line are ( t) and (f) re¬ 
spectively. They will be organized into two strong points. 

“Company A will occupy the area (w). 

“Company B will occupy the area (v). 

Company C will occupy the battalion reserve line 
along ( w ). 

Companies will proceed with their tasks with the least 
practicable delay. 

“Administrative arrangements, later. 

“Battalion C. P. at (r).” 




Defensive Position 


109 


Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(a). A brief description of the location of the gen¬ 
eral line reached by the Blue forces. This should be 
indentified by some easily recognized topographical 
feature of the terrain. 

(Z )-c). The specific location of the line occupied by 
the troops of the 2nd battalion. 

( d to e), (/ to g). The boundaries of the front that 
are to be organized and held by the troops on the 
right and left. 

(h to i). The front to be organized and held by the 
1st battalion. This will be the boundary lines of the 
sector nor occupied by the 2nd battalion. 

(j), (0? (w), (p). The location of the several sec¬ 
tions of the machine gun company. 

(fc), (m), (o), (q). The front covered by the sev¬ 
eral sections of the machine gun company. Go into 
detail regarding the bands of fire they are to put 
down. 

(r), (s). The location of the 37 mm. gun and light 
mortar of the howitzer platoon. 

( t ) , (£’)• The location of the firing line and sup¬ 
port, respectively. 

(u) . The area to be occupied by Company A. 

(v) . The area to be occupied by Company B. 

(w) . The location of the battalion reserve line. 

lx). The location of the battalion C. P. 

(Note.—The preparation of this problem will require con¬ 
siderable work on the part of the Director in order to get all of 
the features of the position worked out in detail so as to be able 
to include them in the order to the company commanders. If 
it is practicable to do so the boundaries of the battalion sector, 
together with the location of the machine guns and howitzer 
units and the battalion C. P., should be marked with flags. 
This will save many questions during the Terrain Exercise and 


110 


Terrain Exercises 


save a lot of time. It will give the members of the class a 
much better idea of the set-up and they will be able to proceed 
with the solution of their part of the problem more readily.) 

Procedure 

The members of the class are assembled in the vi¬ 
cinity of (x). 

The Director distributes the sheets containing the 
special situation Blue and reads it aloud. The mem¬ 
bers of the class follow from the copy in their pos¬ 
session. The places, localities and areas referred to 
are pointed out in detail. 

The Director will call upon one or more members 
of the class to state his understanding of the tac- 
ical situation and this process is continued until he 
is satisfied that all members know the details and are 
ready to proceed with the solution. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Before going further with the 
problem I want to make some remarks on the gen¬ 
eral subject of the defensive and some with reference 
to the part that the battalion and its component parts 
plays in it. The problem under consideration is that 
of a passive defense. Our troops have made such 
rapid progress that the rear echelons have not been 
able to keep up. The enemy has been falling back on 
his reserves and naturally his defense is stiffening 
all along the line. The time has arrived when it is 
necessary for us to stop for a period; reorganize our 
forces, which have been more or less disorganized by 
our successes; bring up our rear echelons; and pre¬ 
pare to continue the advance. During this period we 
must so organize our position that the enemy wil] 


Defensive Position 


111 


have little chance for success should he decide to at¬ 
tack with a view to interfering with our arrange¬ 
ments. 

“Our attacking troops have now arrived on a gen¬ 
eral line where a defensive position may be taken up 
and the high command has ordered such action. We 
do not want to give up any ground that has been 
gained that is suitable for our purpose. Having this 
principle in mind Major A has decided to organize 
and hold the ground that is now occupied by the sup¬ 
port echelon of the 2nd Battalion. ” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what factors 
exercise the greatest influence in the selection of a 
defensive position V 9 

Lieutenant Williams: “I should say the facilities 
for communication and those for observation. The 
greater ease with which we can move troops within 
the position the better we can defend it, and unless 
we have facilities for observation we had better move 
to another place for the enemy will be able to sur¬ 
prise us on any and all occasions. ’ ’ 

The Director: “In a defensive position we deploy 
in great depth. What is the object of this, Captain 
Hastings V 9 

Captain Hastings: “Where a great mass of enemy 
artillery is to be encountered we must disperse our 
troops over a large area to force him to scatter his 
fire, and waste a lot of it. In addition to this we 
must have room to maneuver our counter attack units 
and get them into action with as little flank march¬ 
ing as possible. In a case like we are considering 


112 


Terrain Exercises 


here I do not believe such great depth is necessary. 
This is open warfare and it will take the enemy quite 
a while to get his artillery in shape to employ it ef¬ 
fectively on our position. We will therefore be able 
to concentrate our troops in a more shallow zone than 
is usual in regular position warfare.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, what are the 
defensive areas called in a defensive position?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “They are combat groups; 
strong points; centers of resistance; subsectors and 
sectors.” 

The Director: “What do you understand a combat 
group to be?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “It is an area prepared for 
defense and held by a small unit such as a platoon or 
section.” 

The Director: “What is a strong point, Lieuten¬ 
ant Ralston ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “A strong point is an aggre¬ 
gate of combat groups distributed in width and 
depth under the command of one officer. It is 
usually defended by a rifle company and usually has 
machine guns attached. Where practicable, it is ar¬ 
ranged for all ’round defense.” 

The Director: “What is a center of resistance?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “An aggregate of strong 
points distributed in width and depth and com¬ 
manded by one officer. It is usually occupied by a 
battalion. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I hope you all see how this propo¬ 
sition works out. A combat group is the smallest ele¬ 
ment. Two or more of these groups form a strong 
point. Two or more strong points linked up to- 


Defensive Position 


113 


gether form a center of resistance. You will note the 
Major’s disposition for our battalion here. It forms 
a center of resistance consisting of the two strong 
points held by Companies A and B respectively with 
Company C as a reserve with Company D distributed 
at key points within the area.” 

The class is now conducted to area ( u ), which has 
been assigned to Company A. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 1. 

You, Captain A, are commanding Company A, the 
unit assigned to occupy the area ( u ) in the right 
(left) of the battalion sector. You have Major A’s 
order to proceed with your task with the least prac¬ 
ticable delay. 

Required: 

What do you do ? 

Procedure 

The Director will distribute the sheets containing 
Situation No. 1. He will read it to the class and 
make such explanation as may be necessary. 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what steps do you 
take to get your company up to the front?” 

Captain Harvey: “I have with me one runner from 
each of my platoons and two runners from Com¬ 
pany Headquarters. I will send the platoon runners 
back with a verbal message to their respective platoon 
commanders to bring the platoons up. I will have 
one of my company runners to go to the (indicate 
place) with a message to platoon commanders to 
halt their platoons there and report to me here. I 


114 


Terrain Exercises 


think that is all that would be necessary to get the 
platoons up and assemble the platoon commanders 
here to receive orders.” 


Solution 

The Director: “All right. We will assume that 
you have sent the platoon runners back for the pla¬ 
toons and that one of your company runners has gone 
back to the rendezvous point. What are you going 
to do between now and the time the platoon com¬ 
manders report to you for orders?” 

Captain Harvey: “I am going to make a personal 
reconnaissance of the area assigned to my company, 
size up the situation, arrive at a decision as to how I 
am going to occupy the area and dope out my orders 
for the platoon commanders.” 

The Director: “That is the proper procedure. 
Captain Hodges, in what ways may the company be 
distributed in an area of this kind?” 

Captain Hodges: “In the first place there are three 
lines included in the area. The first is the local se¬ 
curity or line of observation—the outpost line; next 
is the firing line which is the line of defense of the 
area—where the fight will take place if the enemy 
attacks; next is the support line. The company must 
cover all three of these lines. There are several 
methods of deployment available. The company may 
be deployed with two platoons each covering the out¬ 
post line and firing line and one platoon on the sup¬ 
port line. In this case each platoon furnishes the 
outguards covering its own front. The company may 
be deployed with two platoons on the firing line only 
and one platoon on the support line; in this case the 



Defensive Position 


115 


outguards would be furnished by the support pla¬ 
toon. The company may be deployed with one pla¬ 
toon on the outpost line; one on the firing line and 
one on the support line. Again it may be deployed 
with the platoons side by side each platoon covering 
all three of the lines. In this case each platoon fur¬ 
nished the outguards covering its own front. 7 7 

(Note.—The Director will draw these four formations out on 
the ground and explain them to the class.) 

The Birector: “Considering the four methods of 
deployment which one would you employ in the or¬ 
ganization of this area, Captain James?” 

Captain James: “I would favor the first method 
where we have two platoons covering the outpost line 
and firing line and one platoon on the support line. 
Each platoon to furnish the outguards covering its 
own front.” 

The Director:“ What factors lead you to favor this 
deployment?” 

Captain James: “By deploying in this manner 
we have two complete combat groups each respon¬ 
sible for its own outguards and its firing line. We 
have a third combat group on the support line located 
in the interval between the two forward groups so 
that it is readily available for counter attack in case 
the enemy should penetrate the line on our front. 
Unity of command is preserved and there will be 
little intermingling of men of different units. Each 
platoon commander has a definite problem to solve. 
I think it is by far the best method. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Bo you see any objections to the 
second method of deployment, Lieuteant Baker?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I should say that it is about 


116 


Terrain Exercises 


the same as the first method. The thing that I do not 
like about it is the proposition of taking the out- 
guards from the support platoon. I like the idea of 
having each combat group being responsible for its 
whole front. In addition to dividing responsibility 
for the defense of the area occupied it weakens the 
support platoon and makes it just that much less 
effective for counter attack work. ’ ’ 

The Director: “What objections have you to the 
third method—the platoons in echelon one behind the 
other ?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “When the outguards fall back 
on the firing line you have the proposition of an in¬ 
termingling of men of the two platoons. That will 
cause endless confusion and destroy the unity of 
command. * ’ 

The Director: “Any objections to the fourth 
method V’ 

Lieutenant Baker: “I can conceive of circum¬ 
stances where this method might be employed to ad¬ 
vantage. For example: In woods or in rough, diffi¬ 
cult terrain. I do not think it would be employed in 
an area such as we now have under consideration. ” 

The Director: “We seem to be pretty well agreed 
that the first method should be employed. Now what 
considerations will affect your decision as to the area 
to be included in each of the two combat groups, 
Captain Hall?” 

Captain Hall: “The battalion commander has as¬ 
signed the elements of the machine gun company to 
certain positions to cover the front. I would build 
my combat groups around this distribution and take 
advantage of the fire that they are able to produce. ’ 9 



Defensive Position 


117 


The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, where would 
you locate the Company C. P. V 9 

Lieutenant Barry: “The C. P. should be in such a 
position that it can be easily reached and found by 
the runners. It should be so arranged that the enemy 
will not be able to observe the runners entering and 
leaving. I would say that it should be located in the 
area lying between the combat groups and the sup¬ 
port platoon.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “The Major indicated the firing line 
and support line of the battalion center of resistance 
and designated the area for Company A to organize 
and hold. We have decided to organize it with two 
platoons on the firing line, each furnishing its own 
outguards and each forming a combat group; and one 
platoon on the support line. The 1st battalion ad¬ 
vanced posts are holding the enemy back and there 
is every reason to expect that they will be able to 
continue to do so for sometime yet. 

“The location of the machine guns, the 37 mm. guns 
and the light mortars in the area are known. 

“It will be necessary for Captain E to assign the 
platoons, two to the firing line and one to the support 
line, and give necessary instructions regarding the 
work to be undertaken. These instructions will not 
go into any more detail than is absolutely necessary. 
In any event they must not be such as will take the 
initiative away from the platoon commanders. The 
platoons are given their missions. It is then up to 
the platoon commander to execute them. This initial 
order is intended merely to get the work started. It 
must give the platoon commanders sufficient detail 


118 


Terrain Exercises 


for them to go about their reconnaissance and plan 
for the organization of their combat groups and the 
defensive preparation of the ground they are to 
occupy. The defensive position as it appears finally 
is not the result of any one order. It is a gradual 
growth planned and executed from day to day. The 
first elements may be only a line of individual ‘fox 
holes’ dug by the men. These are connected up and 
finally form a short section of trench here and there. 
As the position is studied more in detail it will be¬ 
come apparent where other defensive utilities should 
be constructed in order to add to the strength of the 
position. All that Captain A should include in his 
order at this time is sufficient detail to get the work 
started.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “We have sized up the situation and 
arrived at a decision. It is now necessary to put that 
decision into an order. We assume that the platoons 
have arrived at the rendezvous and the platoon com¬ 
manders have reported to you here for orders. 

“Now I want each member of the class to write out 
the order that he would give at this time. You may 
omit the first paragraph;—information of the enemy 
and our own troops. It would be much the same as 
that contained in the Maj or’s order. We will assume 
that you have already given that to the platoon com¬ 
manders. Start your order with paragraph 2.” 

When all the members of the class have completed 
their work the sheets will be collected and again dis¬ 
tributed, making sure that no officer gets his own 
paper back again. 



Defensive Position 


119 


The Director will call upon one or more members 
of the class to read the order he has in his possession 
and it will then be discussed. 

When all of this discussion is finished the Director 
will distribute the mimeographed sheets containing 
a copy of the Captain’s order. Each member of the 
class will receive his solution back again and com¬ 
pare it with the solution submitted by the Director. 

The Order 

2. This company will organize and hold the front from 

.to. 

3. (a) Lieutenant M, with the 1st platoon, will organize 

and hold the right half of the company area from 
.to ....... 

(b) Lieutenant 0, with the 2nd platoon, will organize 

and hold the left half of the company area from 
. to . 

(c) Lieutenant P, with the 3rd platoon will constitute 
the local support and will be posted on the support 

line in the vicinity of. 

( x ) Combat groups will furnish the out guards for 

their respective fronts. 

4. Battalion Aid station at. 

Other administrative arrangements later. 

5. Company C. P. at...” 











120 


Terrain Exercises 


Defensive Position Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Assemble class at (x). Distribute sheets containing problem, 

read and explain. Call on one or more members of class 
to state their understanding of tactical situation. 

2. Passive defense. Explain progress of action and necessity 

for a halt. Prepare to ward off enemy attacks. 

3. Factors in selection of position, communication and observa¬ 

tion. Reasons for distribution in depth. Defensive areas: 
combat groups; strong points; centers of resistence; sub¬ 
sectors and sectors. Definition of each. 

4. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 1. Read and ex¬ 

plain. Get company up. Message to platoon commanders. 
Rendezvous for company. 

5. Reconnaissance. Size up situation. Methods of distribu¬ 

tion of company. First, second, third, fourth, advantages 
and disadvantages of each. 

6. Decision to use first method. Explain what must be included 

in order. Avoid details. Give platoon commanders their 
job and let them go to it. 

7. Each member of class write out order. Collect and distribute. 

Hand out mimeograph sheets containing order. Compare 
work with solution. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the area to be occu¬ 
pied by the 1st platoon and which is to be organized 
into a combat group. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

You, Lieutenant M, are commanding the 1st pla¬ 
toon which has been designated to form the combat 
group in the right half of the company area. 

The area assigned to your platoon is bounded by 
. (describe area boundaries). Your front ex¬ 
tends from.to. (indicate front). The 

firing line extends along (indicate). 






Defensive Position 


121 


You have arrived at this point. You have with 
you two or your platoon runners. The platoon is 
back at the company rendezvous. 

Required: 

How do you carry out your mission ? 

Procedure 

The Director will distribute the sheets containing 
Situation No. 2. He will read it aloud and make 
such explanations as may be necessary. He will 
point out to the members of the class the boundaries 
of the area assigned to the platoon; the front which 
the platoon is ordered to cover; and the location of 
the firing line. He will also indicate the position of 
each element of Company D in the platoon area and 
the location of the 37 mm. gun and light mortar. 

(Note.—If practicable, the location of machine guns, the 37 
mm. gun and light mortar should be indicated by flags of a 
distinctive color.) 

By questioning members of the class the Director 
will make sure that every member understands the 
situation. They will then be able to proceed with the 
solution of the problem on a uniform basis. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, what would you 
do?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send one of my run¬ 
ners back with a message to the platoon sergeant to 
bring the platoon up. ? ’ 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, do you agree 
with what Lieutenant Hunt has just said?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “No, sir. I would not want 
the platoon to come up here until I have sized up the 


122 


Terrain Exercises 


situation; decided upon my dispositions; and made 
arrangements for them to get to work on the position 
we are to occupy. That will take me some little 
‘time.’ ” 

The Director: “I think you are right. There is no 
need of exposing any more men to the enemy’s fire 
than is absolutely necessary. As soon as the enemy 
realizes that our attack has stopped and we are tak¬ 
ing up a defensive position he will do everything in 
his power to interfere with our plans. If he observes 
a lot of men all along the line digging in he will open 
up with everything he has available. ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Williams: “That is the point I had in 
mind. It seems to me that, as a matter of fact, we 
will not be able to accomplish very much on the prep¬ 
aration of the position until it begins to get dusk. ’ 7 

The Director: “You are right. If we can get the 
layout of the position completed during the remain¬ 
ing full daylight hours; decide how we are to organ¬ 
ize the combat group and get the trenches and other 
utilities staked out I think we will have accomplished 
all that could be reasonably expected. Do you see 
the point, Lieutenant Hunt?” 

(Note.—It is assumed that it will be dusk at 6 o’clock.) 

Lieutenant Hunt: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “Now, taking into consideration 
what we have said, what would you do?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send a runner back to 
the platoon sergeant to have the men take cover and 
make themselves comfortable. I would want them 
to have as much rest as possible for they are going 
to have a night of hard work. I would have the run- 


Defensive Position 


123 


ner tell the platoon sergeant to turn the platoon over 
to Sergeant R (platoon guide) and for himself, the 
two section leaders and the other platoon guides to 
report to me here.” 

The Director: “I think that is all right. What 
are you going to do while you are waiting for the men 
to report to you?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I will make a personal recon¬ 
naissance of the area, size up the situation and decide 
upon how I am going to dispose my troops.” 

(Note.—The disposition of troops will, of course, depend upon 
the lay of the ground and the location of the machine guns in 
the sector. The following procedure is based upon certain dis¬ 
positions and is designed to bring out the points that come up 
for consideration in the organization of a combat group of this 
kind. The Director will have previously worked out his solution 
to the problem and during the course of the discussion will 
bring out the tactical points that are necessary for the training 
and instruction of the members of the class.) 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what are the 
component parts of a combat group?” 

Captain Hastings: “First there is the local secu¬ 
rity line—the outpost. Behind this is the firing line 
—the fighting line of the group. Outguards are 
thrown out to back up their sentinels.” 

The Director: “How may the deployment of the 
platoon be made ? ” 

Captain Hastings: “It may be made with the sec¬ 
tions abreast, each section furnishing the outpost 
covering its own front. It may be made with one sec¬ 
tion behind the other, the leading section occupying 
the firing line.” 

The Director: “Which form of deployment do you 
favor?” 

Captain Hastings: “I favor the first. The sections 



124 


Terrain Exercises 


deployed abreast and each section providing for its 
own local security. The advantages of this is that 
the section leader is responsible for the whole front 
assigned to him and there is unity of command. If 
the outpost line falls back to the firing line it falls 
back on the men of its own section. In the second 
method, if the outpost section falls back it does so on 
the men of the other section of the platoon and there 
is bound to be more or less intermingling of units. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think you are right. Let us de¬ 
cide that we are to make the deployment with the sec¬ 
tions side by side, each section to furnish its own 
local security—that is, its own outguards. This 
means that the front assigned to the platoon may now 
be divided into two parts and a section assigned to 
each. Lieutenant Wallace, what is the governing 
factor in the ground assigned to each of the sec¬ 
tions?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “Each section must be able to 
cover the ground to its front and must be so arranged 
as to mutually support each other. That is, its fire 
must be able to sweep the front of the adjoining 
groups.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, how much 
front can a platoon cover in this formation?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “In country such as this the 
platoon can cover about 400 to 500 yards of front 
with its fire. This does not mean that the platoon 
occupies such a continuous line. It will actually oc- 
cupy only a small portion of it. The intervening por¬ 
tion will be covered by its fire. By deploying with 
the sections abreast of each other we can occupy the 
sector allotted to the platoon without any difficulty.” 


Defensive Position 


125 


The Director: “What is the extent of the area that 
a section may organize for close defense, Captain 
Harvey ? ’ * 

Captain Harvey: “Ordinarily it should not be 
more than 75 yards by 75 yards. This 75-yard front 
actually occupied by the section makes 150 yards for 
the platoon. The intervening ground of say 150 to 
200 yards will be covered by fire/' 

Captain Hodges: “I do not see how you arrive at 
the short distance of 150 to 200 yards interval be¬ 
tween sections/ ’ 

Captain Harvey: “(Indicating by a diagram on 
the ground.) Say the right section is 75 yards from 
the right boundary of the area; then the section cov¬ 
ers 75 yards of trenches; the interval to the section 
on the left is say 150 yards; the left section occupies 
75 yards of front and is 75 yards from the left bound¬ 
ary. All of this, as you will see makes a front of 
about 450 yards covered by the platoon. The interval 
between sections might well be expanded to 200 yards 
which would make the platoon cover a front of 500 
yards without serious difficulty. This would make 
1,000 yards for the company and 2,000 yards for the 
battalion with two companies on the firing line. I 
would say this is the maximum front. It would be 
better to reduce the interval a little and bring the 
total down to about 800 yards/’ 

Captain Hodges: “I see the proposition now. I 
do not think we would have any trouble covering the 
front allotted to our platoon. ’ ? 

Procedure 

The Director: “The next question is the allotment 


126 


Terrain Exercises 


of sections in the platoon area. In this connection 
you will have to consider the lay of the ground, and 
select the location for the section groups, so that the 
ground to the front may best be defended and so 
that the groups are able to mutually support each 
other. 

“I want the members of the class to go over the 
ground allotted to the platoon and each of you select 
the location of each section group. Keep in mind 
the factors I have just spoken of—defense of the 
foreground, field of fire, and mutual support of ad¬ 
jacent groups; also consider the location of the 
machine guns that have already been made by the 
battalion commander. We will all assemble here in 
20 minutes/ ’ 

The members of the class will now go over the 
ground allotted to the platoon and each man will 
work out his disposition independently. 

At the end of the time the class will assemble at the 
designated point and the discussion resumed. 

Solution 

The Director: “You have now been over the area 
allotted to the platoon. Captain James, how would 
you dispose of the two sections of the platoon?” 

Captain James: “I find that the front naturally 
divides itself into two parts. A section in the right 
portion of the area will be able to cover the fore¬ 
ground with its fire. The right element will be able 
to cover the front of the combat group to the right 
and the left element will be able to sweep the front 
of the section on the left. The same applies to the 
left section. We can locate our trenches in each 


Defensive Position 


127 


area so that we not only do not interfere with the 
fire of the machine guns but will be able to cover 
areas that form dead space for them. I do not think 
there will be any difficulty in preparing the position 
for defense/ ’ 

The Director: “Has any member of the class any 
other plan to offer V’ 

(Note.—The members of the class should be urged to pre¬ 
sent their views on the subject. The more discussion that can 
be created the better it is for all concerned.) 

The Director: “I agree with Captain James. We 
can organize the area allotted to the platoon in fine 
shape. And this is ordinarily the case with all these 
tactical problems. If we go about their solution in a 
systematic manner we can usually arrive at a reason¬ 
able and suitable solution to them. 

“There is another point that must be decided at 
this time. That is the location of the platoon com¬ 
mand post. Where would you locate it, Lieutenant 
Baker 

Lieutenant Baker: “I would locate it at . 

(indicate place)/’ 

The Director: “What factors did you take into 
consideration in selecting that location ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Baker: “The facilities for observation 
and communication with all parts of the combat 
group. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Has any member of the class se¬ 
lected another location for the command post"/’ 

(Note.—If an member suggests another location it should be 
discussed and put to the test of facility for observaton and 
communication. The place that provides these two elements 
the best should be selected.) 

The Director: “Now, there are some other arrange¬ 
ments that will have to be made before the men can 



128 


Terrain Exercises 


actually go to work on the position. In the first 
place, they must have the proper tools to work with. 
Of course, some work may be accomplished with the 
individual intrenching tools that the squads carry, 
but they will need a number of regular digging tools 
in this case. Wire will have to be supplied for the 
construction of the obstacles in front of the position. 
It is presumed that the battalion staff will attend to 
all of these things, but what the platoon commander 
is interested in is when and where will they be sup¬ 
plied. I think I would send my platoon sergeant to 
the company commander to let him know just what 
is required and to secure definite information as to 
when and where tools and wire will be available. It 
is of little use to get a lot of men up to the platoon 
area unless they have something to work with. Be¬ 
sides the area is more or less crowded at this time 
with men of the support elements of the 2nd bat¬ 
talion. These are some of the things that the platoon 
commander must think about at this time. 

“Let us now assume that the platoon sergeant and 
the other men that you sent for have joined you here. 
Let us see what orders and instructions you would 
give them. Captain Hall, what would you include 
in the first paragraph of the order 

Captain Hall: “All the information of the enemy 
and our own troops. I would explain why it is neces¬ 
sary for our troops to go on the defensive for a time; 
the situation with respect to the 2nd battalion, which 
is holding on a short distance to the front; the loca¬ 
tion of the troops on our right and left and the role 
of the 3rd platoon of our company as support; the lo¬ 
cation of the elements of Company D in our area, and 
the location of the machine guns in the adjoining 


Defensive Position 


129 


area; the location of the elements of our company. I 
would indicate the location of the firing line where it 
crosses our area. I think that is all that is necessary 
to be included under information of the enemy and 
our supporting troops.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, what would you 
include in the second paragraph of your order ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Barry: “My plan. This platoon will 
organize and hold the front from.to.’ ’ 

The Director: “And what would you include in 
paragraph 3 of the order?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “The disposition of my troops: 

“The 1st section will organize and hold the front 

from.(indicate) to.(indicate), connect 

up and cooperate with the . Infantry on the 

right. 

i 6 The 2nd section will organize and hold the front 

from.(indicate) to.(indicate), connect 

up and cooperate with the 2nd platoon on the left. 

“Each section will furnish its own outguards along 
the general line.(indicate). 

“I think that is all that is necessary at this time. 
I have not gone into details as to just how each sec¬ 
tion leader is to solve his problem. I will be along 
the line while they are working it out. If they start 
anything that I do not approve of, I will have an 
opportunity to tell them so at the time. The com¬ 
pany commander has not hampered me with orders 
and I will not do so with respect to my section 
leaders.” 

The Director: “You are right about that. Give 
every man a chance to work out his own salvation. 
Do not destroy his initiative. Is there anything to 
be included in paragraph 4, Lieutenant Hunt?” 










130 


Terrain Exercises 


Lieutenant Hunt: “Yes, sir. I would give the in¬ 
formation about the intrenching tools and wire be¬ 
ing supplied later. This is done to show my non¬ 
commissioned officers that we have not overlooked the 
subject. 

“ Information concerning issue of intrenching 
tools and wire will be given later. 

‘ ‘ The battalion aid station is at.’’ 

The Director: “And what would be included in the 
last paragraph, Captain Hastings V 9 
Captain Hastings: “The location of the company 
and platoon command posts. 

“Company C. P. at. 

“ Platoon C. P. at .” 


Explanation 

The Director: “I think that would cover all that 
is necessary at this time. Let us visualize what is 
now going to happen. The section leaders with their 
section guides would go out to the area that has been 
assigned to them. They would locate the machine- 
gun positions that were designated by the battalion 
commander and then dope out the disposition that 
they are to make of the three squads of their respec¬ 
tive sections. 

“The platoon commander is first concerned with 
the procurement of the intrenching tools for digging 
in his groups and the wire for constructing an ob- 
stacle along the front. As soon as he gets the pla¬ 
toon sergeant off with a message to the company com¬ 
mander about these things he will go to the front and 
join the section leaders. He will find out from them 





Defensive Position 


131 


what dispositions they are planning on and give 
them such detailed instructions as may be necessary 
to carry out his own ideas of how the position should 
be organized. He will have everything in readiness 
to bring the men forward as soon as it is advisable to 
do so.” 


Defense Position Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Distribute sheets containing situation No. 2. Read and ex¬ 

plain. Point out boundaries of area assigned to the pla¬ 
toon and indicate positions assigned to machine gun and 
special weapons. Mark with flags if practicable. 

2. Question as to whether platoon should be brought up now; 

nothing for men to do yet; no necessity for exposing them. 
Have platoon sergeant, section leaders, and platoon and 
section guides report at once. Leave platoon in charge of 
one section guide. 

3. Size up situation. Determine upon dispositions, component 

parts of combat group, methods of deploying a platoon. 
Decide to deploy sections side by side. Outguards. 

4. Factors that govern selection of position; field of fire to 

front; mutual support with adjoining units. Front that 
platoon may cover. Depth of secton area. 

5. Have class go over ground and decide on dispositions. Allot¬ 

ment of sections to platoon area. Location of C. P. ob¬ 
servation and communication. 

6. Question of intrenching tools and wire for obstacles. Pla¬ 

toon sergeant to company commander about tools and 
wire. 

7. The order. Information of enemy and own troops. Plan: 

Platoon to organize and hold front from ..to.... 

Orders for each section. Supply outguards. Make orders 
short. Little detail. Let every man work out his own 
salvation. 

8. Explanation: Visualize what is happening. Section leaders 

and guides go to section area; dope out situation and 
decide on disposition. Platoon commander sends platoon 
sergeant to see about tools and wire, then joins section 
leaders on the line. 


Procedure 

The class will be conducted to the area assigned 
to the 2nd section of the platoon. 





132 


Terrain Exercises 


The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

You, Sergeant K, commanding the 2nd section, 
have been ordered to organize and hold the front 
f rom . (indicate) to. (indicate). 

The section is to connect up and cooperate with the 
2nd platoon on the left. 

Your section is to furnish its own outguards along 
the general line. (indicate). 

You have arrived at this point. 

You have with you your section guides. 

Required: 

How do you carry out your mission? 

Explanation 

The Director: “While it is not expected that any 
member of the class will ever be called upon to com¬ 
mand a section of Infantry, it is nevertheless impor¬ 
tant for you to know what happens when you issue 
an order which requires the action of a section leader. 

“Let us visualize this situation. Let us consider 
ourselves as being Sergeant K. He is the fellow that 
all the orders finally get down to and the one that has 
to do the real job out here on the line. You hear the 
claims of certain staff corps, from time to time, about 
the necessity for having high-class men for the key 
positions in their enlisted personnel. Can you show 
me in any branch of the Army where a high-class man 
is required any more than he is right here ? Here is a 
doughboy sergeant face to face with a problem, the 
proper solution of which means more to the success 
of the operations than any so-called “highly tech- 





Defensive Position 


133 


nical” position in the back areas. Upon what he does 
and how he does it may depend the success or failure 
of this whole military operation. The lives of the 
men under him are absolutely in his hands. If he 
blunders he may lose all of them. 

“With these few remarks let us proceed with the 
problem. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Director will read the situation aloud, and 
make such explanations as may be necessary. He 
will call on one or more members of the class to state 
his understanding of the situation. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, how would 
you go about your task*?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “In the first place, I would 
look over the front and see what it affords in the way 
of a field of fire. I would next locate the section 
groups on the right and left and see where their fire 
could help to protect my front and how fire from my 
position could help to protect their fronts. I would 
see how the bands of fire from the machine guns in 
the area lay with relation to my front. ” 

(Note.—The Director will point out the location of the adja¬ 
cent section groups on the right and left and the position of the 
machine guns. He will also indicate the direction of the bands 
of fire of the machine guns. All of this should be indicated by 
flags of distinctive color if it is possible to do so.) 

The Director: “You have done all of the things 
you mention and the whole layout is clear to you. 
What is your next step?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would search out the 
vacant spaces—the uncovered ground of the ma- 


134 


Terrain Exercises 


chine guns and so arrange my dispositions to cover 
them. I would first determine where my automatic 
rifles may be employed to the best advantage. I will 
want them for flanking fire to cover the adjacent 
combat groups and will expect the support of their 
automatic rifles to help cover my own front. I will 
want them to cover exposed places to the front that 
the enemy will have to pass over in making his at¬ 
tack. I will want them to cover certain lines along 
my wire entanglements. All of these things will have 
to be taken into consideration in locating them. I 
will next consider my other special weapons, the rifle 
grenade and the hand grenade. They are both val¬ 
uable adjuncts to the defense, especially the rifle 
grenade. They will both serve well to cover dead 
spaces that are difficult to reach with machine-gun 
and rifle fire. Such features as ravines, sunken 
roads and places where enemy troops may seek cover 
can be made untenable by the rifle grenade up to 
about 200 yards.’’ 

The Director: “All right, let us assume that all of 
these things have been taken into consideration. 
How may the troops be disposed to best meet them, 
Lieutenant Wallace?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “We have three squads in the 
section. We are required to furnish our own out- 
guards in addition to furnishing the garrison for the 
firing line. I should say that one squad employed 
on the outpost line would be sufficient. That would 
leave two squads for the firing line.” 

The Director: “Now, there are two plans by which 
the outguards may be furnished. One is to have each 
squad cover its own front with an outguard and the 


Defensive Position 


135 


other is to have a complete squad detailed as out- 
guard for the section. Which of these plans do you 
prefer to use in this instance, Lieutenant Ralston 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I think it would be better to 
employ one squad as the outguards for the section 
rather than have each squad do it. ’ ’ 

The Director: “What factors lead you to such a 
decision V’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “If we have each squad fur¬ 
nish an outguard for its own front it would take half 
of the squad for that purpose. The least that could 
be sent out would be a cossack post of four men—a 
leader and three reliefs for a single sentinel post. 
I would not want to send our automatic riflemen on 
that duty and interfere with our arrangements for 
flanking fire. We would not desire to send our rifle 
grenadier under ordinary circumstances. This would 
leave only two rifles in the squad and one of these is 
the squad leader. If we send one squad out to fur¬ 
nish the outguards it can furnish two cossack posts, 
which are sufficient to cover our front, and it will 
leave the other two squads intact to occupy the firing 
line with all their weapons. If the enemy attacks 
and the outguards are driven in they will fall back 
on the flanks so as not to mask the fire of the squads 
on the firing line. This will enable them to drift to¬ 
ward an assembly point or trench in rear of the 
firing line proper where they will be available to the 
section commander as a small local support to be 
thrown in any of the squad firing positions where 
casualties have been relatively heavy or to put them 
in where they are most needed to repel the attack.” 

The Director: “Of course it is always problemat¬ 
ical as to how many men of the outguards will be 


136 


Terrain Exercises 


able to get back; your points are well taken and con¬ 
vincing. I agree with you that the outguards may 
best be furnished by a complete squad, and this leaves 
the other units intact for the firing line proper. This 
now brings us down to the location of two small 
groups of a squad each. Captain Hodges, what fac¬ 
tors will you consider in locating these two groups 

Captain Hodges: “I would want one near each 
flank of the area where they can help cover the front 
of the adjacent groups, and I would want also to 
cover the front of the position. In order to do this I 
would break each squad into two groups of four men 
each. In the right group I would have the automatic 
rifleman and three riflemen of the 1st squad. The 
automatic riflemen would have a fire position from 
which he can cover the front of the adjacent section 
on the right, and if the one position does not serve 
the purpose I will have another fire position for him 
from which he can fire to the front. In the next 
group of four men I would have the rifle grenadier 
and three riflemen. They will be charged with cov¬ 
ering the front. The group that the squad leader 
will remain with will depend upon circumstances. He 
would not be definitely assigned, but would go where 
his presence is most required. I would have a group 
of four men of the 2nd squad next to the left with 
the rifle grenade in it, and near the left of my line I 
would have another group similar to the one on the 
right with the automatic rifleman in it. The 3rd 
squad will furnish the outpost—two cossack posts.” 

The Director: “I think you have made a very good 
distribution of troops. I do not think you can say 
off hand that you would have the rifle grenadier al¬ 
ways in the interior groups. His position must de- 


Defensive Position 


137 


pend upon the prospective targets that he may have. 
Now, the distribution brings us down to the propo¬ 
sition of the preparation of four short sections of 
trench sufficient to shelter four men each. This 
makes it a comparatively simple proposition. You 
see, when you divide all of this work up in the way 
we have how it gradually clears up and becomes per¬ 
fectly simple. 

“Let us now locate on the ground the four short 
sections of trench that will have to be prepared. ’ 9 

Procedure 

The class will now be conducted to the right of the 
section area and then along the front, and the exact 
location of the four short trenches will be determined 
upon. Each will then be traced on the ground so that 
the members of the class may see just the sector front 
that it may cover. If additional pits are required 
for the automatic riflemen they will also be indicated 
on the ground. One or more members of the class 
may be required to lie down on the ground and verify 
the field of fire from each trench. 

The Director: “Captain James, we have made a 
mark on the ground for each of these short trench 
lengths; we call that a trace; what do you mean by 
that?” 

Captain James: “That the line we have made is the 
upper edge of the interior slope of the parapet of the 
trench. It is the firing line of the trench. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Now we have located these 
trenches; you have noted the distance apart they are. 
Would we try to connect them up with a continuous 
trench under the circumstances, Lieutenant Baker?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “No, sir. I think not. If any 


138 


Terrain Exercises 


continuous trench is to be constructed it seems to me 
that it should be dug a few feet to the rear and 
parallel to our line of short trenches. Our short 
trenches can then be connected up with it by commu¬ 
nication trenches running obliquely, to give cover 
from fire. I think this parallel trench should be 
traced now so that work can be commenced on it to¬ 
night after the fire trenches are completed. It should 
be a zigzag trench. The 3rd squad can get some 
work done on it before they have to go on outpost. ” 

The Director: “I think we have covered every¬ 
thing that is necessary preliminary to issuing the 
order of the section commander except the location 
of the command post. Where would you locate it, 
Captain Hall?” 

Captain Hall: “I would locate it here (indicates). 
The questions of observation and communication are 
the determining factors in its selection. ’’ 

The Director: “Now I want each member of the 
class to write out this order that Sergeant K would 
issue to his section guides. Make it simple and to 
the point.” 

The members of class will write out the order on 
their pads and when all have completed it the sheets 
are passed to the officer on the left for criticism. 

The Director will read aloud the order he has pre¬ 
pared and the members of the class compare their 
work with it. 

The Order 

“There is no further information of the enemy. You 
know the location of the machine guns in this area; the 
location of the 37 mm. gun and light mortar of the How¬ 
itzer company and the location of adjoining groups. 

“Our section will organize and hold this area. 


Defensive Position 


139 


“The 1st squad will prepare the two fire trenches we 
have traced in the right of the area. Sergeant F, you 
will superintend the task. 

“The 2nd squad will prepare the two fire trenches we 
have traced in the left of the area. Sergeant G, you will 
superintend the task. 

“The 3rd squad will furnish the outguards along the 

line. I will give Corporal B detailed instructions 

later. 

“When the fire trenches have been completed work 
will be started on the parallel that we have traced. 

“Work will begin as soon as we get the section up 
and pushed to completion as rapidly as possible tonight. 

“Section C. P. at.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “The section leader will return to 
the company and get the section ready to come to the 
front. He will go himself rather than send one of 
the guides. There may be some new orders or in¬ 
structions from the company or platoon commander, 
and he will want to get them first hand. He will 
want to be sure that the section is supplied with the 
intrenching tools that are necessary for the rapid 
prosecution of the mark. 

“The section guides will each mark the cutting 
lines for the section of trench that he is responsible 
for and those of the communication parallel. They 
will have everything in readiness to start work as 
soon as the men get up to the position. 

“We have gone into considerable detail in the so¬ 
lution of the problem, but I am sure every member 
of the class now realizes the necessity for it and how 
simple the final solution is. When we started out 
with the problem I am sure you all felt like we were 



140 


Terrain Exercises 


entering upon a hopeless task but when you finally 
get down to the last analysis of it and find that the 
pressing problem is the digging of four short sec¬ 
tions of trench capable of sheltering four men each 
and getting started on the communication parallel 
you realize that it is not such a big proposition 
after all. 

“All of this shows the necessity for the systematic 
training of officers and men in these things. I am 
sure you can see what would happen to an untrained 
outfit blundering into a proposition of this kind. 
You can readily imagine a company rushing madly 
to the front with no one to tell the men where to go or 
what to do. These tactical situations that confront 
troops in time of war require time and forethought 
for their solution. Unless the proposition is gone 
about in a systematic and orderly manner the task is 
hopeless. I fell sure that if any of you were con¬ 
fronted with the task of organizing a defensive posi¬ 
tion in the face of the enemy you are better equipped 
for the solution of the task for having had this Ter¬ 
rain Exercise.’ ’ 


Defensive Position Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to area assigned to the 2nd Section. 

2. Explain purpose of giving this small problem to class. Dis¬ 

tribute Situation No. 3, read and explain. 

3. Point out location of all defensive elements that have a bear¬ 

ing on the area allotted to the 2nd Section. Disposition of 
troops—factors affecting outpost line, firing line. 

4. Location of groups, automatic rifle, rifle grenadier. 

5. Locate trenches on the ground and trace them. Locate par¬ 

allel communication trench. 

6. Issue order. Collect and redistribute. Present order for 

discussion. 

7. Explain necessity for training in tactics. 



Terrain Exercise No. 4. 

A Machine Gun Company in Attack* 

The Problem 

General Situation: 

The ( a ) forms the boundary between hostile states. 
The Blue Corps has crossed the boundary. Its ad¬ 
vance has been stopped by a Red force of two di¬ 
visions at (&). 

Special Situation, Blue: 

In a general attack by the Blue Corps, the - 

Division is attacking with (c) regiments abreast in 
the sector bounded on the right (d) by (e) and on the 
left ( d ) by (e). The order of the regiments from 
right to left is (/). Each regiment has one battalion 
in the assault, one in regimental reserve, and one in 

brigade or division reserve (g). The-- Battalion 

-Infantry, is the assaulting battalion of the- 

Infantry (h). The right (d) boundary of the bat¬ 
talion is (e). Its left ( d ) boundary is (c). 

The battalion is deployed with Company (i) on the 
right and Company (k) on the left, as assault com¬ 
panies, and Company ( l ) as the reserve company. 
The machine gun company (m) and one platoon of 
the howitzer company are operating with the bat¬ 
talion. 

Special Situation No. 1: 

The division began a general advance at (n) today. 
At ( 0 ), when the scouts reached (p) they were 
stopped by fire from the vicinity of (q). 


* Prepared by Major Walter C. Short, Infantry. 


141 







142 


Terrain Exercises 


At (r), Major X at ( s ), received a message from 
the right (left) assault company that it was held up 
by fire from ( t ). The message stated that the com¬ 
pany would assault at ( u ) by building up a firing 
line at (v) and having a platoon attack in the direc¬ 
tion of (w), and requested the assistance of the ma¬ 
chine guns and auxiliary weapons. At the same time 
Major X received a message from the left (right) 
assault company that it had encountered slight re¬ 
sistance from (x), but was continuing to advance. 

At the time Major X received the messages the 
machine gun company was located as follows: The 
1st and 2d Platoons were in rear of the right and 
left assault companies, respectively, at (y), with 
guns mounted on carts. The captain with his head¬ 
quarters’ detail was with Major X. 

Explanation of Symbols 

( а ) In designating the boundary line, some natu¬ 
ral topographical or geographical feature should be 
selected, such as a river, creek, road, state boundary, 
etc. In this problem the boundary may be some 
miles from the point where the problem starts and in 
the opposite direction from the direction of attack. 

(б) A general defensive position in rear of the 
ground selected for the problem. 

(c) Two, three or four regiments would be placed 
in the first line depending on the frontage assigned 
to the division and other conditions. 

(d) Compass direction—north, south, east, or 
west. 

(e) Describe boundaries by roads, creeks, towns, 
points, etc. Distance between boundaries should be 


M. G. Company in Attack 


143 


such as to give appropriate frontage to the division 
—about 500 yards for each battalion employed as an 
assaulting battalion. 

(/) Give order by enumerating regiments as—1st, 
2nd, 3rd, 4th Infantry. 

( Q ) The number of battalions in assault and in 
reserve may vary in different regiments, depending 
upon the frontage assigned to the regiment and the 
nature of its task. 

(h) If the regiment has more than one battalion 

in the first line, the text should read: “Is the right 
(left) assault battalion of-Infantry.” 

(i) , (k), ( l ), (m) Use letters appropriate to the 
companies of the designated battalion. 

(n), ( o ) Indicate the hour. 

(p) Select position suitable for firing line with 
position in rear suitable for direct overhead fire of 
machine guns. 

( q ) Select suitable position for small force on the 
defensive. 

(r) Indicate the hour a few minutes later than 

( O ). 

( s ) Select a position between the assault and re¬ 
serve companies with good visibility. 

( t ) Defensive position for small force of Reds. 

(u) Indicate an hour that will give the rifle and 
machine gun companies time to get into position for 
the attack. 

(v) Usually on or in advance of the line of scouts. 

(w) A direction that will flank or envelop the local 
resistance. 

(x) One of the positions from which scouts origi¬ 
nally received fire. 



144 


Terrain Exercises 


(y) Platoons should be in rear of positions you 
plan to have them occupy and on natural lines of 
advance. 

Required; 

The action taken by Major X and the others actu¬ 
ally issued by him. 

. (Note.—-The Machine Gun Company is organized and equipped 
m accordance with Table of Organization 29-W. See Appen¬ 
dix I.) ** 

Procedure 

The members of the class are assembled at s, the 
point where Major X receives the messages from his 
assault companies. 

The Director: “Before taking up the problem for 
solution, I wish to make a few remarks upon the em¬ 
ployment of a machine gun company with an assault 
battalion.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “The following, in general terms, 
are the principal tasks of the machine guns on the 
offensive: 

(1) To cover the deployment of the infantry and 
its advance to the first firing position. 

“ (2) To support the attack of the infantry. 

“(3) To support the infantry in continuing the 
attack or taking up the pursuit after the enemy’s 
main position has been captured. 

“ (4) To assist in the consolidation of the position 
whenever the limit of the advance is reached or the 
infantry is brought to a standstill. 

Dining the combat the function of the machine 
guns is to assist constantly the advance of the infan- 


M. G. Company in Attack 


145 


try by fire power. The use of machine guns only at 
decisive points in the fight is not sufficient. They 
must be so used as to exert a continuous influence 
from the beginning to the end of the fight. They can 
act by fire alone and cannot be used as assault troops. 

“ Every assaulting infantry battalion habitually 
retains and employs its machine gun company. The 
machine gun company almost invariably acts under 
the direct orders of the battalion commander. Only 
in very exceptional cases will the company act under 
the orders of the regimental machine gun officer after 
H hour, although he frequently will prescribe tasks 
for it during the barrage prior to H hour. 

“The following are suitable tasks for a machine 
gun company of an assault battalion: 

“ (1) To support the assault companies. 

“ (2) To protect the flank of the attack. 

“ (3) To occupy an interval in the line. 

“(4) To assist in consolidating the captured 
ground. 

“ (5) To assist in resuming the attack. 

“ Orders .—The orders of Major X for the use of 
the machine guns should be clear and concise and 
should assign definite tasks to them. The orders, 
prior to attack, should assign the machine guns a 
definite place in the formation and should give them 
the mission of supporting the infantry by fire. The 
control of the machine guns should be exercised, as 
far as possible, through the commanding officer of 
the machine gun company. Platoons should be as¬ 
signed to support rifle companies, but should not be 
placed under the command of rifle company com- 


146 


Terrain Exercises 

manders without there are exceptional reasons for 
so ordering. 

“Formation .—Generally the formation of a ma- 
chine gun company supporting an infantry battalion 
will be with one platoon on either flank supporting 

e two assaulting companies. As to whether or not 
the platoons should be placed in rear of the assault 
companies or in rear of the reserve company depends 
upon conditions. If the conditions indicate the 
piobable early use of machine guns and the ground 
is favorable for their use, they should be placed in 
rear of the assault companies. On the other hand, if 
their use appears improbable, or the ground is un¬ 
favorable for overhead fire, they should be placed in 
rear of the reserve company, where they can use their 
carts as long as possible. The formation within the 
platoon conforms to the infantry with which it is ad- 
\ ancing. The usual formations will be: when dis¬ 
mounted, line of squad columns or line of skirmish- 
ers; when mounted, column of squads. The purpose 
o± the formation taken should be to make it difficult 
tor the enemy to distinguish the machine guns from 
the infantry. 

Communication .—Where conditions permit, the 
commanding officer of the machine gun company will 
be with the battalion commander. However, the cap- 
tam must not let this consideration interfere with the 
efficient command of his company. Where the cap¬ 
tain does not remain with the major he will maintain 
contact with him by means of two runners from the 
machine gun company. 

Are there any questions ? ” , 


M. G. Company in Attack 147 

Procedure 

The Director will endeavor to answer any questions 
that may be asked by members of the class. 

After all questions have been cleared up the Di¬ 
rector will hand a copy of the problem to each mem¬ 
ber of the class. A few minutes will be allowed to 
read over the problem. 

Uie Director: ‘ 4 Please give me your attention 
while we go over the problem/ ’ 

The Director reads the problem aloud, pointing 
out the features of the landscape that are referred 
to in the problem. 

The Director then calls upon one or more mem¬ 
bers of the class to explain the problem. He clears 
up any point that does not appear plain to all and 
satisfies himself that all members of the class un¬ 
derstand the situation and what is required of them. 

Solution 

The Director: “Captain Smith, we shall assume 
that you are commanding the battalion and that Cap¬ 
tain M, the commanding officer of the machine gun 
company, is wth you. What would you do when you 
received the messages from your assault compa¬ 
nies V 7 

Captain Smith: “I would send for all of the cap¬ 
tains to report to me at once, so that I could issue my 
orders. * ’ 

The Director: “The captains of the two assault 
companies are engaged with the enemy, and it is most 
essential that they remain in immediate command of 
their companies. The captain of the reserve com¬ 
pany is at some distance from Major X. While it 


148 


Terrain Exercises 


is extremely desirable to issue one complete verbal 
order to the battalion so that any misunderstanding 
can be cleared up, it is not practicable to issue such 
an order in this case. Captain Scott, what would 
you do?” 

Captain Scott: “I would take a look at the posi¬ 
tions of the right assault company, the machine gun 
company, and the terrain, to determine whether it 
would be possible to support the assaulting company 
by overhead machine gun fire. I see that there is an 
excellent position for the machine guns and howitzer 
platoon. The commanding officers of these organi¬ 
zations are with me, so I at once give them the fol¬ 
lowing verbal orders: 

“Company - has encountered heavy fire from ( t ). 

It will attack at (u) by building up a firing line at (v), 
and having a platoon attack in the direction of ( w ). A 
red rocket from this platoon will indicate the beginning 
of the attack. 

“The Stokes mortar will lay down a barrage in front 
of the platoon, advancing in the direction of ( w ). The 
one pounder will be in readiness to engage any hostile ma¬ 
chine guns that open fire. 

“The machine guns will open fire from this hill at ( u ), 
covering the enemy’s position at (£). 

“Battalion ammunition point 500 yards east of this 
point in edge of woods. 

“I shall remain here.” 

The Director: “That is an excellent order. It 
shows that you understand that Major X should first 
attempt to give assistance by the use of his machine 
guns and auxiliary weapons and not by the use of his 



149 


M - Company in Attack 

reserve. The reserve company should not be em- 
p oyed as long as the assaulting companies can over¬ 
come the resistance with the assistance of the ma¬ 
chine guns and auxiliary weapons. Fire power 
should be made to take the place of man-power to the 
gieatest extent that is practicable. You have also 
given an excellent example of the proper coordina¬ 
tion of the machine guns and Stokes mortar. The 
ground in the direction of (w) is such that the ma¬ 
chine guns could not effectively support the platoon 
advancing in that direction. The Stokes mortar, 
however, can search this ground and provide cover¬ 
ing fire for the platoon. Your ordering a red rocket 
to be fired by the platoon advancing in the direction 
°f (w) shows that you understand the necessity for 
synchronizing the launching of the attack and the 
opening of fire by the machine guns and auxiliary 
weapons. However, the steps that you have taken 
are not adequate to secure this. You have failed to 
notify the commanding officer of the right assault 
company of the time that the machine guns will open 
fire and have not directed him to have his platoon 
fire a red rocket at the beginning of its attack. 

u Captain Howe, tell us how you would notify the 
commanding officer of the assault companies of your 
plans. ” 

Captain Howe: U I would send a written message 
by a runner as follows: 

“Begin your attack at (u). The machine guns will 
open fire from (s) at (n). The Stokes mortar will open 
fire in the direction of (w) at (u) and will lift their fire 


150 


Terrain Exercises 


100 yards in two minutes for six minutes. The one- 
pounders will fire on hostile machine guns. 

“Your platoon, advancing in the direction of ( w), will 
fire a red rocket as a signal that it is leaving its cover and 
beginning the attack. 

“Battalion ammunition point in edge of woods 500 east 
of (s). 

“I shall remain here.” 


Machine Gun Co. Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Make copies of the problems and the situation, one for each 

member of the class. 

2. Conduct the class to the point where the battalion commander 

receives the messages from his assault companies. 

3. Make a short talk on the employment of machine guns on 

the offensive: (a) tasks of machine guns in general on the 
offensive. ( b ) Tasks of a machine gun company of an 
assault battalion, (c) Orders of the battalion commander 
to the machine gun company. ( d ) Formation of the ma¬ 
chine gun company. ( e ) Communications. 

4. Distribute the sheets bearing problem and situation No. 1. 

5. Read problem and question members of the class on the tac¬ 

tical situation. 

6. Take up the solution of the problem: Action of Major X; 

Orders actually issued by Major X. 

7. Explanation by the director of the importance of using fire 

power, and of the necessity for coordination between the 
rifle companies and the machine guns. 

8. May have members of the class write out orders of the bat¬ 

talion commander. 


Explanation 

The Director : <k In the situation just completed we 
have considered the employment of machine guns 
from the point of view of the commander who has the 
responsibility for the coordination of the rifle com¬ 
panies and the machine gun company and for the ap- 



M. G. Company in Attack 151 

plication of fire power to save man-power wherever 
it is practicable. In the next situation we shall take 
+? ^ inetliocis of applying this fire power to support 

e rifle companies. These are technical questions 
entirely within the province of the machine gun offi¬ 
cer. In the formation the battalion commander des¬ 
ignates the position of the machine gun company 
with reference to the rifle companies; the machine 
gmi company commander determines the formation 
within his company. Ordinarily the company com¬ 
mander will determine whether the guns will go for¬ 
ward on carts and when it will be necessary to aban¬ 
don the carts. The firing position may be designated 
by the battalion commander, or it may be left to the 
selection of the machine gun company commander. 
The manner of occupation of the position is decided 
upon by the machine gun officer. The class of fire 
to be delivered is a question for the decision of ma¬ 
chine gun officers or non-commissioned officers. The 
situation may be such as to require the sections or 
platoons to employ different classes of fire. The con¬ 
centration of the fire of his platoons is a function of 
the machine gun company commander. In the ab¬ 
sence of orders from the battalion commander, the 
company commander will determine whether the fire 
of the company will be distributed over the front of 
the whole battalion or whether it will be concentrated 
upon a portion of the front. The method of advance 
from one firing position to another will be deter¬ 
mined by the company or platoon commander. 
Where the company is employed as a whole the ad¬ 
vance may be by platoon. As a rule, however, the 
platoons will advance by alternate sections so that a 


152 


Terrain Exercises 


Hachine cun company in attack - 


ASSAULT RIFLE COMPANY 


T 


'to Qtn.L CO- U<2.ki 
rcon n.a. dl 
UOS.P. ASCNT 
i fiunrtto/s 

"T“ 


ONE FORMATION - OTHERS Mi BE USES 


ASSAULT RIFLE COMPANY 


1 


'To 


aunt co. WGR.S. 

fflon H 6 PL hOA». 
i coap.* AGirti 
t RUNNtRB 


MACHINE. GUN PLATOON -w S6 NtN 




‘ r. * sun on 



iSNCM 


M C PLATOON AMMUNITION point 

TRCn PLHCJlt, 

LIFT SfCTION P.tGHT BTCTlON 



3 o? 

■- 

— 

— 


-I 

■ 


rqjrii 

NO 10 

NOO 

N$lO 

NO 9 

;-C l* 

09 

L*<r 

CMT 








MOVIS BY BOUNDS TCOM ONI COv^ft'O 

position to anoihlr. 



1Q>T1CER~ HACHINc. GUN PLATOON — Sd'hHx"* 


AnrVJMITION CARRIES 

•T SQUAB-BY M*nO • It »b«tS 
ZliO (A? < /vn»0*0 

BY EACH CON CAR? • 3 04M* 
1230 K£>u**Ob 

tl EACH A MM CART-I? BOX'S 
i'-OO QftMNBB 
^OTAL f-Ov »*5 *» 6 BC*l 5 

-fc-CPO 


I - 



a 

t 

T 

I 

I 

• 


platoon "Ann. point" 

i runner 

-pcinTcn CtA) N 0N s “ rLAnt1 

* »« SOl-AS-lft* <Aftf.|A(tn t< ttT 

JS. 1 3 t u H .? tc,ION ‘ in4CA ' :T1 *^ *»YSw» 

T^tACW Pl - 4 rt c. carts - A Anri. CAC.1^. 
tACH MA CART - t BRtvCR “I nvjLt* 

.. _i water. &c*ls — 5 Ann .boxes 
*° ** l driver - i mull* 

2 V- ATt R. BOXES -ll Ann.BOXES 


J or, ,CEk-S — M.G CCr.FAMf Hois. ~;4 nfKi 

1 captain— c cr.U, co. 
l-ixc UCUTENANT-RLC0F7 
1 FIRST SERGEANT- . 

1 SERGEANT oicO.HAitt.KcF 
1 SIRCEANT - SIC .‘Uu 

I CORPORAL-SU'jNAL 

EbUCLERS ‘ 

l con Pan y runners 

NoTt>n c company conoa 

USUALLY WITH BN. 
COr.nA^DER., AND V/HLN 

absent leavl* a 

RE. PRC JEN tat? VC WITH 
bN. COMM AND EQ.. 

riiort each n o,. 

PLATOON HGRS. nsi 7iNC.fi 


+J 


TO bN HORS. 
fftOrt M C CO 
HQA.S - - 
i R.UNNUS 


lb REQIMtNTAL 
M.S. OFFICER. 
r&on n a co. hoas. 


< RUNNER. 

/ 


r 

/ 

• 

# 

# 


RESERVE. \RIFLE COMPANY 

v 


REAR ECHELON 



f aonn.c conPANY m^rs 

-istlt. •END in command 

ALL TROOPS 
.War. Echelon n.c co.) 

f •A* 7 k£P£ > . , 53 r znt<MAN ' c » 

I pve/tailoro' ) ) t&PtAcintiit 

i COBBLER. - EftUR NER-S 
• TRANSPORTATION 
tROH SERVICE CO‘- I ROLLING 

rntHtH -1 escort 

I BAT ION CRT - I CSRT t WATER’ 


rl R.TRAIN -SntN 
I STABLE 8<VT. 

( HORSE-SHOER 
I SAfOLER. 

I noTORcrcu»T 
I stable ORPIRLY 


BN . AMMUNITION POINT 

FROI1 SERVICE CO. TOR II 6 CO 

tconasT wacons- 462 oo 
. - SO66 tms. 
PISTOL Ann .-(NOTE-- 

I2£ L o?£ io,ood res. n c 

AMM. PERSauAS IN COnbAt 

WAGONS AMP r, C. x A_nrr 








































































































153 


M. G. Company in Attack 

rifle company will never be without support. The 
duty of maintaining the ammunition supply from 
the battalion ammunition point forward to the guns 
devolves upon the machine gun captain. The ma¬ 
chine gun company is responsible for communication 
forward to the assault companies and to the battalion 
commander. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Director passes out the papers containing 
Special Situation No. 2, reads the situation aloud and 
calls upon one or more members of the class to ex¬ 
plain it. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

This consists of copies of the orders of Major X 
to the commanding officers of the machine gun com¬ 
pany and howitzer platoon as given by Captain 
Scott, and of the message to the commanding officer 
of the right assault company is given by Captain 
Howe. 

Required: 

The orders actually issued by the commanding of ¬ 
ficer of the machine gun company. 

Solution 

The Director: “ Captain Jones, what is the first de¬ 
cision that Captain M must make when he receives 
the order of Major X¥” 

Captain Jones: “He must decide whether he will 
employ the whole company to support the right as¬ 
sault company or only the platoon which had been 
directed to support this company at the beginning of 
the fight. Major X has not indicated whether the 


154 


Terrain Exercises 


whole company will be employed, so Captain M must 
make this decision. The left assault company may 
encounter more stubborn resistance, so I should em¬ 
ploy only the right platoon. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Captain Brown, what do you think 
about that?” 


Captain Brown: “I think he should employ the 
whole company. Concentration of the fire of the pla¬ 
toons on points that are holding up the battalion is 
one of the duties of the captain. The left assault 
company is continuing to move forward and does not 
need the support of the left platoon so it should be 
used to help advance the right assault company, 
ihere is an excellent firing position directly in its 
n ™ 0± a< tvance and it can be switched to the support 
ot the left assault company at any time that it be¬ 
comes necessary. If the only firing position avail¬ 
able were such that the platoon could not support 

ie advance of the left assault company, if support 
weie needed, and the position were so situated as to 
cause the left platoon to deviate greatly from its line 
of advance, the case would be different. In that situ- 
a ion I think the left platoon should continue its ad- 
vance m rear of the left assault company with the 

little °later f ” bringing flanking fire on the enemy a 

n T ! l % Di ?' ect( Z : “ Captain Burt, we shall assume 
that Captain M decides to employ both platoons to 

support the right assault company. What does he 
do nextr ’ 

Captain Burt: “He would send the buglers to have 
the platoon leaders report to him in advance of their 
platoons and would direct the reconnaissance officer 


155 


M. G. Company in Attack 

to select the firing positions for the two platoons and 
obtain the ranges.” 

The Director: “The captain has a company head- 
quaiteis to assist him in commanding the company 
and the use that the captain makes of this headquar¬ 
ters is a sure indication of the efficiency of the com¬ 
pany. It is impossible for the captain to command 
the company by himself and attend to all details. 
Part of this headquarters detail is mounted. The 
buglers and reconnaissance officer have horses. By 
having the platoon leaders precede their platoons 
they can receive their orders before the platoons ar¬ 
rive and be ready to move into position without delay. 
When the buglers reach the platoons they would 
turn over their horses to the platoon leaders and 
would remain with the platoons to guide them to 
their firing positions. The reconnaissance sergeant 
would assist the reconnaissance officer by taking the 
ranges as soon as the positions had been selected. 

“ Captain Smith, where would you select the posi¬ 
tions and what frontage would you assign to a pla¬ 
toon?” 

Captain Smith: “I would assign positions at the 
crest so that the guns could use direct overhead fire. 
The position should be such that the muzzles of the 
guns would be just over the crest. In that way the 
gunners will have the maximum amount of protec¬ 
tion consistent with direct fire. The distance be¬ 
tween guns should be not less than 20 yards, and pre¬ 
ferably more. I would assign the right half of the 
position to the right platoon and the left half to the 
left platoon. This will allow a little distance be- 


156 


Terrain Exercises 


tween platoons so that the guns will not make such a 
conspicuous target.’’ 

The Director: “I wish to emphasize the fact that 
you must select a position where the guns can employ 
direct fire. Indirect fire is thoroughly practicable 
in the beginning of a prepared attack or on the re¬ 
sumption of an attack that has been stopped for 
several hours. Often it is the only kind of fire that 
can be employed. However, considerable time is 
necessary to prepare for indirect fire, and this situa¬ 
tion does not permit of the delay necessary to pre¬ 
pare for indirect fire. Direct fire is also more effec¬ 
tive and should be employed whenever possible. It 
seldom will be advisable for a machine gun company 
of an assault battalion to use indirect fire. There is 
a distinct advantage in having an elevated firing posi¬ 
tion as the guns are able to give support to the rifle 
companies until they approach more closely to the 
target. 

“Captain Jones, what assignment of targets would 
you make?” 

Captain Jones: “I would assign a portion of the 
target to each platoon. The whole target could be 
assigned to each platoon which would permit an en¬ 
tire platoon to advance to a new firing position, while 
the other covered the entire target. However, any 
advance before the resistance is overcome would 
probably be by section and not by platoon ; so there is 
no advantage in giving each platoon the whole target. 
A gunner can fire more effectively on a narrow target 
where it is not necessary to traverse so much.” 

The Director: ‘‘ Captain Howe, would you make 


M. G. Company in Attack 


157 


any provision for lifting your fire as the infantry ap¬ 
proaches the target?’’ 

Captain Howe: “I would leave that to the platoon 
commanders. The rate of advance may be different 
at different parts of the line so that some guns may 
continue firing safely after others are forced to stop. 
I would want every gun to fire as long as the safety 
of the infantry would permit.” 

The Director: “Captain Burt, what provision 
would you make for opening fire?” 

Captain Burt: “I would have the platoon leaders 
signal me when they were ready and open fire on my 
signal. The positions of the platoons are plainly 
visible from my position. Since it has been ordered 
that fire will open at a definite time I think it better 
to depend on one watch than to take a chance of the 
platoons opening a few seconds apart.” 

The Director: “All of the doubtful points have 
been cleared up. Assuming that you would do what 
it has been decided that Captain M should do, I want- 
each of you to write out the complete fire order of 
Captain M. It is understood, of course, that Cap¬ 
tain M would give his order verbally, but it is desired 
to have you write out this order, so that the form of 
the order can be examined more carefully. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

After the solutions have been written, the Director 
has one or more members of the class comment on 
the solution of other members. The Director then 
distributes the sheets containing Situation No. 3, 
which is the fire order of Captain M. 


158 


Terrain Exercises 


Machine Gun Co. Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Explain the duties of the commanding officer of a machine 

gun company of an assault battalion. 

2. Pass out Situation No. 2. Have members of the class ex¬ 

plain their understanding of it. 

3. Have members of class discuss: Number of platoons to be 

employed. Use of headquarters detail. Selection of firing 
position. Use of direct fire. Assignment of targets. 
Opening fire. 

4. Have members of class write out fire order of Captain M. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

Captain M gave the following verbal orders to the 
platoon leaders at (s) : 

11 Company - has encountered heavy fire from ( t ). 

It will attack at ( u ) by building up a firing line at (u), 
and having a platoon attack in the direction of (w). A 
red rocket fired by this platoon will indicate the beginning 
of the attack. 

‘‘The Stokes mortar will lay down a barrage in front 
of the platoon advancing in the direction of (w). The one- 
pounder will engage any hostile machine guns. 

“This company supports the attack. 

“Firing positions: 

First platoon, the crest of this hill from 50 yards to 

the right of this point to 150 yards to the right of this 
point. 

“Second platoon, the crest of this hill from 50 yards to 
the left of this point to 150 yards to the left of this point. 

‘ ‘ Targets: 

“First platoon, right half of enemy’s position at ( t ). 
Second platoon, left half of enemy’s position at (£). 




159 


M. G. Company in Attack 

Platoon commanders will be responsible for lifting the 
fire so as not to endanger the infantry. 

Signal me when ready to open fire and open fire on my 
signal. 

Battalion ammunition point 500 yards east of here in 
edge of woods. Carts at disposal of platoon leaders. 

‘ ‘ I shall be on the left of the 1st platoon. ’ ’ 

Required: 

Actions of and orders actually issued by Lieuten¬ 
ant Y, commanding the 1st platoon. 

Solution 

The Director: “ Captain Smith, in general what as¬ 
sistants has the platoon leader and what are their 
duties 

Captain Smith: “The platoon sergeant takes com¬ 
mand of the platoon when the lieutenant goes for¬ 
ward, and obtains ranges after the selection of the 
firing position. - 

“The communication corporal, with the agents 
(normally two), maintains communication between 
the platoon and the rifle company which it is support¬ 
ing, and sends or signals to the platoon the informa¬ 
tion necessary to it. 

“The transport corporal moves guns and ammuni¬ 
tion carts forward in accordance with the movements 
of the platoon. Improvises packs when necessary. 
Provides for replenishment of ammunition and re¬ 
placements for killed or disabled mules. 

‘ ‘ There are seven privates in the headquarters de¬ 
tail. One of these is a bicyclist, two are agents to 
the rifle company, four runners maintain communi- 


160 


Terrain Exercises 


cation with machine gun company headquarters, with 
the sections and the platoon ammunition point.’’ 

The Director: “Captain Burt, what would Lieu¬ 
tenant Y do after receiving the order from Captain 
M?” 

Captain Burt: “He would proceed to the position 
assigned to his platoon. He would decide upon the 
positions to be assigned to his sections, and observe 
the enemy s position to determine upon an allotment 
of targets. As the platoon approached he would halt 
it well under the cover of the hill and signal the pla¬ 
toon sergeant and the section leaders forward. When 
they arrived he would issue his fire order.” 

The Director: “Captain Jones, give the fire order 
issued by Lieutenant Y. ’ ’ 

Captain Jones: “Lieutenant Y gives the following 
verbal order: 

“Company-has encountered heavy fire from (t). 

It will attack at ( u ) by building up a firing line at (u), 
and having a platoon attack in the direction of ( w ). A 

red rocket fired by that platoon will indicate the beginning 
of the attack. 

The Stokes mortars will lay down a barrage in front 
of the platoon advancing in the direction of (w). The 
one-pounder will engage hostile machine guns. 

This platoon and the remainder of our company sup¬ 
ports the attack. 

“Firing positions: 

First section to the right of this rock; 2nd section to 
the left. Mount your guns below the crest and drag them 
into position without disclosing your presence. 

‘ ‘ Targets: 


M. 6. Company in Attack 


161 


“First section, the woods on the right of the enemy’s 
position at (t). Range 1,300 to 1,400. Combined sights. 

“Second section, the ridge for 100 yards to the left of 
the woods. Range 1,300. 

“Section leaders will be responsible for lifting their fire 
on the approach of the infantry. 

“Rate of fire 200 for first minute, 150 thereafter. 

Signal me when ready. Open fire on my signal. 

“Platoon ammunition point 100 yards down the hill. 

“I shall remain here.” 

The Director: “Captain Howe, what do you think 
of telling the 1st section to use combined sights ? Ex¬ 
plain the use of combined sights.” 

Captain Howe: “The target undoubtedly calls for 
the use of combined sights. Whether it would be 
necessary for Lieutenant Y to direct the use of com¬ 
bined sights would depend on how well trained the 
section leader was. If I were at all doubtful I would 
order combined sights. 

“Combined sights is the method of engaging any 
required depth of ground by applying simultaneously 
overlapping zones of fire from two or more guns. 
The depth of the beaten zone is increased by ordering 
different elevations to be used by each gun. This 
type of fire is not necessary under 800 meters. When 
it is used, as many guns as possible should be employ¬ 
ed with 100 meters difference if the error in range 
finding is probably great, and with 50 meters differ¬ 
ence if the error is probably small. This kind of fire 
is used either to engage a target which is deeper than 
the effective beaten zone or against a small target 
when the range is not exactly known.” 


162 


Terrain Exercises 


The Director: “ Captain Burt, explain to the class 
how the section leader determines when the fire 
should be lifted. ’ ’ 

Captain Burt: “The section leader is equipped 
with a type EE field glass which has an inverted sight 
leaf in the field of view. The glass is used as follows: 

“Align the inverted sight scale so that the an¬ 
nounced range to the target will coincide with the 
target. 

“If the range to the target is 850 meters or less, 
note where the line in the graticule representing 1,350 
meters cuts the landscape. 

“If the range to the target is 850 meters or over, 
add 500 meters to the range to the target, and locate 
the point on the landscape that is cut by this line. 

“If the point located on the landscape is at or above 
the feet of our own troops, it will be safe to fire. 

“The gunner in a similar manner determines when 
it is safe to fire by means of his rear sight so there is 
always a double check/ ’ 

The Director ; ‘ i Captain Smith, do you see any pur¬ 
pose in ordering a rate of fire of 200 for the first 
minute ? ’ ’ 

Captain Smith: “Yes, sir, it is important to place 
as great a volume of fire as possible on the enemy at 
the beginning of the attack. However, the guns can¬ 
not maintain such a rate for but a few minutes, so it 
is necessary to lower it. A rate of 125 to 150 could be 
maintained for 20 or 30 minutes, so it is safe to order 
that.’ ’ 

The Director: “Captain Jones, what do you mean 
by the ammunition point V 9 

Captain Jones: u The machine gun platoon ammu- 


163 


M. G. Company in Attack 

nition point consists of the transport corporal, one 
runner, and the four ammunition carts and four 
machii e gun carts with their drivers. This ammu¬ 
nition point is responsible for maintaining the am¬ 
munition supply from the carts forward to the guns . 99 

. The Director: “You are correct about the compo¬ 
sition of the ammunition point, but not about its 
duties. Its function is to maintain a supply of am¬ 
munition in the carts sufficiently close to the guns 
that it can be gotten forward by the ammunition car- 
liers, but it is not responsible for getting the ammu¬ 
nition forward. Numbers 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of each 
squad are responsible for getting the ammunition 
forward from the carts to the guns. The transport 
corporal moves the carts forward from one covered 
position to another by bounds and keeps the platoon 
leader informed of the location of the carts. That is 
the reason a runner is assigned to the point. The 
corporal is responsible for getting the ammunition 
forward from the combat wagons. Normally this will 
will be done by sending the ammunition carts to the 
battalion ammunition point. The machine gun carts 
should be kept filled at all times, if possible, and at 
the platoon ammunition point ready to move for¬ 
ward to the guns. 

“Captain Brown, what do you think about Lieu¬ 
tenant Y not ordering emplacements and cover 
trenches to be constructed V 9 

Captain Brown: “If there is time before opening 
fire the section leader should construct them without 
any orders. However, I believe it is always safer to 
order the construction. In this case the time is 
limited, so it would be best to get the guns into posi- 


164 


Terrain Exercises 


tion and ready to open fire and then begin construc¬ 
tion. Great caution would have to be used, however, 
in the construction as emplacements not properly con¬ 
structed would show up very distinctly on the crest 
and would be a source of danger. Cover trenches be¬ 
hind the trench would not be visible and would be a 
great protection for ammunition carriers.’’ 

The Director: u Captain Howe, no mention was 
made in the order of communications, what do you 
think of that?” 

Captain Howe: “It is unnecessary if the platoon 
is trained properly. It becomes a matter of routine, 
and instructions are given only if something out of 
the ordinary is required.” 


Machine Gun Co. Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1. Pass out Situation No. 3. Have members of the class explain 

their understanding of it. 

2. Have members of the class discuss: Duties of the members 

of the platoon headquarters detail. Action of Lieutenant 
Y prior to the issue of the fire order. 

3. Have a member of the class give the fire order issued by 

Lieutenant Y. 

4. Have members of the class discuss: Combined sights. Safety 

angles for direct overhead fire. Rates of fire. The pla¬ 
toon ammunition point. Construction of emplacements and 
cover trenches. Communications. 


Procedure 

The Director passes out the papers containing 
Special Situation No. 4, reads the situation aloud and 
calls upon one or more members of the class to give 
their understanding of it. 



M. G. Company in Attack 


165 


The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

A few minutes after fire was opened by the machine 
guns, the enemy gave way, and Company- ad¬ 

vanced and disappeared over the ridge at ( t ) for¬ 
merly held by the enemy. The left assault company 

(Company-) has continued to make progress and 

is slightly in advance of the right assault company. 

Required: 

Orders as actually issued by Captain M, command¬ 
ing the machine gun company. 

Explanation 

The Director: “The situation is one in which it 
would be possible for the battalion commander to 
give orders to the machine gun company, but would 
be necessary only in case that the company com¬ 
mander was incompetent. The captain of a company 
must not expect to receive orders from the major at 
every new phase of the situation. The major is prob¬ 
ably eager to get forward to (t) to see for himself 
what the situation is and has no time to tell Captain 
M just what he shall do with his company. 

“Captain Smith, assuming you are Captain M, 
what orders would you give to the company V’ 

Captain Smith: “I would send the following ver¬ 
bal message to the platoon commanders: 

“ ‘Advance your platoon by section to the position at 
(*).” 

The Director: “If the enemy were still resisting, 
advancing the platoons by alternate sections would 
be the normal procedure. However, since the resist- 




166 


Terrain Exercises 


ance of the enemy has temporarily ceased and he has 
passed over the ridge where he cannot at present fire 
on the machine gun company, Captain M has a little 
more choice in the formation that he will employ in 
advancing the company. It is perfectly practicable 
to advance by platoon, and there is some advantage 
in so doing as it will leave th platoon commanders in 
direct touch with their whole platoons. The left as¬ 
sault company is slightly in advance of the right, so 
it would be better to send the left platoon forward to 
the position at (t) and have the right platoon go for¬ 
ward just as soon as the left platoon has reached 
( 0 . 

“ Captain Jones, what do you think of immediately 
sending the whole company forward V J 

Captain Jones: “It would not be safe. It is too 
early to know whether the enemy will counter-attack. 
If he should counter-attack and drive the infantry 
out of the position at ( t ), part of the machine guns 
should be in position to support the infantry. As 
soon as it appears that the attack of the infantry has 
succeeded, part of the guns must be sent forward to 
give the infantry closer support, but some guns must 
be retained in position until danger of a counter-at¬ 
tack has passed.’’ 

The Director: “Captain Burt, would you give the 
platoon leaders any additional instructions?” 

Captain Burt: “Yes, sir; I would instruct them to 
replenish their ammunition before sending their am¬ 
munition carts forward. They probably would do 
this any way, but I would play safe and order it. 
There has not been a long period of firing so that one 
cart from each section probably would be all that it 


M. G. Company in Attack 167 

would be necessary to send to the rear. This would 
leave plenty of ammunition with the guns and get ad¬ 
ditional ammunition forward much sooner than if 
the ammunition carts were permitted to advance 
without refilling. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Captain Howe, would you give any 
further instructions to the platoon leaders 7 ’ ’ 

Captain Howe: “Yes, sir; I would direct them to 
move forward with the guns on carts. The carts have 
been placed at the disposal of the platoon leaders so 
they should employ them without instructions, as 
there is no danger in so doing. However, the captain 
usually determines when the guns shall be moved for¬ 
ward by hand, so I think it is safer to caution them 
to use their carts. There is a great tendency to con¬ 
tinue advancing the guns by hand for the rest of the 
fight when it has once become necessary to dismount 
them from the carts . 9 9 

The Director: “Captain Smith, give the complete 
messages that should be sent to the platoon leaders to 
carry out the decisions we have made. ? 9 

Captain Smith: ‘ ‘ Captain M would send the follow¬ 
ing verbal messages: 

“To the commander of the 2nd platoon: 

“ ‘Move forward at once with guns on carts to the po¬ 
sition from which the enemy has just been driven. Re¬ 
plenish ammunition.’ 

“To commander of 1st platoon: 

“ ‘Replenish your ammunition. Remain in position 
until 2nd platoon reaches position from which enemy has 
just been driven and then move forward with guns on 
carts.’ ” 


168 


Terrain Exercises 


The Director: “We have covered the different sit¬ 
uations that are likely to occur in an attack with the 
exception of the opening phases of a prepared attack 
and the consolidation. The former is most fre¬ 
quently an indirect fire problem and should be treated 
as a separate exercise. The latter can be handled best 
as the first phase of a battalion on the defensive. * 1 


Machine Gun Co. 


Director’s Kay 


Card No. 4 


1* Pass .out Situation No. 4. Have members of the class ex¬ 
plain their understanding of it. 

2. Explain the responsibility of the captain for acting on his 
own initiative in the absence of orders from the major. 

6. Have a member of the class give the orders issued by Cap¬ 
tain M. J y 


4. Have members of the class discuss: Different methods of ad¬ 

vancing the company. Necessity for retaining some guns 
m position to meet counter-attack. Replenishment of am¬ 
munition. Use of carts. 

5. Concluding statement by the Director. 



Terrain Exercise No. 5. 

An Advance Guard 

The Problem 

General Situation: 

The (a) forms the boundary between hostile states. 
A Blue brigade is marching towards ( b ). Small Red 
forces are reported in the direction of (c). 

Special Situation—Blue: 

A (d) flank guard, consisting of the (e) battalion 
(/) infantry, halts for the night at ( g ). 

At ( h ) (date) Company A, which has been desig¬ 
nated to form the advance guard, is assembled at ( i ). 

Based on the orders of the battalion commander, 
Captain A, commanding, issues the following verbal 
orders to his assembled officers and non-commissioned 
officers: 

“ Small Red forces are reported in the direction of (c). 
Our brigade marches towards ( b) today by the (j)—(&) — 
(l ) road. Our battalion continues its mission as a (d) flank 
guard. Our main body follows the advance guard at a 
distance of about 500 yards. 

“This company forms the advance guard. 

“Lieutenant W, with the first platoon, will form the 
advance party. March at O) o’clock by the (n )— (o) 
road. 

“The rest of the company will form the support and 
follow the advance party at a distance of about 400 yards. 

“Corporal White (signalman) watch for signals from 
the main body. 


169 


170 


Terrain Exercises 


“The rolling kitchen will join the battalion train. 

“I will march with the support.” 

(Note.—Company A is organized in accordance with Table of 
Organization 28-W. See Appendix 1.) 

Explanation of Symbols 

(a) In designating the boundary line, some natural 
topographical or geographical feature should be 
selected, such as a river, creek, canal, crest of ridges, 
etc. In this problem the boundary may be a number 
of miles from the point where the problem starts and 
in the direction in which the march is to be made. 

(&) A point a march away in the direction of the 
enemy. 

( c ) The locality where the enemy is reported to be. 
This should be beyond the border in enemy territory. 

(d) Indicate whether the battalion is a right or left 
flank guard. For example: The Blue brigade is 
marching north on a certain road. The battalion is 
marching north on a road to the west of that on which 
the brigade is marching—the battalion would be a 
left flank guard. 

(e) Designate as one of the battalions of the regi¬ 
ment to which the officers participating belong or are 
attached. 

(/) See next above. Example “A left flank guard, 
consisting of the 1st Battalion, 305th Infantry.” 

(d) A point in the vicinity of where the terrain 
exercise is to start. 

(h) Indicate the hour. Make it about 20 minutes 
before the time designated for the advance £uard to 
start the march. 

O') The point where the terrain exercise is to be¬ 
gin. 


171 


Advance Guard 


0)— (k)~(l) A road is designated in field orders 
by naming two or more places located on it. Ex- 

FOUR POINT—EMMITSBURG— 
1KPLAY road.” In this case indicate in defi¬ 
nite terms the road that the main body of the brigade 
is to march on. 

(m) Designate the hour of marching of the ad¬ 
vance guard. 

( ® ee rem arks pertaining to the symbol 

\ J) (k) —( l ). 

The Problem 

Situation No. 1. 


You, Lieutenant W, commanding the first platoon, 
have been detailed to form the advance party. It is 
now (h). Your platoon is formed here. 

Required: 

The action that you, Lieutenant W, take, and the 
orders you issue to your platoon. 


Procedure 

The members of the class are assembled at ( g ) on 
the (n o ) road (see explanation of symbols), where 
it is intended that the advance guard formation is to 
be taken up. 

The Director: “Before taking up the problem for 
solution, I want to make a few remarks on the for¬ 
mation of a column of troops on the march and to re¬ 
view briefly the formation and duties of an advance 
guard.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “A column of troops on the march 
consists of a main body and such covering detach- 


172 


Terrain Exercises 


ments as may be necessary. These covering detach¬ 
ments are denominated advance guards, rear guards 
and flank guards. They are thrown out for the pur¬ 
pose of gaining information of the enemy, to protect 
the main body from surprise, and to hold off the 
enemy a sufficient length of time for the main body 
to prepare for action. 

“The covering detachment that goes ahead of and 
protects the march of a marching column is called an 
‘ advance guard/ It consists of a series of detach¬ 
ments or groups increasing progressively in strength 
from head to rear, each being charged with the pro¬ 
tection of the group immediately following it from 

surprise and thus gaining time for the latter to get 
ready to fight. 

“Formation .—The advance guard is normally di¬ 
vided into a support and a reserve. From the sup¬ 
port, an advance party is sent to the front a few hun¬ 
dred yards, and from this advance party a small 
patrol, technically called a 'point,’ is sent out. From 
time to time as the occasion demands, patrols are sent 
out to the right and left. These are called 'flankers.’ 

“When the advance guard consists of a small force 
the reserve is omitted and we have only a support, 
from which an advance party is sent out. 

“In the problem we have an advance guard com¬ 
posed of one rifle company of infantry. What is the 
proper formation'? 

The advance party will consist of one platoon, 
fiom which a point of one squad will be sent out to 
the front, a distance of about 200 yards. The re- 
maindei of the company ’will constitute the support 


Advance Guard 


173 


and follow the advance party at a distance of about 
400 yards. 

We do away with a reserve. It would divide the 
company into too many component parts and make 
control just that much more difficult. 

^ That is what may be termed the usual formation. 
Conditions may be such that it would be desirable to 
make the advance party stronger; as where the enemy 
habitually opposes us with relatively small detach¬ 
ments and we want to run over them and drive them 
off without bringing the support into action. 

4 ‘In any case you must have a knowledge of the 
functions of an advance guard. You must know the 
mission and be able to size up the situation of the par¬ 
ticular case. You must then use your plain common- 
sense in meeting the situations as they develop. 

“ Duties .—Now let us see what the duties of the 
advance guard are: 

“1. To prevent the main body of our troops from 
being fired into while they are in a formation that 
prevents them from defending themselves. You can 
imagine what would happen if an effective fire were 
suddenly poured into the company while it is march¬ 
ing in column of squads on the road. 

“2. To gain information of the enemy by sending 
out detachments to the front and flanks at such points 
as may be necessary. Here is an important thing to 
remember. Under the conditions of modern war¬ 
fare, the haphazard method of sending out flanking 
patrols has every chance of resulting in disaster. 
These men never get back in time to be of use to you 
when you need them. Much of this patrolling and 
marching of flanking detachments across country is 


174 


Terrain Exercises 


exhausting and wears out your troops. It should be 
reduced to the minimum. 

o. To push back small parties of the enemy. The 
progress of the main body must not be arrested by 
small, comparatively insignificant detachments of 
the enemy. It is the duty of the advance guard to 
brush them aside. How many times at maneuvers 
have you seen a skillfully handled patrol make a 
whole advance guard deploy ? It should have been 
swept away by the advance party. The idea is, that 
you simply have to keep pushing to the front until 
you really encounter something that will stop you. 

“4. To check the advance of the enemy in force 
long enough for the main body to prepare for action. 
When the enemy is met in sufficient force to warrant 
the employment of troops of the main body there is a 
certain process that the commander has to go through 
before he can get his troops in action. A reconnais¬ 
sance must be made to determine the strength and 
disposition of the enemy, for it would be folly to com¬ 
mit a force to action without knowing something of 
these elements. Then, too, the orders for the deploy¬ 
ment have to be issued and the deployment has to be 
effected. All of this takes a certain amount of time 
during which period the advance guard holds off the 
enemy. 

“5. To remove obstacles, repair the roads, and 
favor in every way the uninterrupted progress of the 
main body. 

These are the duties of the advance guard. These 
are the things that platoon, section and squad leaders 
must ever keep in mind when they are on advance 
guard duty. These are the things that we officers 


Advance Guard 


175 


must learn about in time of peace in order that we 
may do them as a matter of habit in time of actual 
service. 

u Distances .—The distances between the several 
elements of the advance guard are fixed by the gen¬ 
eral rule that ‘the element in front must be at such 
a distance that the next succeeding element will not 
be involved in a disaster to the former.’ 

“The point will be from 150 to 200 yards in ad¬ 
vance of the advance 
party. The latter will 
be from 300 to 400 
yards in front of the 
support and the main 
body will follow at a 
distance of from 400 
to 500 yards. It will 
thus be seen that the 
head of a battalion 
with one company as 
advance guard will be 
about 1,400 yards a- 
way from the enemy. 

This allows a mini¬ 
mum distance of 400 
yards from the lead¬ 
ing man of the point 
to the enemy. If a 
deployment becomes 
necessary, it can be 
made in comparative 
security. These dis¬ 
tances are not fixed. 



Formation of Advance Guard of One 
Company for a Battalion 




















176 


Terrain Exercises 


They are flexible. They may be increased or dimin¬ 
ished to meet the situation. When the advance 
guard commander prescribes distances between the 
several elements it is not to be taken that the exact 
distance will be maintained at all times. It is merely 
an indication of the approximate distances desired. 

“ Communication .—Communication between the 
several elements of the advance guard and with the 
main body is kept up by means of connecting files 
which march between them. They employ signals 
and act as runners when necessary. 

“Are there any questions'?” 

Procedure 

The Director will endeavor to answer any ques¬ 
tions that may be asked by members of the class. 

After all questions have been cleared up the Direc¬ 
tor will hand a copy of the problem to each member 
of the class. A few minutes are allowed for the class 
to read over the problem. 

The Director: “ Please give me your attention 
while we go over the problem.” 

The Director reads the problem aloud, each mem¬ 
ber of the class following from the copy in his pos¬ 
session. The direction of places mentioned are 
pointed out. 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, give a brief 
statement of the tactical situation, as you under¬ 
stand it.” 

Lieutenant Williams states his understanding of 
the tactical situation. As he proceeds the Director 
makes such explanations as may be desirable. One 
or more additional members of the class may be 


v 


Advance Guard 


177 


called upon to state their version of the tactical situ¬ 
ation. All of this is for the purpose of fixing the ele¬ 
ments of the problem firmly in the minds of the mem¬ 
bers of the class and prevent any subsequent misun¬ 
derstanding of them. 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, you note that 
the problem states that our battalion is a right (left) 
flank guard. Just what do you understand by that?” 

Captain Hastings: “Ordinarily the flanks of a col¬ 
umn on the march may be protected by small patrols 
sent out from the advance guard. There are, how¬ 
ever, occasions when patrols will not suffice and it is 
necessary to send out a stronger detachment, to march 
along a route essentially parallel to and abreast of 
the force. A detachment so sent out is called a flank 
guard. In this case our whole battalion is a flank 
guard sent out to protect the right (left) flank of our 
brigade in its march towards (&).” 

The Director: “What do you understand to be the 
duties of a flank guard?” 

Captain Hastings: “They are much the same as 
those of an advance guard, that is, to do everything 
possible to facilitate the uninterrupted progress of 
the main body. All other duties are incidental to 
this and all have this prime object in view.” 

The Director: “Very good. Are there any ques¬ 
tions at this time? Now I want each member of the 
class to consider himself as being Lieutenant W, com¬ 
manding the first platoon of Company A. Your 
platoon is right over there (pointing), formed up in 
line, at the right of the company. You, together 
with the other officers and noncommissioned officers 
of the company, have assembled here and have re- 


178 


Terrain Exercises 


ceived the verbal orders of the captain for the for¬ 
mation of the company as the advance guard of the 
battalion. You are now ready to return to your pla¬ 
toon. Just how are you going to do the job that has 
been assigned to you?” 

The Director will now conduct the class to the 
point where the first platoon is supposed to be. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, we will as¬ 
sume that you are commanding the platoon. Just 
how do you go about the task of getting started on 
the day’s work?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I should first see if all the 
men are present, and then I would inspect the platoon 
to make sure that everything is all right.” 

The Director: “The first part of your problem is 
simple. All you have to do is to glance down the 
ranks to determine whether every man is in his 
proper place. Let us assume that all are present. 
Now, with regard to the proposition of the inspec¬ 
tion. In campaign the platoon commander should 
inspect his platoon at reveille—check up the appear¬ 
ance of the men and note the condition of the arms 
and equipment. At this time he should take the 
steps necessary to remedy deficiences and make pro¬ 
vision for the evacuation of any man that is physi¬ 
cally unfit. This should be a matter of routine. 
Then, when the day’s work is to be started, there is 
no delay.” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I see the point and realize 
the necessity for the procedure you have outlined. 
There is one other point. When should the rifles be 
loaded?” 



Advance Guard 


179 


The Director: “Some advocate that the rifles 
should be loaded and the safety locks turned the 
‘Safe’ just after the inspection in the morning. I 
do not believe that to be the best procedure. It in¬ 
creases the chances for an accident. I would have 
the men load their rifles, in this case, just before 
starting to form the advance party. Let us assume 
that the platoon has been inspected at revielle and 
that all the men are in fit physical condition and 
ready for the work in hand. What is the first move 
you would make, Lieutenant Ralston?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “Well, sir, I would want to 
get the platoon a short distance away from the rest 
of the company. So the first thing I do is to march 
the platoon about 75 to 100 yards up the road.” 

The Director: “What is the idea?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “There is always more or less 
confusion around the company on an occasion of this 
kind, and I want to get my platoon off by themselves 
so they can give me their individed attention while I 
am issuing my orders and getting them all set for 
the work in hand.” 

The Director: “That seems to be a very good rea¬ 
son. Let us assume that you have moved the platoon 
100 yards away from the rest of the company. You 
are formed up in line. What are you going to do 
now?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would have the men load 
their rifles.” 

The Director: “All right; you have done that. 
Captain Harvey, what is the next step?” 

Captain Harvey: “I would take a few minutes to 
dope out the situation and determine what I am go¬ 
ing to do. ’ ’ 


180 


Terrain Exercises 


The Director: “That is time well spent. Now let 
us go through the procss you have just mentioned. 
What is the first thing you are to determine V 1 

Captain Harvey: “What is the mission of the pla¬ 
toon? It is to form the advance party. 7 7 

The Director: “What is the next step, Captain 
Hodges?” 

Captain Hodges: “To consider the enemy—where 
he is, what he is doing, and what he is likely to do. 
In this case the only information we have is that 
small forces of the enemy are reported in the direc¬ 
tion of (c). We have no information of his strength 
or composition or what he is doing. We must be pre¬ 
pared to meet him at any time and govern our action 
accordingly. ’ ’ 

The Director: “What is the next step, Captain 
Mason ? ’ ’ 

Captain Mason: “To consider our own supporting 
forces. We know that our brigade is to march 
towards (6) by the (j)—(ft)—(Z) road. That our 
battalion continues its mission as a right (left) flank 
guard. That our company, less this platoon, is the 
support, which follows us at a distance of about 400 
yards.” 

The Director: “What is the next step, Captain 
Jones?” 

Captain Jones: “We then consider our plans of 
action—what we are going to do. There is no infor¬ 
mation on which to base our plans very far ahead. 
We can only get the advance party into the most 
favorable formation and be prepared for eventuali¬ 
ties. TV^e will have a point, consisting of one squad, 
precede the advance party at about 200 yards. The 


Advance Guard 


181 


rest of the platoon will march in column of twos, a 
file on each side of the road. From this formation 
a rapid deployment can be made, and we are always 
ready to meet the enemy. Measures for local protec¬ 
tion will be taken as the march progresses.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, what is the next 
step in this process'?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “Based upon what has been 
said before we arrive at a decision as to what we are 
going to do. In this case it would be—To march at 
(m) o’clock by the ( n )—( o ) road as advance party 
of the advance guard. We then embody this decision 
in a field order and issue it verbally to the platoon.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “All of that which we have just dis¬ 
cussed is what we call the 'Estimate of the Situa¬ 
tion. ’ It is simply a sizing up of the tactical situa¬ 
tion in a logical and systematic manner. The com¬ 
mander of troops who fails to do this fails to do 
everything possible to promote the success of the 
military operation he is about to undertake—he does 
not take advantage of all the aids at his disposal. 
The commander who blunders into action without 
sizing up the situation as we have outlined here is 
doomed to failure and disaster. It may be an opera¬ 
tion in which there is little to consider—where there 
is little choice of methods—but you should religious¬ 
ly go through the process, even if only a few minutes 
of time are available. 

“At this point I want to invite your attention to 
the merits of the simple five-paragraph field order 
provided for in our Field Service Regulations. The 
elements of it are: 





182 


Terrain Exercises 


“Paragraph 1. Information of the enemy and our 
own troops. 

“Paragraph 2. The plan of the commander, stated 
in general terms. 

‘ ‘ Paragraph 3. Orders for the several elements of 
the command. 

“Paragraph 4. Administrative and communication 
arrangements. 

“Paragraph 5. The place where messages are to 
be sent, or where the commander will march. 

This form of field order has stood the test of time 
and, what is more to the point, it has proved to be a 
suitable and effective method of issuing orders in 
time of war. When we went to France we found the 
longwinded, highly detailed orders that were the 
development of years of trench warfare. No one 
read them and, if they did, they did not understand 
them. We used them in order to conform with re¬ 
quirements from higher headquarters. When we 
really got down to the business of fighting and had 
to pioduce results we fell back on our own simple 
five-paragraph order, and it met all the requirements. 
Get the elements of this order firmly fixed in your 
minds and follow them. They are applicable to any 
body of troops, large or small. 

“ The next point I want to bring out is the necessity 
for letting every man in the platoon know what the 
work for the day is to be. This information is im¬ 
parted to them in the form of a verbal order by the 
platoon commander, which embraces the points 
brought out in the ‘ Estimate of the Situation/ which 
we have just discussed. ” 


Advance Guard 


183 


Solution 

The Director: “ Captain Hall, based upon the deci¬ 
sion reached in our ‘Estimate of the Situation’ and 
the discussion prior thereto, state your solution of 
the problem in detail. ’ ’ 

Captain Hall: “I give the command: 1. Platoon, 
2. ATTENTION; then follow with: 1. With ball 
cartridges, 2. LOAD. After all pieces are loaded and 
locked, I give the command: 1. Order, 2. ARMS. I 
then give the command: AT EASE, and direct: ‘ Give 
me your attention.’ I then issue my order as fol¬ 
lows: 

“Small Red forces are reported in the direction of (c) 
(indicating the direction). Our brigade marches towards 

(&), by the (j) — (Jc )— (l) road, which is-miles to the 

- or here. Our battalion continues its mission as a 

right (left) flank guard. Our company forms the advance 
guard. The company, less this platoon, is the support and 
follows us at a distance of about 400 yards. 

“ ‘This platoon forms the advance party. 

“ ‘Sergeant Roberts (section leader, first section) with 
the first squad will form the point. March by that road 
(indicating the road). I will signal the direction as we go 
along. Precede the advance party by about 200 yards. 

“ ‘Private Allen (rifleman from front rank, second 
squad), act as connecting file between the point and ad¬ 
vance party. 

“ ‘The remainder of the platoon will march in column 
of twos, one file on each side of the road, at easy marching 
distances. 

“ ‘Corporal Howard (section guide, second section), 
watch for signals from the rear. 




184 


Terrain Exercises 


I will march at the head of the advance party. 

*You have about five minutes before the advance be¬ 
gins. Move out with the point, Sergeant Roberts, get your 
distance and formation and await my signal to start. 

“ ‘Remainder of the platoon REST.’ 

“When the time for starting arrives I will give 
the command: 1. Platoon, 2. ATTENTION; and then 
follow with: 1. Right, 2. FACE; then: 1. Forward, 2. 
MARCH, and direct: ‘ A file on each side of the road. ’ 
I will then signal the point: FORWARD MARCH.” 

The Director: “That is very good. Now I want 
each member of the class to write out the order of the 
platoon commander on his pad.” 

Procedure 

Each member of the class writes out the order of 
the advance party commander. When all have com¬ 
pleted this the Director collects the work and distrib¬ 
utes it, making sure that no member of the class re¬ 
ceives his own solution back again. 

One or more of the solutions are read aloud, and a 
discussion of any errors or points of importance is 
conducted. At the conclusion of this the Director 
inquires if there are any questions. He endeavors 
to answer any questions that may be asked, after 
which the class is ready to go ahead with the next 
situation. 


Advance Guard 


185 


Advance Guard Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Prepare copies of the problem and the situations, one for 

each member of the class. 

2. Conduct the class to the point on the road where it is in¬ 

tended that the advance guard formation is to be taken up. 

3. Make a short talk on the subject of advance guard duty: 

(a) Formation of a column of troops on the march. (6) 
Description of an advance guard, (c) Duties of advance 
guard: Security of main body; gain information; push 
back small parties of the enemy; check advance of enemy 
in force, clear road, etc. ( d) Distances, (e) Communi¬ 
cation. 

4. Distribute sheets bearing problem and Situation No. 1. 

5. Read problem and question members of class on tactical 

situation. 

6. Discuss flank guard. 

7. Take up solution of problem: Inspection of platoon; when 
to load pieces; get platoon away from company. 

8. Estimate of the Situation: Mission; enemy; own troops; 

plans of action; decision. 

9. Discussion of Field Orders. Information of enemy and own 

troops; plan of commander; tactical dispositions; adminis¬ 
trative arrangements; place of commander. 

10. Final solution of problem: Commands of platoon com¬ 

mander; orders of platoon commander; getting the platoon 
in march. 

11. Have members of class write out orders of the platoon com¬ 

mander. Collect solutions and redistribute them. Have 
several solutions read and discussed. 


Explanation 

The Director: “In our solution to Situation No. 1, 
Captain Hall, in giving the order of the platoon com¬ 
mander said: ‘ Sergeant Roberts, with the first sqaud, 
will form the point, etc.’ That was an eminently 
proper order. It did not go into details. He as¬ 
sumes that Sergeant Roberts is familiar with the 
methods of forming the point of an advance guard 
and conducting its operations. 

“It is a very simple matter for the platoon com- 



186 


Terrain Exercises 


mander to pass the order along to the sergeant in 
this manner. But unless the platoon commander 
knows how the work should be done he has no means 
of checking up and seeing to it that it is done 
properly. 

‘ ‘ While it is not contemplated that any member of 
this class will ever be called upon to conduct the oper¬ 
ations of the point of an advance guard, all should 
be familiar with what happens when he gives some¬ 
one else an order to do so.” 

Procedure 

The Director passes out the papers containing Sit¬ 
uation No. 2, reads the situation aloud and calls upon 
one or more members of the class to give their under¬ 
standing of it. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

You, Serg'eant Roberts, have been designated to 
command the point, consisting of the first squad. 
Your men have been turned over to you by the pla¬ 
toon commander. You have been ordered to move 
out and get your distance and formation. 

Required: 

What do you do? 

Procedure 

The Director: “Captain Sands, what is a point?” 

Captain Sands: “A point is an element of an ad¬ 
vance guard that procedes the advance party.” 

The Director: “That is right, and it is no more or 
less than a fighting patrol that is assigned a definite 
line of march. Its operations are conducted on that 


Advance Guard 


187 


basis. It can afford to be bold and aggressive be¬ 
cause the advance party is close at hand to back it 
up. What factors govern the formation of the point, 
Lieutenant Wallace 7 ’ ’ 

Lieuteant T V allace: “The point must have a for¬ 
mation that renders it the least vulnerable to hostile 
fire. This means dispersion. On the other hand, 
the dispersion should not be so great that the com¬ 
mander is not able to control its operations. I 
should say that a patrol formation, where the men 
march in pairs on opposite sides of the road, would 
be suitable.’’ 

The Director: “What should be the distances be¬ 
tween the men?” 

Lieuteant Wallace: “Twenty to 25 yards. That 
distance would provide the necessary dispersion, and 
at the same time there would be sufficient compact¬ 
ness to insure control.” 

The Director: “Where will the point commander 
march, Lieutenant Ralston?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “He should march at the head 
of the point.” 

The Director: “Do you agree with that statement, 
Captain Harvey ? 9 7 

Captain Harvey: “No, sir; I do not. It seems to 
me that the commander should be free to go where- 
ever he is needed. He should not be tied down to 
any one place.” 

The Director: “I agree with you. There are other 
reasons why he should not habitually march at the 
head of the point. In the first place, the man at the 
head of the point must always be on the lookout for 
the enemy, and if the point commander is the man his 
whole attention will be devoted to that task and there 


188 


Terrain Exercises 


will be very little leadership exercised in the point. 
Again, we do not want to take a chance on our point 
commander becoming a casualty unnecessarily. He 
has been placed in command, presumably because 
he is the best man fitted for the job. He knows the 
plans for the day's work better than any of the other 
men. If he becomes a casualty on the first few shots, 
eie may be no one to take his place without some 
confusion and delay. If the point commander 
marches a little distance back, say in the second or 
even third pair, he will be sufficiently close to the 
front to perform his duty. I prefer to have him in 
the second pair. Before leaving this subject of the 
formation of the point I would like your opinion, 
Captain Hughes, on the question of deploying the 
men in a line of skirmishers at extended intervals." 

Captain Hughes: “That might be all right after 
the enemy is encountered, but I would not do it on an 
ordinary march. In the first place, it would be rough 
going for the men off on the flanks of the road, and 
they could not keep up. If the rate of march is held 
down to keep abreast of them, the progress of the 
mam body will be delayed. In the next place, if the 
intervals are too much extended, the point comman¬ 
der will not be able to control the operations and will 

not have his men where he wants them at the critical 
moment." 

The Director: “Your reasons seem to be logical and 
possess merit. Before going further I want to say 
a few words about the operations of a point. ’ ’ 

Explanation 

The Director: “The main idea to be instilled into 
the minds of the members of a point is that it must 


189 


Advance Guard 

keep moving. It positively must not stop until ab- 

S °“ l wi com P e ^ e d do so by the fire of the enemy. 

yhen the enemy is encountered the point com¬ 
mander will have to size up the situation quickly and 
take the necessary action which invariably includes 
getting information back to the advance party com¬ 
mander. 

The men must look to the leader for instructions 
and guidance and await his orders. ’ ’ 

Solution 

Jlie Director: “Lieutenant Hastings, what ele¬ 
ments aie included in the orders of a point comman¬ 
der to the members of his point?” 

Lieutenant Hastings: “They are the elements in- 
c uded in every field order. The point commander 
must be sure that every man has all the available in¬ 
formation of the enemy and our own supporting 
troops. In this case they were given all of this by the 
platoon commander, and it is not necessary for Ser¬ 
geant Roberts to repeat it. That is paragraph 1 of 
the order. The point commander must then an¬ 
nounce his plans, in general terms, and that consti¬ 
tutes paragraph 2. Then comes the formation of the 
point and giving each man his instructions as to 
where he is to march in the formation—paragraph 3. 
He must now arrange for communication and follow 
with the place where he, himself, is to march. That 
completes the order.” 

The Director: “Now, Captain Harvey, let us as¬ 
sume that you are Sergeant Roberts. Your squad is 
standing here on the road ready to move out. Let 
us hear the exact orders that you would give them.” 


190 


Terrain Exercises 


Captain Harvey: “I will take post in front of the 
squad and command: 1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION. 

4 6 1 will then address the men as follows: 

“ ‘You heard what the lieutenant said about the enemy 
and our supporting troops. 

“We are going out as the point. 

‘Crane and Hanson (both riflemen), march on the 
right and left of the road, respectively. Keep about 
abreast of each other. 

‘Pendleton (rifle grenadier), follow Crane and Han¬ 
son at a distance of about 25 yards. March on the right 
side of the road. 

“ ‘Alley (rifleman) and Stone (carrier for the auto¬ 
matic rifleman), follow Pendleton at 25 yards distance— 
Stone on left, Alley on right of road. Stone, watch the 
country to the east and Alley, watch the country to the 
west. 

“ ‘Patrick (automatic rifleman) and Corporal Smith fol¬ 
low Alley and Stone at a distance of about 25 yards—Pat¬ 
rick on the right, Corporal Smith on the left of road. 

“ ‘Bailey (rifleman), follow Patrick and Corporal Smith 
at a distance of about 25 yards and watch for signals 
from the advance party. 

“ ‘I will march with Pendleton on the left side of the 
road. 

“ ‘Move out.’ M 

Procedure 

The Director: “Are there any questions?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “Yes, sir. I would like to 
ask why Captain Harvey places the automatic refle- 
man so far back in the formation ? ’ ’ 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, will you please 
explain your reasons?” 


Advance Guard 


191 


Captain Harvey: “If the point encounters the en- 
emy ? w e would want to conduct a little reconnaissance 
betore committing the automatic rifleman to action. 
It he is any farther to the front, he is most likely to 
ge invo ved early in the encounter and perhaps in a 
position hastily chosen, where his weapon could not 
produce his maximum effect. The automatic rifle 
nas the fire power of several rifles, and we want to 
take advantage of this fact. We must therefore get 
the weapon into the position where it can be done, 
and this cannot usually be determined with the first 
few shots of an advance guard meeting engagement.” 

The Director: “Those are very good reasons—ones 
which I believe all the members of this class will re¬ 
member when it comes to training their own noncom¬ 
missioned officers. Are there any other questions?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “Why did Captain Harvey 
omit to designate a second in command?” 

The Director: “The succession in military com¬ 
mand is determined by seniority. Corporal Smith 
is the next senior and will automatically assume com¬ 
mand. If there were no noncommissioned officer 
with the squad, Sergeant Roberts would have desig¬ 
nated one of the privates as second in command. 
Any other questions? {Pause.) There appear to be 
none. I wish you would ask questions to bring out 
points that are not fully understood. It is by a dis¬ 
cussion of these points that we arrive at a reasonable 
solution of these problems. Now, a few remarks be¬ 
fore we pass on to the next situation.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “When you come to the training of 
your own men you cannot he too particular about in- 


192 


Terrain Exercises 


sisting upon their learning the form of tactical orders 
and the language to be used in expressing their con¬ 
tents. It takes long practice to be able to do this 
without getting confused and omitting essentials. 

“When a noncommissioned officer takes charge of 
a detachment for any tactical duty and gives his in¬ 
structions in a clear and concise manner, leaving 
nothing to be guessed at, he inspires the confidence 
of his men. They realize immediately that there is 
someone at the helm who knows his business and 
they cheerfully respond. Noncommissioned officers 
should be practiced in stating the instructions that 
they would have to give under the various tactical 
situations that they may be called upon to handle. 
There is no surer way to gain that confidence so neces¬ 
sary to military efficiency.* 

“If there are no further questions we will proceed 
with the problem/ ’ 


Advance Guard Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Explain necessity for learning the details of tactics. 

2. Hand out Situation No. 2. Have members of class explain 

their understanding of it. 

3. The Point. What it is. Formation. Distances. Dispersion. 

4. Where commander marches. 

5. Deployment of point as skirmishers. 

6. Operations of point. 

7. Elements of the order for the point. 

8. Solution. Issue of orders. 

9. Position of automatic rifleman in formation. 

10. Second in command. 

11. Training of men. 


*When the Terrain Exercise is being conducted for non-commis¬ 
sioned officers this explanation should be modified to suit the occasion. 




Advance Guard 


193 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted forward along the route 
of march of the advance guard for a distance of 
several hundred yards. The distance should be such 
that the class will at least be beyond the sight of the 
starting point in the Terrain Exercise, so that en¬ 
tirely new terrain will be available. There should be 
a considerable stretch of road ahead in sight so that 
the various elements of the advance guard could be 
seen if they were actually on the road. 

The class is halted and the Director passes out the 
slips containing Situation No. 3. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

It is assumed that the advance guard has been 
marching for a period of two hours. 

You, Captain A, marching at the head of the sup¬ 
port of the advance guard, have reached this point. 
Nothing has occurred to change the initial formation 
of the advance guard. 

Required: 

Point out the formation and location of the various 
elements of the advance guard at this moment. 

Procedure 

A few minutes are allowed the members of the 
class to look over the situation and get their new 
bearings. The Director reads the situation aloud 
and inquires whether there are any questions, which 
he endeavors to answer. 


194 


Terrain Exercises 


Explanation 

The Director: “You will note that the situation in¬ 
dicates that the advance guard is assumed to have 
been marching for two hours. This would make the 
distance we have marched a little more than 5 miles. 
As a matter of fact, we have only come a few hundred 
yards from our starting point. You will have to 
diaw on your imagination in this matter, disregard 
all things behind you, and consider only those to the 
iront. It would consume too much time to actually 
go the distance assumed and it is not necessary to do 
so, for we are now on new terrain, which serves our 
purpose equally as well as if we were the full dis¬ 
tance of 5 miles farther to the front.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “What are the several elements of 
the advance guard, Lieutenant Williams?” 

* 1 • r 1 _ we have the point, 

which is the small body of men farthest to the front • 

next, we have a connecting file between the point and 
ie advance party; next comes the advance party, 
then the connecting files between the advance party 

and the support, and finally the support, which is 
right here on the road. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what is the 
strength and disposition of these several elements of 
the advance guard?” 

Captain Eastings: “The point is composed of one 
complete squad commanded by a sergeant. It is in 
patrol formation, marching on the road with a dis¬ 
tance of about 20 to 25 yards between each pair of 
men. The point precedes the advance party by a 


Advance Guard 


195 


distance of about 150 to 200 yards The connecting 
file between that point and advance party marches 
so that he can keep both of these bodies in sight. He 
has no fixed place where he is to march—” 

Lieutenant Wallace (interrupting) : “Right there 
is a point that I want to bring up. I can conceive of 
a situation where the connecting file could not keep 
both bodies in sight all the time—for example, on a 
winding road or in hilly country. What does he do 
in that case?” 

The Director: “Under those circumstances the 
commander of the advance party would have to send 
out a sufficient number of men for this duty, so as to 
insure communication being kept up at all times. It 
is simply a problem to be solved by the advance party 
commander. Captain Hastings, proceed with your 
discussion.” 

Captain Hastings: “Next comes the advance party 
composed of the first platoon, less one squad and 
connecting file, commanded by Lieutenant W. It is 
marching with a column of files on each side of the 
road at easy marching distances. The connecting 
files between the advance party and support march 
so that they can keep both bodies in communication 
with each other all the time. The distance between 
the advance party and support is about 400 yards. 
Now comes the support, composed of the company, 
less the first platoon and connecting files with the ad¬ 
vance party, which marches in a column of squads on 
the road. Following is the main body of the bat¬ 
talion, at a distance of about 500 yards. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, what provis¬ 
ions are made for flank protection?” 


196 


Terrain Exercises 


Lieutenant Ralston: “I do not think that any flank 

protection is necessary at this time. No considerable 

body of the enemy will get between our column and 

the main body of our brigade. If they did they 

would be doomed to destruction. On the other flank 

the country is open, so that no patrols are needed in 

that direction. I do not believe in wearing men out 

on^ flank patrol duty when there is no necessity for 
it. 

Explanation 

The Director: “That is exactly the point that 1 
wanted to bring out. There is no necessity for wear¬ 
ing men out on flank patrol duty beating their way 
over rough country and climbing fences, when they 
accomplish no useful purpose. Never send out a 
flank patrol unless there is some sound tactical 
reason for it. Then when the time comes and there is 
necessity for patrols, your men will be found ready 
to put forth superhuman efforts, if need be, to help 
you accomplish your mission. If you are in contact 
with the enemy, or there is immediate danger of such 
contact, flank patrols may be necessary and a com¬ 
mander should not hesitate to send them out. On the 
solution of these small tactical problems, that con¬ 
front a commander in actual service, will determine 
your success or failure as a leader. You must ever 
keep in mind that it is a combination of these small 
tactical situations that go to make up the big military 
operations on which the fate of a nation may de- 

b' vJf i-d* 

Procedure 

The Director.: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to make a rough sketch of the road occupied by 


Advance Guard 


197 


the advance guard and show on it the dispositions of 
the advance guard/ ’ 

Some 10 or 15 minutes should be allowed for this. 
After the sketches are completed they should be col¬ 
lected and passed back to the members of the class— 
taking care to see that no man gets his own solution 
back again. The members of the class should be in¬ 
vited to make any criticism of the sketch he has in 
his possession and following this the next situation 
should be proceeded with. 


Advance Guard Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct the class to the place where the situation is to be 

taken up for solution. 

2. Hand out Situation No. 3. Read Situation aloud. 

3. Explain why Situation is taken up at this point instead of 

five miles farther on. 

4. Proceed with problem: Elements of the advance guard; 

strength and disposition of the elements of the advance 
guard; connecting files; flank protection. 

5. Explain flank patrols. 

6. Make sketch of road showing the formation of the advance 

guard. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the point selected for 
the next tactical situation. This should be several 
hundred yards in advance of the point where Situa¬ 
tion No. 3 was staged. The slips bearing Situation 
No. 4 are passed out to members of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

You, Sergeant Roberts, have arrived at this point. 
The two leading men of the point (Crane and Han- 



198 


Terrain Exercises 


son) are about 25 yards ahead of you. The remain¬ 
ing members of the point are on the road behind you. 
At this moment both Crane and Hanson take cover 

and point in the direction of. You join them 

and observe about a squad of the enemy on foot 
{moving around in the woods—describe just what the 
enemy is doing). They apparently have just arrived 

and have not seen you. Several horses are being led 
to the rear. 

Required: 

What do you, Sergeant Roberts, do ? 

Procedure 

The Director reads the situation aloud and points 
out the location of the enemy. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to consider himself as being Sergeant Roberts. 

he incidents contained in the situation have trans¬ 
pired just as indicated. You were marching along 
the road; you saw Crane and Hanson take cover and 
point m the direction of the enemy; you joined them 
here; you see the enemy {explain what the enemy is 
doing). It is now up to you to make a decision as to 
what you are going to do and proceed to do it. Be- 
iore going into the solution of the problem I want to 

make a few remarks on the conduct of the operations 
of a point. 

The real work of the advance guard begins when 
it gets m contact with the enemy. All formation and 
all operations are designed to insure success when 
this event happens. The point is the first element that 



Advance Guard 


199 


meets the enemy and success or failure may depend 
upon what is done by this small body. The big idea 
is that we must get the jump on the enemy. We must 
lead and make him follow. In other words, we must 
take the offensive for it is only by offensive action 
that military success is gained. 

“The commander of the point of an advance guard 
must be on the lookout for the enemy all the time. He 
must continually look ahead and dope out what he is 
going to do if the enemy should suddenly appear in 
this or that place. 

“Sergeant Roberts has been doing this very thing 
and the proper action is plain to him. Let us see if 
it is plain to you. ’’ 

Solution 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, when you saw 
Crane and Hanson take cover, what is the first thing 
you would have done V 9 

Captain Harvey: “I would join Crane and Hanson 
immediately just as the situation indicates.” 

The Director: “Would you have done anything be¬ 
fore going forward?” 

Captain Harvey: “Well, sir, I would want to see 
for myself just what is going on before I took any 
definite action.” 

The Director: “Would you have done anything 
else, Captain Hodges?” 

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir. I would have signaled 
the rest of the point TOWN’ so as to give them 
warning that the enemy is in sight. I will tell Pendle¬ 
ton ‘Signal back. Enemy in sight,’ because Lieu¬ 
tenant W will want to know immediately why the 
point has halted, and this will give him the informa- 


200 


Terrain Exercises 


tion. Then I would go to the front and join Crane 
and Hanson. ’ ’ 

The Director: “ Those are the points I wanted to 
k*h?” see Captain Harvey, do you 

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “Now, Captain Harvey, let us take 

up your solution again. Let us say that you have 

joined Ciane and Hanson. Just what are you goinsr 
to do?” J 8 s 

Captain Harvey: “X would open fire on the enemy 
immediately. Then get the rest of the point up and 
have them join in the firing. ” 

The Director: “Do you agree with that procedure, 
Captain Hodges?” 

Captain Hodges: “Not entirely, sir. I appreciate 
the necessity for opening fire right away so as to get 
the jump on the enemy, but I think we should get as 
many rifles up as possible before opening fire and 
disclosing our position to the enemy. I would try 
to get the whole point in position to fire before open- 
nig up, if I could. I would first make provision for 
Crane and Hanson to open fire by giving them firing 
data: ‘Range: -yards. Target: enemy at (de¬ 

scribe location of target briefly). Hold your fire.’ 

I would then signal the other members of the point 
to come up and, as they arrive, indicate the location 
of the target and announce the range to them.” 

Captain Jones: “That solution seems to me to be 
all right if the enemy will remain inactive until all 
of this is done, but suppose he does not do so Sup¬ 
pose he discovers us. Suppose he opens fire himself 

Suppose he starts to retreat. Suppose he keeps com¬ 
ing along towards us.” 



Advance Guard 


201 


Captain Hodges: “I am coming to all of that. I 
would keep the enemy under observation. If he does 
anything that should cause us to open fire before all 
of the squad is up, I would open up with every rifle 
that is in position to fire. I would take no chances on 
the enemy getting the jump on me. It will only take 
a minute or two to get the men into position, and I 
think I am justified in delaying that long.” 

Captain Jones: “I would make mighty certain that 
I did not wait too long before opening fire. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think Captain Jones is right in 
his contentions, but I agree with Captain Hodges’ so¬ 
lution to get as many men as possible up on the line 
before opening fire. Of course, if the enemy does 
anything that would warrant opening fire before all 
the men are up, it should be done.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “The advantage of waiting until all 
the rifles are on the line is that, as soon as these men 
are fired on, they will probably try to make their get¬ 
away. They will furnish a target for only a few 
seconds. If our point can inflict sufficient casualties, 
they may fall back and abandon the attempt at fur¬ 
ther reconnaissance, especially if they can down the 
patrol leader. If the leading men of the point open 
fire, by the time the last man gets up, the enemy will 
be well under way and there will be no target to fire 
at. If the enemy returns the fire, they at once reveal 
themselves, and Sergeant Roberts will do well to be 
seeking out other detachments in the vicinity. A 
reconnoitering patrol does not fire on an occasion of 
this kind unless it is surprised and forced to do so in 


202 


Terrain Exercises 


self-defense. It has a much better chance of accom¬ 
plishing its mission of securing information by avoid- 
n g combat. If this small body of the enemy open 
ie, it may be reasonably assumed that they are being 
backed up by other troops or have accomplished their 
mission of finding out the strength and composition 
ol our forces and have turned themselves into a fight¬ 
ing patrol and open fire to delay us and thus give in¬ 
formation to their own troops that we are advancing 
^ ^hey hnmediately try to make a getaway, 
it wifi indicate that they are a reconnoitering patrol 
and will probably try to work around to the flanks of 
;, e column to get information of our main body. On 
the other hand, they will know that we are not a 
reconnoitering patrol as soon as we open fire. Thev 
know that we are backed up by other troops. 

You now see the elements involved in this simple 
situation. You see the responsibility that devolves 
upon non-commissioned officers when they are placed 
m the position of Sergeant Roberts. To know what 
to do and how to do it requires training and close at- 
tention to detail. Probably any of us could blunder 
through a situation of this kind, but it takes a man 
tiained m military tactics to make his decisions 

° f * , u P on them promptly and take advan¬ 
tage of the fleeting moments to inflict damage on the 
enemy. These are the things that we study to become 
proficient in. These are the things that Ave must 
teach our non-commissioned officers if we are to have 
confidence m their ability to meet .tactical situations 
that confront them, with judgment and decision. And 
there is no royal road to success along this line The 

knowledge required can be attained only by thorough 
study and practice. ” ' ' g 


Advance Guard 


203 


Solution 


The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, suppose the 
enemy does something which, in your judgment, re¬ 
quires fire to be opened before the whole point is up 
and in position, would you join in the firing your¬ 
self V 9 

Lieutenant Baker: “No, sir. I would not. I esti¬ 
mate that I would have plenty to do to direct the fire 
of the other men; to search the country to see if any 
other parties of the enemy were in our front, and to 
keep the advance party commander advised of what 
is going on at the front. ” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Barney, let us assume 
that you were able to get all of the men on the line 
before opening fire and were able to open as a sur¬ 
prise to the enemy. He takes cover and returns the 
fire. What further action would you take?” 

Lieutenant Barney: “I would keep on firing. I 
would signal the advance party commander to send 
up some reinforcements.” 

The Director: “Do you agree with that solution, 
Lieutenant Hunt?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “No, sir. I would go after him. 
I cannot run him out of his position by fire action 
alone. I would immediately start filtering my men 
forward while keeping up a heavy fire with the other 


man. 


5 J * 


The Director: “Captain Hall, give us Sergeant 
Roberts’ solution to the situation.” 

Captain Hall: “I will signal the members of the 


♦ In making a solution to this situation on the ground, the exact 
location of each man of the point, and especially the automatic rifle¬ 
man, should be indicated and staked out. 



204 


Terrain Exercises 


point ‘Down/ and tell Pendleton to signal the ad¬ 
vance party commander ‘Enemy in sight.’ I will 
en join Oiane and Hanson. I will locate the en- 
emy, give Crane and Hanson firing data and order 
them to hold their fire. I will signal the other mem- 
bers ot the point to come up, and as they arrive on 
the fine I will give them the range and indicate the 
target. When all are ready I will open fire on the 
enemy. Should the enemy do anything to warrant it 
will open fire immediately, with all the rifles on the 
hne. I will search the landscape for other parties of 
the enemy. As soon as I open fire I will take steps 

A.' „ I ance and close with the enemy and drive him 


The members of the class should not be required to 
make a written solution to this situation. 

Aftei all questions have been answered the class is 
ready to proceed to the solution of the next situation. 



Advance Guard 

Director’s Key 


Card No. 4 


o. solution of problem. 




The details of the advance against the 
be discussed by the class and worked out c 
possible to consider it in the abstract. 


e enemy’s position should 
on the ground. It is im- 





Advance Guard 


205 


Procedure 

The Director now passes out slips, bearing Situa¬ 
tion No. 5, to the members of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

When the point opened fire the enemy retreated 
under cover of the woods (or such cover as is actual¬ 
ly available). They did not return the fire. You, 
Sergeant Roberts, observe two riderless horses gal¬ 
loping through the woods. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Procedure 

When the members of the class have had a chance 
to get their bearings the Director reads the situation 
aloud and points out the direction in which the enemy 
retreated and where the riderless horses are at this 
time. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what is your 
estimate of the enemy ? ’ * 

Lieutenant Williams: “I should say he forms a re- 
connoitering patrol sent out to secure information 
about our movements. He has not yet gained the 
information he desires or he would have given us a 
fight. Again, had he been the advance element of a 
larger body he would have engaged our point and by 
now we would begin to see evidences of the troops 
following him.” 

The Director: “Is there any member of the class 


206 


Terrain Exercises 


who does not agree with the views just expressed V 1 
aptain Hastings: “I agree with them in the main, 
ut it seems to me that the enemy would have opened 
lire if for no other purpose than to make trouble for 
us and cause delay to our troops. ’ ’ 

The Director: “We must always give the enemy 
credit for being up to his job. The moment we opened 
hre the leader of that patrol knew that he had 
encountered a fighting element of our forces. If he 
stops to engage in a fight, he knows that every minute 
that passes makes it just that much more difficult for 
him to make his get-away. He knows that we are 
going to close on him right away and he will not get 
the information he has been sent out to secure. You 
must always remember that a reconnoitering patrol 
does not fight except when it is forced to do so in 
self-defense, or when it has secured all the informa¬ 
tion it wants, has sent it back, and then turns itself 
into a fighting patrol to delay the advance of the 

enemy. Are there any other points to bring up about 
tlie mission of the enemy? 

Lieutenant Wallace, you are assumed to be Ser¬ 
geant Roberts. AVLat do you do now?** 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would form up my point 
m the original order of march and move out along 
the road. We would take up the double-time until 
we get our proper distance. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Would you do anything else?” 
Lieutenant Wallace: “I would send two members 
of the point out to the place where the enemy was to 
see if we could get an identification.” 

a?ree «•* pxx**-* 


Advance Guard 


207 


Lieutenant Ralston: “Our battalion commander 
would want an identification if it is possible to get 
one, and it seems to me that something should be 
done at once to secure it.” 

The Director: “I agree with you entirely that an 
identification is desirable, but it is not the job of the 
point to get it. Members of the point do not go off 
on excursions to the flank. They keep plugging along 
on the line of march. If flank patrols are to be sent 
out, they must come from the advance party or the 
support. I cannot conceive of any circumstances 
that would warrant sending two members of the point 
off on patrol duty. Now, Lieutenant Ralston, assum¬ 
ing that it is desirable to get an identification, what 
would you, as point commander, do?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would send a message back 
to Lieutenant Wallace, who is with the advance 
party.” 

The Director: “By whom would you send this mes¬ 
sage?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “By Private Bailey, the rear 
man of the point.” 

The Director: “Now state the exact message that 
you would send back. ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would fall back to where 
Bailey is marching. I would say to him: 

“ ‘Bailey, you go back to Lieutenant Wallace. Tell 
him that we fired on an enemy reconnoitering patrol of 
about one squad. Show him where they were. Tell him 
that they did not return the fire. That when we opened 
fire they withdrew. That there are probably two dead 
or wounded men in the woods. Rejoin the point when 
you can.’ 


208 


Terrain Exercises 


“I would then double-time up to the point. As I 
pass Corporal Smith I would say: ‘Watch for sig¬ 
nals from the advance party/ ” 

Captain Harvey: “That solution seems to be all 
right, but don’t you think Lieutenant Wallace would 
come forward to the point when it halted? In that 
case he would know all about the situation, and it 
would not be necessary to send the message back to 
him.” 

The Director: “I am very glad you brought up that 
point, Captain Harvey. No; I do not think Lieu¬ 
tenant Wallace would leave his advance party at such 
a critical moment. In my opinion it would be abso¬ 
lutely wrong if he did. In the first place, he has no 
business up with the point. Sergeant Roberts is 
either capable of handling it or he is not so. If he 
is, he should be let alone to solve his own problem; if 
he is not capable, he should be relieved. On advance 
guard duty the commander of each element will have 
plenty to do if he sticks to his own job and does not 
go molesting that of someone else.” 

Procedure 

The class should now be conducted 200 or 300 yards 
farther along the road. It is here halted and the 
Director states: The point has now gotten into for¬ 
mation and is continuing the advance. A message 
has been sent back to the advance party commander 
as indicated in our solution a few minutes ago. At 
this moment you see about six mounted men of the 
enemy off in that direction (points out the location 
toward the flank). 


Advance Guard 


209 


Solution 

The Director: “Captain Hodges, how do you size 
up the situation now ¥ ’ ’ 

Captain Hodges: “I estimate that the mounted 
men are the survivors of the patrol that we fired on. 
They are working around to the flank of the column 
to secure information of the strength and composi¬ 
tion of our main body. Having this information, it 
is my job to get it back to the advance party com¬ 
mander as soon as possible in order that proper meas¬ 
ures may be taken to beat off the enemy patrol and 
keep him from getting the information he wants. I 
would send a verbal message back by Alley, who is 
marching just behind me in the point.’’ 

The Director: “Now, let us assume that I am Pri¬ 
vate Alley. Give me the message that you would 
send back.” 

Captain Hodges: “ I would fall back to where Alley 
is marching, and as we walk along say to him: 

“ 'You see those mounted men over there? They are 
the patrol we fired on. Go back to Lieutenant W and 
show him where you saw them. Tell him they are work¬ 
ing around our flank to get in touch with the main body. 
Come back to the point when you can.’ ” 

The Director: “I think that will cover the situa¬ 
tion. Are there any questions?” 


210 


Terrain Exercises 


Advance Guard Card No. 5 

Director’s Key 

1. Hand out slips bearing situation No. 5. Read situation and 

point out places mentioned. 

2. Estimate of situation. Reconnoitering patrol. Action of 

enemy. 

3. Action taken by point commander. Get point in formation 

and on road. 

4. Sending out patrol from point. 

5. Message to advance party commander. State message. 

6. State verbally problem re enemy on the flank. Make solu¬ 

tion. Send message back to Lieutenant W. 


Procedure 

The slips bearing Special Situation No. 6 are 
passed out to the members of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 6: 

You, Lieutenant W, with the advance party, have 
arrived at this point. Private Alley comes to you 
with a message from Sergeant Roberts and points 
out the place where the enemy was a few minutes ago. 
You already have the message from Sergeant 
Roberts delivered by Private Bailey. 

Required: 

What action do you, Lieutenant W, take ? 

Procedure 

The Director reads the situation and explains that 
each member of the class is to now consider himself 
as being Lieutenant W. 

Solution 

The Director: “Captain Jones, what would you do 
under the circumstances V 9 



Advance Guard 


211 


Captain Jones: “In the first place, the enemy’s 
patrol is trying to work around our flank to get in 
touch with our main body. The question to my mind 
is: Is it the job of the advance party to try and pre¬ 
vent this? We can hardly be expected to send pa¬ 
trols from the advance party so far afield. It will 
require a patrol of at least a squad, and probably two 
of them, to accomplish such a mission. It would 
seem to me that the task should be left to the support. 
I would, therefore, get word back to the advance 
guard commander of what is going on and he would 
send out the necessary patrols. In the next place, 
it will be necessary to investigate the place where the 
enemy was when our point fired on him and secure 
an identification if possible. This is close-in recon¬ 
naissance and may be undertaken by the advance 
party. I would send a patrol of three men under a 
corporal for the purpose.” 

The Director: “How would you get the message 
back to Captain A?” 

Captain Hodges: “Private Alley has been with the 
point. He has seen all that has taken place up there. 
I would send him back with the message to Captain 
A. In order that Sergeant Roberts may know what 
action is being taken I would send Bailey to him 
with a message.” 

Captain Jones: “Would you make these written or 
verbal messages?” 

Captain Hodges: “They would be verbal mes¬ 
sages.” 


212 


Terrain Exercises 


Explanation 

The Director : “This is a point I want to bring out. 
The platoon commander will seldom have time to 
wiite messages. He must depend upon his men, and 
especially his runners, to see for themselves what is 
going on so that when it is desired to send informa¬ 
tion back all the platoon commander has to do is to 
turn to one of his runners, give him a few words of a 
message, and the runner is off to make his report. 
He will not only carry the message, but he will give 
accurate information of what is going on. The care¬ 
ful training of runners will repay the trouble in large 
dividends when the time comes. 

“In the present situation I think it would be well 
for Lieutenant F to send one of his trained runners 
back to the captain with Private Bailey so that he 
can hear the captain's orders and see just what he 
does to meet the situation. The runners will then 
return to Lieutenant W and tell him about it." 

Solution 

The Director: “Now, Captain Hodges, let us as¬ 
sume that you are going to send Private Alley back 
with the message; just what instructions would you 
give him?" 

Captain Hodges: “I would say to Private Alley: 

You go back to the captain. Repeat your message 
to him. Tell him about what happened at the point dur¬ 
ing the halt. Tell him I am sending a patrol to investi¬ 
gate the place where the enemy was fired on.’ 

“I would adopt the Director’s suggestion and send 
one of my runners with Private Alley. I would sav 
to him: 


Advance Guard 


213 


You go with Private Alley to the captain. See 
what he does to meet the situation, hear his orders, and 
bring back information of all this to me.’” 

The Director: “That appears to cover the situation 
very well. Lieutenant Baker, what message would 
you send to Sergeant Roberts?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I would say to Private Bailey, 
who was present when I gave Private Alley his in¬ 
structions : 

‘Go to Sergeant Roberts and tell him what I have 
done to meet the situation.’ ” 

The Director: “Let us assume that you have se¬ 
lected Corporal Jansen as the patrol commander to 
investigate the place where the enemy was fired on. 
Corporal Jansen has reported to you. What orders 
do you give him, Captain Hall?” 

Captain Hall: “As we march along I would say to 
Corporal Jansen: 

‘You have heard the message just brought back by 
Private Bailey. Take the front rank of your squad and 
reconnoiter the edge of that wood (pointing). An en¬ 
emy identification is especially desired. Report the 
facts to the battalion commander when he comes up. 
Rejoin the advance party when you can.’ ” 

The Director: “I think these orders cover the situ¬ 
ation admirably. I hope you all now appreciate the 
multitude of little problems that come up for solu¬ 
tion in the course of a tour of advance guard duty.” 


214 


Terrain Exercises 


Advance Guard Card No. 6 

Director’s Key 

1. Hand out slips bearing Situation No. 6. Explain that each 

man is now to consider himself as being Lieutenant W. 

2. Discussion of enemy patrol. Reconnaissance from advance 

party—from support. 

3. Messages sent back by Sergeant Roberts. 

4. Relay messages to Captain A. 

5. Training of runners and messengers. 

6. Messages of Lieutenant W to Captain A and Sergeant 

Roberts. 

(. Orders for patrol to investigate place where enemy was fired 
on. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted along the route of 
march, for a distance of several hundred yards, to a 
place where entirely new terrain is available and 
where the lay of the land is such that a march outpost 
may be established. 

The class is halted and the Director passes out the 
slips bearing Situation No. 7. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 7: 

It is assumed that the advance guard has been 
marching for two hours since the march was resumed 
after the enemy patrol was encountered. During this 
time enemy scouts have been observed from time to 
time, but they have not attempted to interfere with 
the march of the column. 

You, Captain A, are marching at the head of the 
support. When you arrive at this point the signal 
“HALT” is received from the rear. You halt and 
relay the signal forward. A moment later the bat- 






Advance Guard 


215 


talion adjutant joins you and states: “The column 
will halt for one hour. The major directs that the 
advance guard provide for the security of the com¬ 
mand for that time . 1 9 

Required: 

What action do you, Captain A, take ? 

Procedure 

The Director reads the situation aloud and makes 
any explanation that may appear to him to be 
necessary. 

Explanation 

The Director: “When a column on the march halts 
for any considerable length of time the advance guard 
continues its covering duty by forming march out¬ 
posts. These are simply patrols sent out to the front 
and flanks, a certain distance, where they halt and 
remain there until ordered to continue the march or 
until they are recalled. 

“ The advance party usually furnishes these patrols 
which are sent out on the routes by which the enemy 
may approach. The support is posted at some cen¬ 
tral point from which it may readily reinforce any 
group that may be threatened by the enemy. 

“ In a situation like this the question always comes 
up as to how the advance guard commander will issue 
his orders for the establishment of the march out¬ 
posts—that is, whether he will do it by a message to 
the several elements or whether he will issue an order 
and have copies made and sent out. 

“If the message system is employed, the advance 
guard commander will have to include the new inf or- 


216 


Terrain Exercises 


mation of the enemy and our own troops and give the 
order to the element. All of this is accomplished by 
issuing a simple five-paragraph order and sending it 
out. This is more expeditious than message writing. 
The commander has all the information he requires, 
and he is given definite instructions as to what he, 
himself, is to do. The order method is favored.” 

Solution 

The Director: “ Captain Hall, how do you size up 
the situation?” 

Captain Hall: “The mission of the advance guard 
now is to continue to provide protection to the main 
body by establishing a march outpost. Enemy scouts 
have been observed from time to time, but they have 
not interfered with the march. We have no informa¬ 
tion regarding any considerable force of the enemy. 

“Our main body is halted and will remain so for 
at least an hour. Our advance guard is so disposed 
that it will be able to take up its new formation with¬ 
out confusion. The advance party can cover the 
main road and, in general, the head of the column. 
Our patrols, of which I assume there are two on the 
exposed flank, will form march outguards and pro¬ 
tect that flank. I would send out another patrol of 
one squad to cover the other flank and prevent enemy 
scouts from working around there and observing the 
main body. 

“My decision is to form a march outpost.” 

The Director: “What Captain Hall has said con¬ 
stitutes Captain A’s 'Estimate of the Situation.' 
These are the points that would flash through his 
mind as soon as he gets the information that the halt 


Advance Guard 


217 


is to be made. Lieutenant Barry, what is now neces¬ 
sary to put the decision into effect ?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “It is necessary to issue an 
order.” 

The Director: “How would you go about this?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would assemble the two pla¬ 
toon commanders, the platoon sergeants and the first 
sergeant, and have them write down my order in 
their message books. This would give me a sufficient 
number of copies for all purposes.” 

The Director: “This shows the necessity for a com¬ 
pany commander having some means whereby sev¬ 
eral copies of an order may be made by a duplicating 
process—carbon paper. I believe the plan of having 
the first sergeant or a clerk carry a duplicating book 
would solve the problem. Now, Lieutenant Hunt, 
you may dictate Captain A*s order.” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “In order to save a repetition 
and at the same time let all of the company w T ith the 
support know what is going on I would have the men 
give me their attention. My order would be: 

‘There is no further information of the enemy. Our 
battalion halts for one hour. 

<£ ‘The advance guard will establish march outposts. 

“ ‘The advance party will be posted on the main road 
and cover the head of the column. 

“ ‘The two flank patrols on the . flank will be 

posted as march outguards and cover that flank. 

“ ‘Sergeant Hamilton with the Fourth Squad, 2d Pla¬ 
toon, will establish a march outguard on the.flank 

in the vicinity (point out location) and cover the 





218 


Terrain Exercises 


.flank of the column. The support will be posted 

here. 

“ 'Messages to Support.’ ” 

27ie Director: “That seems to cover the situation. 
Now, how would you get this order out to all the 
people to whom it should go ?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send it to Lieutenant 
W by a runner. I would send it out to the flank pa¬ 
trols by the section guide of the 3d Platoon and di- 
lect him to make an inspection of the dispositions 
out there so as to make sure they are in position to 
carry out their mission. I would send it to the bat¬ 
talion commander by a runner. ’ ’ 

The Director: “So much for the distribution of the 
order. What would you do now, Lieutenant Barry «’ ’ 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would now see that Sergeant 
Hamilton gets started on his mission, and then I 
would post sentinels at the support to watch out for 
signals from the various detachments that are out ” 

The Director: “I believe that would meet the situ- 
ation very well.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “Before terminating this Terrain 
Jflxercise I want to invite the attention of the mem- 
bers of the class to the multitude of small details that 
infantry commanders have to attend to in a problem 
so simple as the one we have had under consideration 
today. Let us suppose we have an active and ag¬ 
gressive enemy opposing our advance, and you can 
see how these details would multiply. The point I 
want to bring up is that, unless officers and non-com¬ 
missioned officers prepare themselves for this duty 



Advance Guard 


219 


by study and practice, they have not a chance of being 
able to meet these problems intelligently in active 
service. 1 ou must know what to do under any given 
situation, and you must know how to go about doing 
it. The commander who hesitates, gives his orders 
and then changes them several times, soon loses the 
confidence of his men and will eventually find himself 
replaced by another man who has taken advantage of 
his opportunities to learn the game and has the abil¬ 
ity to carry it out. The best way I know of to acquire 
this knowledge is by actual practice along the lines 
that we have gone today. ” 


Advance Guard Card No. 7 

Director’s Key 

1. Hand out slips bearing Situation No. 7. Read situation and 

make any necessary explanations. 

2. Explain what advance guard does when the column halts. 

State relative advantages and disadvantages of message 
and order systems. 

3. Estimate of the situation, mission, enemy, own troops, plans 

of action, decision. 

4. Captain A’s orders. Five-paragraph order. Distribution of 

order. 

5. Remarks on necessity for study and practice. 



















Terrain Exercise No. 6. 

A Flank Guard 

The Problem 

Special Situation—Blue: 

A regiment of Blue infantry, operating in hostile 
country, is marching on the ( a)-(l ?) road, towards 
(c). 

The support of the advance guard, composed of 
Companies A and B (less 1 platoon, Company B), 
is this time at ( d ). The reserve, consisting of the re¬ 
mainder of the battalion, is following at a distance of 
about 400 yards and the main body follows the re¬ 
serve at a distance of 500 yards. 

A (e) flank guard, consisting of the 3rd platoon, 
Company B, has arrived at this point (/) marching 
on the ( g)-(h ) road. 

A force of the enemy is reported in the vicinity of 
(0 and detachments of mounted men have been oper¬ 
ating in the direction of (j). 

Situation No. 1: 

You, Lieutenant A, commanding the ( e ) flank 
guard, and marching at the head of the main body of 
your command, have arrived at this point (/). 

Required: 

What is the formation of your (e) flank guard at 
this moment? 

(Note.—The platoon is organized in accordance with column 
8 T. O. 28W. See Appendix I.) 


221 


222 


Terrain Exercises 


Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(a-&) The road on which the Blue regiment is 
marching. In military orders and problems roads 
aie designated by naming places located on them. 
I or example, the Longs-Emmitsburg-Fairplay road 
would mean the main road passing through these 
places. When military maps are made all cross- 
loads and road-forks should be numbered and all 
hills and other prominent topographical features 
either designated by their local names or given letter 
designations. This will greatly facilitate their desig- 
nation in orders and messages. When maps have 
gud lines on them the location of points may be desig¬ 
nated by the use of coordinates. 

(c) i Some point, a number of miles distant, in the 
direction in which the troops are marching. 

(d) The point on the main road where the support 
of the advance guard of the column has arrived. It 
should be about abreast of (/), (see below). 

(e) The designation of the flank guard, right or 


(/) The point at which the flank guard is supposed 
to have arrived. The point where the Terrain Exer¬ 
cise is to begin. 

(g)-(h) The road on which it is intended that the 
flank guard is to march and along which the Terrain 
Exercise is to be conducted. This road should lie ap¬ 
proximately parallel to and not more than a mile dis¬ 
tant trom the road on which the main body is march¬ 
ing. If no such network of roads exist, the Director 
may explain to the class the conditions and assume 
that the nearest road is about a mile distant and 
work out the problem on that assumption. This pro- 


Plank Guard 


223 


cedure strains the situation a little and robs it of 
some of its reality. The members of the class will 
have to make the best of it and will have to draw 
upon their imagination to picture it. 

( i ) A locality some miles distant in the direction 
of which the Blue force is marching. 

0) Localities or places some distance to the flank 
of the Blue force and in the direction of the road on 
which the flank guard is marching. 

Procedure 

The members of the class are conducted to (/) 
where the Terrain Exercise is to begin. 

The Director distributes the sheets containing the 
Special Situation Blue and the Situation No. 1. A 
few minutes are allowed the members of the class to 
look them over. The Director then reads the prob¬ 
lem aloud, the members of the class following from 
the copy in their possession, and makes such expla¬ 
nation as may be necessary. One or more members 
of the class are called upon to state their understand¬ 
ing of the tactical situation. 

Explanation 

The Director: “Before going ahead with this ex¬ 
ercise I want to make a few remarks about a flank 
guard. 

“Ordinarily the flanks of a column on the march 
may be protected by small patrols sent out from time 
to time from the advance guard. There are occa¬ 
sions, however, when patrols will not suffice, as in the 
present situation, where it is known that hostile 
troops are operating on the flank of our line of march. 
In this case it is necessary to send out a stronger de- 


224 


Terrain Exercises 


tachment to march parallel to the route of the main 
body. This detachment is denominated a Flank 
Cruai d and is an element in the system of covering 

tioops provided for the protection of a marching 
column. 

The flank guard marches abreast of the column 
and assumes the general formation of an advance 
guard, having a point thrown out to the front, fol- 
owed by the remainder of the detachment, much as 
an advance party and support. Patrols are sent out 
to the exposed flank whenever necessary, and commu¬ 
nication is maintained with the main body by means 
o small patrols or connecting files. In some cases it 
may be necessary to detach a small rear guard, as in 
the case where a flank guard has been attacked by a 
comparatively large force of the enemy and has taken 
up a position to hold them off until the main body can 

pass the danger point and the flank guard resume its 
march. 

The general duties of the flank guard are much 
the same as those of an advance guard; that is, to do 
everything possible to provide for the uninterrupted 
progress of the main body. All other duties are in¬ 
cidental to this and all have this prime obiect in 
view. ’ ’ J 

Solution 

Hie Director: “Lieutenant Williams, into what 
parts is your flank guard divided at this time?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would have an advance 
party and a support. Each element would consist of 
one section of three squads each. From the advance 

party a point consisting of one squad would be sent 
to the front.” 

The Director: “Had you thought of a formation in 


Plank Guard 


225 


which the whole platoon is kept intact as one body 
with only a point of one squad out in front ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Williams: “Yes, sir. I had considered 
that possible formation and abandoned the idea be¬ 
cause we can cover more road space with the forma¬ 
tion that I have adopted and the more road space the 
flank guard can cover without undue dispersion the 
more of the column of the main body it covers and 
protects. ” 

The Director: “All right. Now let us assume that 
we adopt your formation of an advance party with a 
squad as point and the second section as a support. 
What is the formation of your point, Captain Hast¬ 
ings ? ’ ’ 

Captain Hastings: “It would be in the ‘Boni 
Point ? formation, the men marching on alternate 
sides of the road with a distance of about 20 yards 
between them.” 

The Director: “I think that formation would be 
just right for this occasion. What is the next ele¬ 
ment of the flank guard?” 

Captain Hastings: “The connecting files, sir.” 

The Director: “How many of them?” 

Captain Hastings: “I would have two at least.” 

The Director: “Wouldn’t one man be sufficient as 
a connecting file?” 

Captain Hastings: “At this particular point one 
man would, but there are places on this road where 
one man would not be able to keep up the communi¬ 
cation, and to make sure of that being done all the 
time I would detail two men. The duty is no more 
arduous than marching with the point or the advance 
party, and I do not consider that it is any hardship.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, what would 


226 


Terrain Exercises 


be the distance from the rear man of the point to the 
head of the advance party ?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “About two hundred yards.” 

The Director: “What would be the distance from 
the advance party to the head of the support V’ 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would have that about 
350 yards.’’ 

The Director: “You will want to keep in communi¬ 
cation with the main body on the (a) -(&) road. How 
would you accomplish that?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would send out two men to 
maich so that they can see the main body and the 
flank guard. X realize that they cannot do this all 
the time but they will be able to do it at sufficiently 
fi equent intervals to keep both bodies informed if 
anything unusual happens.” 

The Director: “Would you have a patrol out on the 
exposed flank at this time?” 


u 


(Note.—T he answer to this question will depend upon the lay 
of the country on the exposed flank. If it is close, a patrol will 
be necessary. If it is open to the limit of effective rifle fire a 
i W ° Ud Ilot J , be necessary. In any event, the Director 

the Te r rSn g E^rcise.) PrmCiPleS Stat6d be ‘° W ’ at s01ne point in 

IN o, sir; I do not see the necessity for a patrol on 
the exposed flank at the present. We can see all the 
country to the limit of effective rifle range from the 
load, and I think a patrol there would be a waste of 
men. If, later on, the topography should demand it, 

At\vli C f T\ 0ll t such patrols as may be necessary. 
At what distance they would march from the column 

cannot be stated. It would depend entirely upon the 
country They would hare to' go out toSt 
see something more than can be seen from the road 
if they are to be of any use. ” 


Flank Guard 


227 


T he Director: “You are exactly right. I think all 
e members of the class will agree with you. There 
is no necessity for wearing men out on flank patrol 
u y, beating their way over rough country and 
climbing fences, when they accomplish no useful 
puipose. Never order a disposition unless there is a 
sound tactical reason for it. Then when the time 
comes your men are ready to put forth superhuman 
ertorts, if need be, to help you accomplish your mis¬ 
sion. On the solution of these small problems in 
actual service rests your success or failure as a tac¬ 
tical leader of men. You must remember that it is 
the combination of these small tactical situations that 
go to make up the big maneuvers. ” 

The Director: “What would be the march forma¬ 
tion^ the support, Lieutenant Ralston.” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would have three squads 
in the support. I would have them march with a col¬ 
umn of files on each side of the road. I would have 
two squads on this side of the road towards the enemy 
and one squad on the other side. ’ ’ 

The Director: “What are the advantages of this 
formation ? ? ? 

Lieutenant Ralston: “It makes easier marching 
than in a column of squads; the column is not so vul¬ 
nerable to enemy fire; if a deployment to the front is 
necessary it may readily be effected by deploying the 
leading squad of each column to the right and left 
respectively and deploying the rear squad of the 
column towards the enemy in rear of them. If a de¬ 
ployment to the flank towards the enemy is necessary 
it is practically already made for we have two squads 
on that flank now, and all the men will have to do is 


228 


Terrain Exercises 


get a little more interval, the squad on the side of the 
road away from the enemy will get their proper in¬ 
terval and are in the right position for a small re¬ 
serve ; and deployments can be made without any 
confusion in case of sudden attack.” 

The Director: “I think we can all agree that you 
have the proper formation. Now, I want each mem¬ 
ber of the class to draw a rough sketch of the road at 
this point and show on it the detailed formation of 
the flank guard. Make the scale large so you can 
show the details.” 

Procedure 

When the sketches are completed the Director dis¬ 
tributes a mimeographed sketch showing the dispo¬ 
sition of the flank guard in order that the members 
of the class may compare their sketches with it. 


Flank Guard 


Director’s Key 


Card No. 1 


1. Conduct class to place where the Terrain Exercise is to begin. 
Distribute the problem. Read and explain. Have mem- 
bers of class explain their understanding of the problem. 

A. Explain necessity for employment of a flank guard:—pro¬ 
tection of exposed flank; where march; formation; patrols* 
rear guard; duties. ’ 

3. Solution: formation; advance party and support; covers 

more road space; dispersion; formation of point; connect¬ 
ing. files; distances between elements; communication with 
main body. 

4. Flank patrols:—necessity for; do not use except when neces¬ 

sary. 

5. Marching formation of support. Advantages of column of 

“S,° n , eac ^ si( * e ^e road:—easy marching; invulner- 
ability to enemy fire; deployments facilitated. 

6. Have class make sketch; distribute sheets showing solution 

and compare with sketches made. 






Flank Guard 


229 


Procedure 

The class is conducted along the road on which the 
flank guard is supposed to be marching to the point 
where a road leading from the flank where the enemy 
is reported, enters it. It may be assumed that the 
flank guard has marched a mile or more to reach this 
point. 

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situ¬ 
ation No. 2, to the members of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

You, Lieutenant A, commanding the flank guard, 
and marching at the head of the support, are ap¬ 
proaching this road fork. The flank guard is now 
marching abreast of the interval between the reserve 
of the advance guard and the head of the main body 
of the column on the (a)-(b) road. There has been 
no contact with the enemy. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Procedure 

The Director reads over the problem and makes 
such explanation as may be necessary. 

The Director: “ Captain Harvey, how do you size 
up the situation at this time ? ’ ’ 

Captain Harvey: “The mission of the flank guard 
is the protection of this flank of the column marching 
on the (a)-(b) road, and provide for its uninter¬ 
rupted progress. The enemy has been reported out 
on this flank (pointing). He will naturally take ad¬ 
vantage of roads leading towards the Blue column to 


230 


Terrain Exercises 


aeihtate his operations. The road we are approach¬ 
ing leads from the direction of the enemy and must 
be watched until our main column has passed the 
danger point. We are marching abreast of the in- 
erval between the advance guard and the main body 
of our main column. This road will have to be 
watched until the main body passes beyond it. The 
road space occupied by the main body of the column 
would be about 2,900 yards, including field train of 
the regiment and excluding the combat train of the 
st brigade. The column will pass a given point at 
the rate of about 88 yards per minute. It will there- 
< a k° u t 32 minutes for the main body to pass. 

My decision would be to send a patrol out on the 
road to the. (direction).” 

The Director: “Your estimate seems to cover the 
necessary points and I think we can agree that you 

r ^ at the P ro P er decision. Just a mention 

of this Estimate of the Situation.’ It is a logical 
process of thought involving the elements just men¬ 
tioned by Captain Harvey, terminating in a tactical 

r\?? n Y T ^ 1S 1S wllat y° u have to do in the solution 
of all tactical problems. The patrol leader does it in 
every move of his patrol. The platoon as a flank 
guard requires the same process on the part of the 
p atoon leader. The company commander, as com¬ 
mander of the advance party of an advance guard 
must consider these same elements in the conduct of 
his covering detachment. It is the same with the bat¬ 
talion commander, the regimental commander, and 
on up to the commander of a division. When vou are 
presented with a tactical situation for solution, figure 
out all the elements of it; your mission, your situ- 



Flank Guard 


231 


ation with respect to the enemy, the influence of the 
terrain, and then arrive at a clean-cut decision as to 
what you are going to do. Captain Hodges, what 
would be the strength of the patrol % 9 ’ 

Captain Hodges: “I would make it one squad. I 
think that would be about right. ’ ’ 

The Director: 6 6 Whom would you detail in charge 
of the patrol ?” 

Captain Hodges: “ Sergeant Wilkins, the left 
guide of the platoon.” 

The Director: “ When would you issue your orders 
for the patrol?” 

Captain Hodges: “As we march along I will call 
Sergeant Wilkins to the head of the support and give 
him his orders as we march along. That would do 
away with the necessity for halting the column while 
I am giving the orders.” 

The Director: “Now, Captain James, tell us just 
how you would give the orders to the patrol and just 
what you would say.” 

Captain James: “As we approach the cross-road I 
will call Sergeant Wilkins to join me. As we march 
along I will give him the orders for the patrol: 

'We have not heard or seen anything of the enemy. 
Our flank guard is now marching abreast of the distance 
between the advance guard and main body of our column 
on the (a)-(b) road. 

“ 'You will take the sixth squad and patrol down the 
road we are approaching to the (direction) to cover the 
passage of the main body. Remain out about 35 minutes 
and then return. Catch up with the flank guard when 
you can. 

" ‘Messages to head of support.’ ” 


232 Terrain Exercises 

The Director: “That seems to cover the situation 
very well. ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Baker: “It seems to me that if I were 
Sergeant Wilkins I would want you to indicate how 
far I am to go with the patrol. Can the Director en¬ 
lighten us on that point V’ 

The Director: “Captain Hall, what do you think 
about the point that Lieutenant Baker brings up?” 

Captain Hall: “Captain James told the Sergeant 
to stay out about 35 minutes. It seems to me that is 
sufficient. The Sergeant can keep tab on his time and 
judge his distance by that.” 

The Director : “ Yes, I think the time element is one 
thing, but there is another point that has not been 
mentioned. You do not want to hamper your subor¬ 
dinate with detailed instructions. It may be that 
there is a point on this road only a short distance out 
where Sergeant Wilkins has a good view over the 
country and a good position in case the enemy does 
come upon him. There would be no necessity for 
going on beyond such a point. If he had specific 
orders to go a certain distance he would feel that he 
had to do it. You give the Sergeant his mission 
make him understand what he is out there for. Tell 
him about how long he is to remain out and then let 
him work out his own problem. You must not go into 
details. The moment you do so you get beyond your 
depth. You cannot foresee all contingencies. There 
has been only one military commander that was able 
to do this. He was the great Napoleon.” 


Flank Guard 


233 


Flank Guard Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class along road to point where there is a cross-road. 

2. Distribute sheets bearing Situation No. 2. 

3. Estimates of Situation:—Mission; enemy; own troops; plans 

of action; decision; discuss necessity for. 

4. Selection of commander of patrol. How give orders to him. 

5. Orders:—Enemy and own troops; detail troops for patrol; 

mission; how long stay out; messages. 

6. Questions of distance to go out. 

7. Discuss going into detail in order to subordinates. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

As the column approached this cross-road the pla¬ 
toon commander calls you, Sergeant Wilkins, to him. 
As you march along he gives you the following verbal 
orders: 

“We have not heard or seen anything of the enemy. 
Our flank guard is now marching abreast of the distance 
between the advance guard and main body of our column 
marching on the (a)-(b) road. 

“You will take the sixth squad and patrol down the 
road we are approaching to the (direction) to cover the 
passage of the main body. Remain out about 35 minutes. 
Catch up with the flank guard when you can. 

“Messages to head of support.” 

The sixth squad, marching in column of files has 
arrived at this point with Corporal Jenkins at the 
head. 

j Required: 

What action do you take ? 



234 


Terrain Exercises 


Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets bearing the 
pi oblem to the members of the class, and makes such 
explanations as may be necessary. 

Explanation 

The Director: “It is realized that it is probable 
t iat no member of this class will ever be called upon 
to actually conduct the operation of a small patrol 
such as we have here. It is, however, necessary for 
you to have a knowledge of just what is likely to hap¬ 
pen to any patrol that you may have occasion to send 
out from a covering detachment of which you may be 
m command. It shows you the problem that may be 
put up to non-commissioned officers for solution and 
indicates in a most practical manner the necessity 
for their training and instruction.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, let us assume 

that you are Sergeant Wilkins. Just what would 

jou do on receipt of the platoon commander’s 
order V’ 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would step aside and as the 
sixth squad comes up I join it, marching abreast of 
the squad leader. As we get to the cross road I look 
at my watch to get the time. When the head of the 
squad reaches the cross-road I command: 

“ ‘Sixth squad, FOLLOW ME.’ 

“I conduct the squad down the coss-road for a few 
yards and then command: 

“ ‘1. Squad. 2. Halt.’ ” 


Flank Guard 


235 


The Director: u Lieutenant Hunt, we have the 
squad halted near the cross-road here where Lieuten¬ 
ant Barry has conducted it. Let us assume you have 
sized up the situation and are ready to issue your 
verbal orders to the squad. Just what would you 
say ? I want you to give the exact words. ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would say: 

'We have seen or heard nothing of the enemy. Our 
main column continues the march on the (a)-(b) road. 

Our flank guard is now marching abreast of the dis¬ 
tance between the advance guard and the main body. 

“ 'This squad will cover this road until the main body 
has passed the cross-road to the. (direction). 

" ‘Renolds will march on the right-hand side of the 
road. Shane will follow at a distance of 20 yards and 
march on the left-hand side of the road. 

" 'The rest of the squad except Halley, follow me. 

‘ Halley will follow at a distance of 50 yards as get¬ 
away man. 

“ ‘Signals to me. 

“ ‘MOVE OUT.’ ” 

The Director: “Are there any comments on the 
order as given by Lieutenant Hunt?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “It seems to me that it 
would be well to follow the Lieutenant’s order and 
tell the men how long we are going to stay out.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt will you please 
answer that comment?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I do not calculate that it makes 
any difference to the men of the squad. They should 
be told what they are going out for so that they may 
know the purpose of the patrol. But as for their hav¬ 
ing any information as to how long they are to stay 



236 


Terrain Exercises 


out, I do not think it has a place in the order. That 
part of the order was only for Sergeant Wilkins. ” 
The Director: "I think you are right. The Lieu¬ 
tenant made a mental calculation of the time that it 
w ould take the main body to pass the danger point 
and specified that 35 minutes as the time the patrol 
should stay out. I do not think that is any concern of 
the men. Sergeant Wilkins might well tell it to Cor¬ 
poral Jenkins so if anything should happen to him 
he would know the orders. Any further comment ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Williams: "Does the Director think 
that it would be proper to halt the squad to give them 
the orders 

The Director: "Yes, I think that was the proper 
piocedure. It is highly important that every man of 
the squad know what they are going out for. Time is 
not a specially important factor just now. Then, too 
the squad must be gotten into patrol formation. I 
think time is saved by taking a minute or two to issue 
the orders and make sure that every man under¬ 
stands the mission. The men can then go about the 
work so much more intelligently. ’’ 



Director’s Key 


Card No. 3 


9 S^ion No. 3. Read and explain, 

z. explain that no member of class will be called upon to lead 
t£ tr » of thi * kind > ‘hey must know wha? happens 

com^ssfone S d en ofRce n rs. OUt - NeCM8ity f ° r trainini? of non ' 

3 ' ^hatt it Serg6ant Wilkins - Get s q uad out of column and 

4 ' °troons” nkiTwif Informat , ion of enemy and own supporting 
troops, plan of commander; tactical dispositions* signals 

5. Comment: How long to stay out; halting patrol for ord^s 




Flank Guard 


237 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted along the road on which 
the patrol is operating to the point selected for the 
next situation, where it is halted. The Director dis¬ 
tributes the sheets containing Situation No. 4 and 
makes such explanation as may be necessary. 

(Note.—The terrain selected for this and the following situ¬ 
ations should be carefully selected for the purpose of bringing 
out the tactical features included in the solutions. In framing 
up the problem and fitting it to the ground the Director will 
do well to first select the terrain on which Situation No. 4 is to 
be carried out and then construct the problem back from this 
point.) 

The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

You, Sergeant Wilkins, have arrived at this point. 
Your patrol is in the formation originally adopted. 
Nothing has yet been seen or heard of the enemy. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Solution 

The Director: “ Captain Hastings, you have ar¬ 
rived at a point which is sufficiently far out on the 
road to prevent the enemy from firing into the main 
body. You have here very good observation over the 
country to your front and flanks. You have a fairly 
good field of fire. As you know, only cavalary has 
been reported operating on this flank and on account 
of obstacles, wire fences, etc., their operations will 
be confined more or less to the roads. After consid¬ 
ering all of these facts what is your reaction V 9 
Captain Hastings: “I can see no necessity for go- 


238 


Terrain Exercises 

J d °i not tllink anything more could be 
accomplished by doing so. From a position here we 

am y stop any small body and we could 
administer considerable punishment to a body as 

Z5? ( j a ! f we caught them mounted on the 
j- ‘ . . wou ld take up a position here and make my 
disposition so as to cover the road. ” 

director: ‘‘Having decided to take up a posi- 

tenant w!fll V1Clmt n’ jUSt h ° W W ° uld you do U > Lieu¬ 
tenant Wallace, where would you place your men?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: ‘‘There is sufficient space on 

the sofadn^t S } deS r ° ad to accommodate 

fi ® SQua-d. I think I would place them so they can 

fire straight down the road ” y 

The Director: ‘‘What do you think of that solu¬ 
tion, Lieutenant Ralston f” U 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would not do it that way ” 

Lieutenant Ralston: ‘‘‘Well, sir, the men would be 
too much exposed. Suppose the enemy appeared on 
the road with as much as a troop. Wefireinto him 
erhaps the hostile captain’s orders are to check the 
advance of our main body. He decides to take his 

men? would b? 6S ™ ^ r ° a<L 0ur sma ll detach¬ 
ment would be m a precarious situation, only eidit 

men against an entire troop. The men know they 

have no means of getting out of the way T ? 

would be thinking more of their own safety than of 

hitting the enemy. They would shoot wild and the 

chances are that the squad would be ridden dimmed 

destroyed. On the other hand, if we put the Ten d 

e other Slde of the wir e fences, they will know tha” 


Flank Guard 


239 


a mounted charge cannot hurt them. They will have 
more confidence in their ability to stop it and the 
firing will be much more effective. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Then you would place your men on 
the other side of the fence, would you ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “On which side of the road would 
you place them?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “On both sides, sir. Half a 
squad on each side. This disposition would give me 
a good cross-fire on the road.” 

The Director: “Have you any objections to that 
disposition, Captain Harvey?” 

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir. It divides the force 
and makes it very difficult for Sergeant Wilkins to 
control and direct the fire.” 

The Director: “Captain Hodges, do you see any 
other objections?” 

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir. I would not only want 
all the men on the same side of the road but I would 
want them on this side (indicating the side in the di¬ 
rection of which the flank guard is marching). If it 
comes to the point where we are compelled to fall 
back we can do so directly on our own troops and not 
have to expose ourselves while climbing the fences 
and crossing the road. And the field of fire is about 
as good on this favorable side, too. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think your points are well taken. 
Let us decide that we are to place the patrol in posi¬ 
tion on this side (indicate) of the road. Captain 
James just how would you go about it?” 

Captain James: “I would get the men through the 


240 


Terrain Exercises 


fence, and to the vicinity of the position that we are 
to take up.” 

Procedure 

The Director now conducts the class to the place 
where the position is to be taken up. 


Solution 


The Director: “ Captain Janies, let us assume that 
>ou have gotten your squad here. Tell us just what 
orders you would give?” 

Captain James: “I would say: 


“ ‘There is no further information of the enemy. Our 
troops continue the march. 

“ ‘We will take up a position here. 


“ ‘Each man get into a good position along this line 
(indicating) where he has a good field of fire, especially 
on the road. 


Hasker, you keep a lookout towards the right flank. 
Elliott, you keep a lookout down the road. 

^ ‘Johnson you keep a lookout towards the left flank. 
“ T will be here (indicate).’ ” 


The Director: “I think that would cover the situ¬ 
ation for the time being. Would you make any per- 
sonnl i econnaissance to the flunks ?” 

Captain James: “No, sir, I would stay right here. 
ln £> happens I want to be here to direct my 
men If I considered a flank reconnaissance neces- 
would send Corporal Jenkins to make it.” 

The Director You are right. Your place is right 
heie with the squad at this time.” 


Flank Guard 


241 


Flank Guard Card No. 4 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class down the road on which patrol is operating. 

2. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 4 and explain. 

3. Location: Fire on main body; observation; field of fire; cav¬ 

alry confined to roads; reaction. 

4. Position: In road; both sides of road; one side of road. 

5. Conduct class to side of road when position is to be taken up. 

6. Orders: Information of enemy and own troops; plan; dis¬ 

position; place of commander. 

7. Flank reconnaissance. 


Procedure 

It is assumed that the patrol has taken up a posi¬ 
tion on the side of the road towards which the flank 
guard is marching. 

The Director will indicate the exact position of 
each man so that all members of the class will enter 
upon the solution of the next situation on the same 
basis. 

The Director will now distribute the sheets bearing 
Situation No. 5 to the class and make such explana¬ 
tions as may be necessary. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

The patrol has occupied a position at this point. 
At this moment you, Sergeant Wilkins, observe a 
party of enemy cavalry approaching along the road 
at a trot. 

Two troopers are in the lead; at a distance of about 
75 yards two more follow; about 150 yards in rear 
there are four more troopers with short distances be- 



242 


Terrain Exercises 


tween them. Apparently they have not observed 
your patrol. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Procedure 

The Director will point out to the members of the 
class the position of each of the troopers at the mo¬ 
ment. They should be far enough away to allow the 
orders of Sergeant Wilkins to be given. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, what class of 
cavalry detachment do you estimate this to be V ’ 

Lieutenant Baker: “I should say it is a contact pa¬ 
trol sent out from a larger body to reconnoiter. If 
it were the point of an advance guard we would now 
be seeing other troops farther to the rear of them. ” 

The Director: “What would you do?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I would open fire on the cav¬ 
alrymen.” 

The Director: “When would you open fire?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “There are only eight of them. 
We have an ambuscade and ought to be able to bring 
down practically all of them. There would be no 
danger in letting them come close up.” 

The Director: “How close would you let them 
come?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “Well, sir, I would let the lead¬ 
ing men come within 50 yards, if they would do so 
before opening fire. The man farthest away would 
then be about 450 yards distant. I would assign a 
target to each man beginning at the right man taking 


243 


Flank Guard 

the rear trooper and so on through the squad to the 

e . would make it my particular business to see 
that no man passed this point.” 

The Director: “ Just what orders would you give? 
1 want you to state the exact words that you would 
employ in meeting the situation. ? * 

Lieutenant Baker: “As soon as I determine how 
close I am going to let the enemy come before open¬ 
ing fire I will order: 

“ ‘ Four men on ri ght. Range: 450 yards. Target: 
Enemy cavalry on road, four men at rear of patrol. Ren- 
olds and Shane. Range : 300 yards. Target: Enemy cav¬ 
alry on road, two men in center of patrol. Healy fire on 
second man. Corporal Jenkins take the leading man. 
When you get your man fire on the man next farthest 
away. Wait for my command to open fire. 

“ ‘ When the enemy patrol has advanced to the point 
where I have indicated the ranges I will command: 

‘Fire at will.’ ” 

The Director: “Let us assume that the patrol came 
up the load, and that you opened fire in accordance 
with your orders. The two leading men and one of 
the next group of two were brought down and one 
of the latter made his getaway. At least two of the 
last group were brought down. You have then in¬ 
flicted five casualties on the patrol and the three re¬ 
maining men got away. Now, Lieutenant A will hear 
the firing and will wan to know what it is all about. 
How would you meet this requirement, Captain 

Captain Hall: “The action will be over in a minute. 

I would want to get an identification as soon as pos¬ 
sible. I would say to Corporal Jenkins: 


244 


Terrain Exercises 


Go out to the leading trooper we brought down and 
see if you can get an identification. ’ 

While Corporal Jenkins is doing this I will call Hal- 
ley, who is the expert semaphore man to me and say 
to him: 

Go back to the cross roads and signal Lieutenant A: 

‘ “ Ei g h t men, Sixth Cavalry fired on, disabled five of 

them, three got away. Bring me any message that Lieu¬ 
tenant A may send.’ 

I would assume that Corporal Jenkins secured an 
identification on the leading cavalryman. If he did 
not the message would be modified accordingly.” 

Lieutenant Barry: “I do not understand why we 
go to so much trouble at this particular time to get 
an identification.” 

The Director: “Suppose you were commanding the 
Blue force and you ran into the enemy in this lo¬ 
cality. Cavalry troops are operating on your front 
and flanks. If the advance guard picks up an iden¬ 
tification of the 6th Cavalry in its front, the flank 
guard does the same and we get our identification 
here. This information put together indicates to the 
Blue command that he is being opposed by a single 
regiment of cavalry and considering the front he is 
covering he cannot be very strong at any point. But 
suppose the identification of three different regiments 
are picked up. This puts a different aspect on the 
situation. Our commander would estimate that he 
is probably confronted by a cavalry division and his 
plans would have to be made accordingly. Make it a 
general rule that you secure an enemy identification 
when it is possible to do so. It may have little value 


Flank Guard 


245 


at the time and again it may be most valuable. You 
play safe by getting it and sending it in. ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Barry: “I see the point.” 

The Director: “ Lieutenant Hunt, there are five 
dead or wounded men of the enemy lying out there in 
the road. Would you do anything about them?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “Except to secure the identifi¬ 
cation, I would not. The men of the enemy who 
made their escape probably did not have a very clear 
idea of where the fire came from and I would not 
want to surrender any of the advantages I now pos¬ 
sess with respect to position and concealment. When 
the enemy learns of the disaster to his patrol he may 
send out a strong detachment to secure their dead 
and wounded and punish us. Our own main body is 
marching away from us and our position is becoming 
momentarily more dangerous. I could do nothing 
for the enemy wounded. They would have to stay 
where they are for the time being.” 

The Director: “When do you estimate that you 
should leave here?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “In the absence of orders or 
other circumstances which I do not now see, I will 
leave here when the time designated by the flank 
guard commander is up.” 

The Problem 

The Director states the following situation orally: 

“At this moment yon hear quite heavy firing which you 
estimate comes from the direction of the main body. 
There are a few shots from the direction of the flank 
guard. The time you were ordered to remain out here 
is about up.” 


246 


Terrain Exercises 


Solution 

. Director: “Lieuteant Williams, how do you 
size up the situation now?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “Our original mission was 
to cover this road for a certain number of minutes, 
at time is about up now when we will have com- 
mission. New conditions have arisen 
which could not have been provided for when Lieu¬ 
tenant A gave us our original orders and a new sit¬ 
uation confronts us. It would seem to me that our 

mission would now be to ‘ continue to cover the 
road. ’ 

From the firing we have heard, it is possible that 
our mam body has run into a considerable force of 
the enemy on the main road. If this is a Cavalry 
force covering one of Infantry it will soon transfer 
its activities to the flanks and try and cut in on the 
flanks of our main body. Under those circumstances 
our flank guard will have a very important role to 
play. The road that we are on leads directly to the 
flank and rear of our main body and must be guarded 
for the time being. The fact that we have already 
encountered the enemy indicates that he intends to 
make use of it if practicable and the presence of even 
our small force here will make him more cautious 
and delay and hamper his operations. If our main 
body has run into only a small Cavalry force of the 
enemy it will be quickly brushed aside and the situa¬ 
tion will be cleared up in a few minutes. 

“After considering all of these circumstances, I 
think Sergeant Wilkins’ decision would be to remain 
here and continue covering this road.” 

The Director: “I think you are right. Now, hav- 


Flank Guard 


247 


ing arrived at that decision, what are you going to 
do next, Captain Hastings ?” 

Captain Hastings: “The men would be looking to 
me for instructions. I would say: 

It is apparent that our main body has encountered 
a force of the enemy. It is possible that our flank guard 
has halted. 

*We will remain here for the present. 

et 1 Shane, you will keep on the look out for the enemy. 

“ ‘Take off your packs and put them on the ground be¬ 
hind you. 

“ ‘Secure your intrenching tools and each man improve 
his firing position. 

“ ‘I will remain here.’ ” 

The Director: “I think that order would meet the 
immediate requirements.” 

Procedure 

The Director will bring out the points involved in 
the preparation of the position for defense. This 
will depend entirely upon the terrain. By question¬ 
ing members of the class and a discussion the method 
of preparing certain of the individual fire positions 
will be arrived at. The question of obstacles in the 
road to interfere with the enemy’s advance should 
also be considered and discussed. 


248 


Terrain Exercises 


Flank Guard Card No. 5 

Director’s Key 

1* Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 5. Read and ex¬ 
plain. 

2. Estimate of enemy. Contact patrol. Action—open fire on 

enemy. How close to let them come. Fire orders. 

3 . Assumption regarding action of patrol and enemy. Identi¬ 

fication. 

4. Message to flank guard commander. Importance of identifi¬ 

cation. 

5. Action with respect to enemy dead and wounded. 

o. State new situation verbally. Main body encounters enemy. 
Size up new situation. 

o’ m i^sion of patrol. Decision to remain where it is. 
o. Orders for patrol: Information of enemy and own troops; 
remain here; look out for enemy; take off pack; pre¬ 
pare for defense. 

9. Bring out points involved in preparation for defense. Im¬ 
provement of firing position. Obstacles. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 6: 

Halley returns to the patrol. He reports that he 
sent the message to Lieutenant A, and that it was ac¬ 
knowledged. He received the following message 
from Lieutenant A for Sergeant Wilkins: 

Ad\ ance guard meets strong opposition on main road 
—Cavalry. Main body halted. Flank guard halts abreast 
of head of main body. Your patrol will cover cross-road. 
Corporal Vincent being sent to you with his squad.” 

Required: 

What do you, Sergeant Wilkins, do ? 

Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets containing Sit¬ 
uation No. 6 to the class and makes such explanation 
as may be necessary. 







Plank Guard 


249 


Solution 

The Director: “What action would you now take, 
Lieutenant Wallace ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Wallace: “In the first place, I would 
not want Corporal Vincent’s squad to come out here 
on this road. I have been thinking for some little 
time about the fact that there are no troops back at 
the cross-roads where we turned off from the flank 
guard. The enemy finding his efforts blocked on the 
roads leading toward our main body will find that 
opening sooner or later. I would want Corporal 
\ incent to take up a position near the cross-road 

and cover the approaches from the. (direction). 

I would send Halley back to the cross-roads with a 
message to Corporal Vincent to that effect.” 

The Director: “I think that is a proper move on 
your part. The cross road certainly needs to be 
covered. We will assume that Halley has left with 
your message to Corporal Vincent. Would you take 
any other action at the time?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “Yes, sir. The men would 
know that Halley has come back with some informa¬ 
tion. I would give the information to the men in 
order that they may know. I would tell them of 
Corporal Vincent’s squad coming back to reinforce 
us and inform them of what I intend to do with it.” 

The Director: “I think you are right in giving this 
information to your men. They can go about their 
task more intelligently. Would you go back to the 
cross-road to inspect Corporal Vincent’s position 
after he had made his disposition, Lieutenant 
Ralston?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “The flank guard commander 



250 


Terrain Exercises 


lias charged me with the defense of the cross-road. 
He has given me Corporal Jenkins’ and Corporal 
Vincent s squads for the purpose. It is just as im¬ 
portant that I know from personal observation what 
arrangements are made for the defense of the main 
road as it is on this flank. I would turn over the 
defense of this position to Corporal Jenkins and then 
go back and inspect Corporal Vincent’s disposi- 


The Director: “I think you. are right. Are there 
any questions by any member of the class?” (The 
Director will answer any questions that may be 
brought up.) 


Flank Guard 


Card No. 6 


Director’s Key 


1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 6. Read and ex¬ 

plain. 

2. Decision with respect to Corporal Vincent’s squad. Cover 

the cross-road. 

3. Message to Corporal Vincent. 

4. New information received from flank guard commander given 

to men. & 


5. Inspection of Corporal Vincent’s position. 


Procedure 


The class is now conducted back to the cross-road 
where Situation No. 7 is distributed by the Director. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 6: 



lou, Corporal Vincent, commanding the 5th 
uad, have arrived at this point. Here you meet 


from Sergeant Wilkins: 



Flank Guard 


251 


No further information of the enemy. Corporal Jen¬ 
kins’ squad has taken up a position on the road leading 
to the flank about.yards from the cross-road. 

You will take up a position on the road on which the 
flank guard is marching covering the cross-road. 

“Messages to cross-road.” 

Required: 

What action do you, Corporal Vincent, take? 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to consider himself as being Corporal Vincent. 
You have just arrived here with your squad and re¬ 
ceived the order of Sergeant Wilkins. It is up to 
you to select the point where you are going to place 
your squad to cover the road. I want each of you to 
solve this phase of the problem independently. Make 
a rough sketch showing the position, and write out 
the orders that you will issue as squad commander. 
Twenty minutes will be allowed for the purpose. It 
is now.(state time).” 

At the end of twenty minutes the class is assembled. 
The solutions are collected and redistributed. One 
or more members are called upon to read the solu¬ 
tion he has in his possession. 

The position will then be selected and the Director 
will give a statement of the orders that would be 
issued. This may have been previously prepared for 
distribution to the class as “a solution.” 

The solution of each member of the class is return¬ 
ed to him in order that he may compare it with the 
solution submitted by the Director. 




252 


Terrain Exercises 


Explanation 

The Director: “This is the termination of this 
Terrain Exercise. Let us see what we have gotten 
out of it—of what tactical benefit it has been to us. 

“The first situation was devised to show you the 
tactical necessity for a flank guard, the duties that 
devolve upon it, and the formation that is best cal¬ 
culated to enable it to carry out its functions. 

The second situation was devised for the purpose 
of illustrating the necessity for covering approaches 
by which an enemy may cut in on the main body of a 
column and delay or annoy it. Further, the method 

employed in giving orders and instructions while con¬ 
tinuing to march. 

The third situation was devised to give you ex¬ 
perience in giving orders to and conducting a combat 
patrol along the road. 

The fourth situation brings out the elements con¬ 
tained in a tactical 'estimate of the situation’ and the 
selection and occupation of a small position. 

. The fifth situation was devised to give you prac¬ 
tical instruction in the methods of troop leading • 
rendering a quick decision on the appearance of the 
enemy and handling a squad in action. Also in mak- 
lng an estimate of the situation and rendering a deci¬ 
sion when your mission has been carried out and cir¬ 
cumstances which could not have been foreseen have 
arisen and it is necessary to embark on a new mission 
on your own initiative and without orders—in other 
woids, when a man is thrown upon his own resources 
and has to decide for himself what he is going to do 

The sixth situation was devised for the purpose 
of placing the members of the class on their own 


Flank Guard 


253 


1 esponsibility in the selection of a position for the 
eieiise of a particular point and make practical use 
o± the knowledge they had gained in the solution of 
Situations Nos. 4 and 5. 

It is by the constant practice in solving these sit¬ 
uations on the ground that we gain that confidence 
m oui ability to handle them when we have troops 
actually present. The idea of these Terrain Exer¬ 
cises is that you come out here and work out the solu¬ 
tion without troops. Then after you have learned 
how, you bring your troops out and take them 
through the problem according to the solution that 
you have worked out in the Terrain Exercise. 

“I am sure that any of you are now more compe¬ 
tent to handle the operations of a flank guard and a 
force sent out to cover a particular point. I am sure 
that you would have a very good idea of what to do if 
in actual service you were confronted with situations 
similar to those we have considered in our exercise 
today. ” 


Flank Guard Card No. 6 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class back to cross road. 

2. Distribute Situation No. 7. Read and explain. 

3. Solution of situation. Each member of class consider him¬ 

self as being Corporal Vincent. Select position, make 
sketch, write out orders. 

4. At end of twenty minutes collect solutions. Read one or 

more of them. Arrive at solution. Distribute solution 
to the class. 

5. Explain purpose of each situation. Necessity for flank 

guard; covering approaches; giving orders on march; 
conduct of small patrol; estimate of situation; selection 
of position; troop leading and rendering quick decisions; 
changing to new mission; solution of problem on own 
responsibility. 

































Terrain Exercise No. 7 . 

Posting an Outpost 

The Problem 

General Situation: 

The ( a ) forms the boundary between hostile states. 
A Blue force is concentrating at (&). Red troops 
have been reported in the direction of (c). 

Special Situation—Blue: 

A Blue detachment consisting of one regiment of 
Infantry has been sent out toward the border as a 
covering force. It is disposed as follows: 

The regiment (less 2nd and 3rd Battalions) on the 
(d) road; 2d Battalion on the ( e ) road; 3d Battalion 
on the (/) road. 

The 2d Battalion marching on the (e) road, with 
Company E as advance guard, has reached (g), 
where the battalion commander decides to halt for 
the night. It is now 3 o’clock p. m. The column has 
halted, and the company commanders have assembled 
at this point. 

The battalion commander issues verbal orders as 
follows: 

Small detachments of the enemy have been reported at 
(h) and ( i). Our 3rd Battalion is halted for the night at 

(k); our regiment (less 2d and 3d Battalions) is halted 
for the night at (l). 

This battalion halts for the night at (m). March con¬ 
ditions cease. 


255 


256 


Terrain Exercises 


“The advance guard will furnish the outpost along the 
line (n). 

“The remainder of the battalion will bivouac, Company 
F at (0) ; Company G at (0) ; Company H at (0); Head¬ 
quarters Company at (0). In case of attack the outpost 
will be supported. 

“The field trains will join the troops. 

“Messages to ( p).” 

(Note.—Company E is organized in accordance with T. O. 
28-W. See Appendix 1.) 

Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(a) In designating the boundary line, some na¬ 
tural topographical or geographical feature should 
be selected, such as a river, creek, canal, crest of a 
ridge, etc. In this problem it may be assumed that 
the halt of the battalion for the night is made just 
within the boundary or across the boundary in enemy 
territory. The choice will depend upon the location 
of suitable ground for the outpost with a view to 
bringing out the elements involved in the posting of 
the outpost. 

( b ) A point within friendly territory. Should 
be a march or two from the boundary. 

(c) A point within enemy territory. Should be a 
march or two from the boundary. 

( d ) , (e), (/) Detachments are sent out to cover the 
concentration of troops when the concentration is 
made at a point where there is danger that the enemy 
may attempt to interfere with it. Such detachments 
proceed toward the border on the main routes by 
which the enemy must advance, (d) Would be the 
next main road to the left of the road (e) on which 


257 


Posting an Outpost 

the 2d Battalion is advancing; (/) would be the next 
main road to the right of the road on which the 2d 
Battalion is advancing. This places the 2d Bat¬ 
talion in the center of the formation. 

(fiO A point in the vicinity of the place where the 
terrain Exercise is to be conducted. 

(h) and (i) The places where the enemy troops are 
reported to be. They should be several miles away 
from ( g ), where the battalion is to halt for the night. 

(k) The place where the 3d Battalion halts for the 
night. 

(0 The place where the regiment (less 2d and 3d 
Battalions) halts for the night. The three places 
where the battalions halt should form a general line 
covering the place where the Blue forces are concen¬ 
trating. 

(to) The place where our battalion bivouacs for 
the night. 

(n) Indicate the general line that the outpost is to 
occupy. If it is impossible to do this it may be stated 
as follows: “Covering the approaches from the 
(south, north, etc.).” 

(o) Designates the locality where each of the com¬ 
panies of the battalion is to bivouac for the night. 
The companies should be separated, and there should 
be cover from aerial observation if practicable. 

( p ) The headquarters of the battalion. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 1: 

You, Captain E, are in command of Company E, 
which is now the advance guard, and has been desig¬ 
nated to form the outpost for the night. Your com¬ 
pany is in advance guard formation on the road. 


258 


Terrain Exercises 


Required: 

The action you, Captain E, take and the orders 
you issue. 

Procedure 


The members of the class are assembled at ( m ) 
(see explanation of symbols), where the battalion is 
to halt for the night. 


Explanation 

The Director: “Before taking up the problem for 
solution I want to make a few remarks on the subject 
of the protection of a body of troops while in bivouac, 
and to review briefly the duties and formation of an 
outpost. 

As a command on the march protects itself from 
surprise by covering detachments called advance 
guards, flank guards and rear guards, so also does a 
command at a halt protect itself by a system of cover¬ 
ing detachments denominated outposts. 

Duties. Like advance guards on the march, the 
outpost is charged with the duties of observation and 
resistance. 

“Specifically these duties are: 

“!• To protect the main body so that the troops 
may rest undisturbed. 

“2. In case of attack, to check the advance of the 
enemy long enough to enable the main body to make 
dispositions to meet him. 

“3. To reconnoiter the enemy, prevent his recon¬ 
naissance and give timely warning of the approach 
of hostile bodies. 

“ Subdivisions .—The outpost is divided into two 
general lines. The first, which is called the ‘line of 


259 


Posting an Outpost 

observation,’ does the watching for the enemy and 
prevents his small bodies from getting any informa¬ 
tion about our troops or annoying them. The second 
is a ‘fighting line,’ which holds off larger bodies. 

These lines must cover the front and flanks of the 
troops at rest. The ‘watching line’ must be so lo¬ 
cated that the watchers out in front will be able to 
see the enemy before he gets close enough to do dam¬ 
age. The ‘fighting line’ must be so located that it 
will have what we call a ‘good field of fire;’ that is, 
the ground in front must not be such that it will hide 
the movements of the enemy and allow him to get 
within effective rifle range without coming under our 
fire. 

“Formation .—The formation of an outpost may 
best be described by referring to an outstretched 

hand. 

“Hold your left hand in front of you with the 
thumb and fingers extended and pointing to the 
front, palm of hand down. 

“The wrist will be the location of the troops in 
camp or in bivouac. 

“The knuckle joint of the second finger will be the 
location of the reserve of the outpost. This is the 
body of troops that is held out of the fight until the 
direction of the enemy’s main attack is developed, 
when it is thrown in to meet it, or to make what we 
call a ‘counter-attack.’ In very small outposts this 
reserve is usually omitted. 

“The second joints of the fingers and thumb will 
mark the positions occupied by the ‘supports. ’ These 
are the fighting troops and they occupy the fighting 
line of the outpost. From these supports, small de- 


260 


Terrain Exercises 


tachments, which we call ‘outguards/ are sent to the 
front. 

“The first joints of the fingers and thumb will 
mark the positions of the outguards. These are 
classified as pickets, sentry squads and cossack posts. 
A picket consists of two or more squads and is posted 
so as to cover the most important route by which the 
enemy may come. The sentry squad consists of one 
rifle squad. The cossack post is composed of a non¬ 
commissioned officer and three men. 

“The tips of the fingers and thumb will mark the 
line of the sentinels. These are the ears and eyes 
of the outpost system. 

“The sentinels are sent out to the front from the 
outguards. A picket posts one double sentinel post 
for each of its squads. Each sentry squad is charged 
with maintaining one double sentinel post. The 
cossack post maintains a single sentinel who is 
posted nearby. 

“Are there any questions?” 

Procedure 

The Director will endeavor to answer any ques¬ 
tions that may be asked by the members of the class. 
After all questions have been cleared up, the Director 
will hand a copy of the problem to each member of 
the class. A few minutes are allowed for them to 
read it and get oriented. 

The Director: “Please give me your attention 
while we go over the problem.” 

The Director reads the problem aloud, each mem¬ 
ber of the class following from the copy in his pos¬ 
session. The direction of places mentioned are 
pointed out, 


261 


Posting an Outpost 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, give a brief 
statement of the tactical situation as you understand 

Lieutenant Hunt states his understanding of the 
tactical situation. As he proceeds, the Director 
makes such explanations as may be desirable. One 
or more additional members of the class may be 

Aii*! t.° state their version of the situation. 

All of this is for the purpose of fixing the elements of 

the problem m the minds of the members of the class 

and prevent any subsequent misunderstanding of 
them. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Barry, what do you 
estimate the mission of our battalion to be?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “We are an element of the force 
sent out to cover the concentration of the Blue forces 
and prevent the enemy from interfering with it ” 

The Director: “We have not yet gained contact 
with the enemy. Why do we halt at this time ?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “There may be one or more 
reasons for it. In the first place, we are a detach¬ 
ment of a larger force (our regiment), and it is prob¬ 
able that before we started out, instructions were 
given our battalion commander to halt in this loca- 

liiy, so as to be on the general line of all the covering 
troops.” 

The Director: “That is correct. Our battalion 
must conform to the general plan of the operation. 

“Before going further let us consider the process 
by which our battalion commander arrived at his 
decision to halt and make the disposition indicated 
in his order. He has sized up the situation with re- 


262 


Terrain Exercises 


spect to his mission, the enemy, our own troops; con¬ 
sidered the plans of action open to him and the en- 
emy; and the terrain. Based on all of this he de¬ 
cides to halt for the night with the advance guard as 
the outpost and the other companies bivouacking as 
indicated in the order. Now, let us see how well this 
order conforms to the form laid down in Field Serv¬ 
ice Regulations. Captain Hall, what are the ele¬ 
ments of an order as applied to the halt of a com¬ 
mand on the march?” 

Captain Hall: ‘ 6 The first part contains information 
of the enemy and our own troops. The next is the 
plan of the commander in general terms. In this 
case it is merely to halt for the night, with the added 
sentence to the effect that march conditions cease. 
Next comes the tactical dispositions in which each 
element of the command is given orders as to just 
what it is to do. The last section of this paragraph 
tells what action is to be taken in case the enemy 
should make an attack. Then comes the disposition 
of the trains or administrative arrangements, and 
finally the location of the battalion C. P. is indicated 
by telling where messages are to be sent. All of this 
is included in the order, and I should say that every 
essential point has been covered satisfactorily.” 

The Director: "Lieutenant Baker, why is Com¬ 
pany E detailed to furnish the outpost?” 

Lieutenant Baker: "It is the general rule that 
tioops aie detailed on covering duty for a period of 
twenty-four hours. Company E has been our ad¬ 
vance guard for today’s march. If the battalion 
continues the march again tomorrow mornin 0, 
another rifle company will be detailed to form the ad- 


263 


Posting an Outpost 

vance guard. It will get into advance guard forma¬ 
tion before it reaches Company E’s outpost line, and 
when the advance guard support crosses the line of 
outpost supports it assumes responsibility for the 
protection of the column, the outpost troops are with¬ 
drawn and take their proper place in the column. 
Then, too, the advance guard is in the best position 
to continue the protection of the battalion. It has 
merely to change its formation from an advance 
guard to that of an outpost, which involves the least 
marching on the part of the troops.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “We will now go forward to the 
point where the support of the advance guard is 
halted on the road. How far would that be, Captain 
James?” 

Captain James: “I should say that the support 
should be about 500 yards in advance of the main 
body of the battalion.” 

The class is now conducted about 500 yards down 
the road to the place where the support of the ad¬ 
vance guard is supposed to be halted. 

The Director: “Before proceeding further with 
the problem it is necessary for us to decide upon the 
formation of the advance guard at this time. Just 
what do you think the formation would be, Captain 
James?” 

Captain James: “The support would be right here 
in column of squads on the road. It would consist 
of the company (less one platoon and two connecting 
files). About 400 yards farther down the road would 
be the advance party, consisting of one platoon, from 


t 


264 


Terrain Exercises 


which there would be a point of one squad, about 150 
yards farther to the front. ’ ’ * 

The Director: “I think we can all agree on those 
dispositions and proceed to the solution of our prob¬ 
lem based on them. Now, let each member of the 
class consider himself to be Captain E, commanding 
the advance guard. You have attended the assembly 
of officers at the head of the main body and received 
the major's orders. You have now returned to the 
company and are ready to go ahead with your part 
of the operation, that of posting the outpost. Just 
how are you going about the task that has been allot¬ 
ted to you ? Captain Hodges, tell us what you would 
do." 

Solution 

Captain Hodges: U I would first send a runner to 
Lieutenant M, commanding the advance party, tell¬ 
ing him to report to me here. TYhile waiting for 
Lieutenant M to come back I would size up the situ¬ 
ation and decide upon my tactical dispositions." 

The Director: AYhat would be your primary dis¬ 
positions ?" 

Captain Hodges: I would have a line of supports 
on which I would employ one platoon and one section 
and a reserve consisting of the rest of the company." 

The Dii ector: That would be a reasonable dispo¬ 
sition. How many supports would you have Cap¬ 
tain Harvey?" 

Captain Harvey: “I would have three supports_ 

one on the main road and one at a suitable interval on 

each side of the road. There would be a section in 
each support." 


* Captain James would include 
that would be out at this time. 


in his dispositions any flank patrols 



265 


Posting an Outpost 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, do you agree 
with that disposition?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “No, sir. It seems to me that 
two supports would meet the situation better. In 
the first place, this main road is the route on which 
any considerable force of the enemy must advance 
after dark, and I would want to cover it with a rela¬ 
tively strong force. I would put one support on the* 
road and have it extend over to the right for a suf¬ 
ficient distance to cover the front and the immediate 
right flank. It would extend its front to the left 
of the main road. I would have support No. 2 off to 
the left to cover that flank.* 

“Support No. 1 would consist of one platoon and 
No. 2 of one section.” 

The Director: “Explain why you extend the front 
of your support No. 1 to the left of the road?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “So that the boundary line be¬ 
tween supports will not fall on the road. One man 
must be made responsible for the covering of this 
main road, and if I make it the boundary line be¬ 
tween supports, even if I include it in the front of 
one of them, it will be more or less neglected. But 
if I extend the front of support No. 1 beyond the road 
to the left, I am reasonably sure that it will be taken 
care of properly.” 

The Director: “That is the point I wanted to bring 
out. I hope that all the members of the class see it. 
We have now to decide upon the troops to be desig- 

* The terrain may be such as to cause a reversal of this disposition. 
The idea is that the support on the flank should be posted so as to 
cover the most exposed flank. 



266 


Terrain Exercises 


nated for each of the supports. What would be 
your decision as to that, Lieutenant Wallace V’ 
Lieutenant Wallace: “I would have the first pla¬ 
toon, which now forms the advance party, form sup¬ 
port No. 1 which will be posted on this main and 


cover the front from that . (indicating right 

boundary of front) to that. (indicating left 


boundary of front). The first section of the second 
platoon would form support No. 2. It would be 
posted at . and cover the front from . to 


The Director: “That seems to be a reasonable dis¬ 
position. Where would you have your reserve V 7 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would have it posted at 

The Director: “There is one point on which we 
have not yet touched. That is the matter of the 
covering of the posting of the outguards. What 
would you do about that, Captain Hastings?” 

Captain Hastings: “I would let each support cover 
the posting of its own outguards. I believe they can 
do it better and more efficiently than any detachment 
that may be made from the rest of the company for 
the purpose.” 

The Director: “Let us now assume that Lieuten¬ 
ant M has arrived and you are all ready to issue your 
orders. Just how would you go about it, Lieutenant 
Williams?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would assemble the offi¬ 
cers, platoon sergeants and section leaders in front 
of the company. I would give the command: 1. Com¬ 
pany, 2. ATTENTION, and follow with AT EASE. 








267 


Posting an Outpost 

I would then say: ‘ Let me have your attention. ’ I 
would issue my orders as follows: 

Small detachments of the enemy have been reported 
at (h) and ( i ) (indicating where the places are). Our 
3rd Battalion is halted for the night at (k). Our regiment 
(less 2nd and 3rd Battalions) is halted for the night at 
(l). Our battalion halts for the night at (m) (point out 
location). March conditions have ceased.* 

“ ‘This company furnishes the outpost along the (n) 
(point out general line). 

Lieutenant M, with the first platoon, will form sup¬ 
port No. 1, which, posted on the road at., will cover 

the front from. (inclusive) to. (inclusive). 

‘Lieutenant N, with the second platoon (less one sec¬ 
tion), will form support No. 2, which, posted at ., 

will cover the front from . (exclusive) to 

(inclusive). 

“ ‘The remainder of the company will be posted at 
.as reserve. 

‘The rolling kitchen will be with the reserve. Meals 
will be cooked and distributed to the supports. 

“ ‘Messages to the reserve.’ ” 

Procedure 

The Director: “ You will note that the order given 
by Lieutenant Williams follows the form of the five- 
paragraph order and covers all essentials. Are there 
any questions ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Hunt: “It seems to me that we are im¬ 
posing on the first platoon. They have been on ad¬ 
vance party duty all day, and now we propose to 


* See explanation of Symbols. 










268 


Terrain Exercises 


keep them on front-line observation duty all night.” 

he Director: “If the platoon had had any serious 
contact with the enemy during the day, it would have 
been proper to bring it back to the reserve, but they 
have just been marching along on the road. They 
have had practically no flank patroling to do and are 
in just as good shape as the rest of the company. I 
can see no reason for not detailing them for support 

duty tonight. The platoon is out in front, near the 
place where it is to be posted. 

,. J .V l,v °tker questions ? There appear to be none, 
ow I w ant each member of the class to write 
out, on his pad, the order of Captain E. Try to get 
the proper form and wording for each sentence in it 
and cover the points brought out by Lieutenant Wil¬ 
liams in his solution. ’ ’ 

The necessary time is allowed for this. The solu¬ 
tions are collected and redistributed. One or more 
members of the class may be called upon to read the 
solution in lus possession and comment upon the 
wording and form of the order. 

The Director will then distribute slips of paper 
containing the order of Captain E as given. This is 
done m order that each member of the class may 
compare his work with it and that the situations fol¬ 
lowing and their solution may be based on it. 


Posting an Outpost 


269 


0ut P° st Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Prepare copies of the problem and Situation No. 1, also the 

solution to Situation No. 1, a copy for each member of 
the class. 

2. Conduct the class to the point on the road where the bat¬ 

talion is halted and where it will bivouac for the night. 

3. Make short talk on the protection of troops in bivouac and 

the formation and duties of outposts: (a) How a com¬ 
mand protects itself at a halt; (b) Duties of outposts; 
(c) Subdivision of outposts; ( d ) Formation of outposts 
(illustrate by reference to outstretched hand), main 
body, reserve, supports, outguards, sentinels. 

4. Distribute sheets bearing problem and Situation No. 1. 

5. Head problem aloud and question members of the class on 

the tactical situation: mission of battalion; why halt; 
estimation of the situation; elements of field order; com¬ 
pare with battalion commander’s order; why Company E 
for outpost. 

6. Conduct class to point where support of advance guard is 

supposed to be. 

7. Discuss formation of advance guard. Each man now con¬ 

sider himself as being Captain E. 

8. Discuss formation of outpost: Primary dispositions; num¬ 

ber of supports; why support on main road; boundaries 
of support front; location of supports; location of re¬ 
serve ; covering posting of outguards. 

9. Final solution of problem: Preliminaries; order of Captain 

E; five-paragraph order; why first platoon forms one 
support. 

10. Have members of class write out order. Collect solutions 
and redistribute them. Distribute copies of Captain E’s 
order. Read and discuss solutions. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the point on the road 
where the advance party is supposed to be halted. 

The Director: “We are now at the point where the 
first platoon, which is the advance party of the ad¬ 
vance guard, is halted. Lieutenant M has joined his 
platoon and is ready to proceed with the execution of 
the task alloted to him.” 








270 


Terrain Exercises 
The Problem 


Situation No. 2: 

\ on, Lieutenant M, have joined your platoon here, 
lhe platoon has been designated to form support No. 
1. The Captain’s order was as follows: 

Lieutenant M, with the first platoon will form support 
No. 1, which, posted on the road at-, will cover the 


, 7 x--ut -, Will CUVC 

front from . (inclusive) to . (inclusive) 


> > 


Required: 

Carry out your mission. 

Procedure 

l I ? irector reac ^ s Situation No. 2 aloud and ex¬ 
plains that each member of the class should now con- 
sider himself to be Lieutenant M, commanding the 
nrst platoon, designated to form support No. 1. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, how would you 
go about carrying out your mission?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would first size up the situa- 
ion an aurve at a decision as to what I am going to 
do and how I am going to do it. ” 

The Director: “How is security provided for dur- 
mg the time that the outpost is being posted?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “By sending out some troops to 
cover the posting of the outguards. This is some- 
imes pi ovided for by the outpost commander detail- 
mg a unit for the purpose of covering all the out- 
guaids and then withdrawing to the reserve. The 
alternative is to have each support cover the posting 

^ « wn outguards. The latter system has been 
adopted m this problem, and we will have to provide 
our own covering troops.” 





Posting an Outpost 271 

The Director: “What troops would you detail for 
this duty?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would send out the first sec¬ 
tion (less the squad on duty as point) under the sec¬ 
tion commander. I would have the point withdraw 
to the support as soon as the covering troops have 
taken over the duty of security.” 

The Director: “That seems to be a reasonable solu¬ 
tion. Into what parts is an outpost support divided, 
Lieutenant Barry?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “Into the support proper and 
the outguards. From the outguards sentinels are 
posted.” 

The Director: “What are the duties assigned to 
each of the component parts of the support?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “The support proper is the 
fighting element of the outpost. It is posted on the 
line where the outpost will make its stand. The out¬ 
guards with their sentinels from the observation ele¬ 
ment. They are posted on the line of observation.” 

Captain Hall: “That may be the usual line up for 
the support. But is it not a fact that sometimes the 
outguards are posted on the fighting line?” 

The Director: “Yes. It may be that the line of 
observation is also the best fighting line for the sup¬ 
ports. In that case we say ‘the line of observation 
and the line of resistance coincide’—that is, they are 
the same. When we issue the order for the support 
we make provision for that by stating: ‘In case of 
attack the outguards will be supported. ’ This means 
that the outguards will hold their positions and the 
supports will come up to them in case the enemy at¬ 
tacks.” 



272 


Terrain Exercises 

Captain Hall: ‘In that case, why not place the sup- 

poit light up on the line of resistance in the first 
place V 

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, can you answer 
Captain Hall s question?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I believe I can give a reason 
tor it. It we should place the support right up on the 
me of outguards we would commit it to one position, 
and m case of attack it would be difficult to move it 
to meet the enemy’s main effort. If we keep it at a 
central point to the rear of the line, we can readily 

“"’T/ ltp) an - v pomt where it may be most needed. ’ ’ 
The Director: “You are right. We do not want 
to commit our support to action until we find out the 
direction of the enemy’s attack. The shifting of 
troops along a front line is a most difficult and hazar- 

Hall ® peratl0n- 1 hope y° u see thc Point, Captain 

Captain Hall: “Yes, sir. I do.” * 

The Director: “How many outguards do you think 
are required on the front assigned to the support, 

Captain Jones: “I should have one on the main 
road leading toward the enemy; another on the right 

of the road in the vicinity of. (indicating) ; and 

another to the left of the road in the vicinity of 

(indicating). I think this would be sufficient for ob- 
servation purposes/ ’ 


In the preparation of the Terrain Exercise and fitting the problem 

fine of ground - the Director should decide upon the location of the 
line of observation and the line of resistance and bring out the points 

" fzj- ‘ h °"“ 





273 


Posting an Outpost 

The Director: “Upon what main elements do you 
base the strength of these outguards?” 

Captain Jones: ‘ 6 On the number of sentinel posts 
they must maintain. If a double sentinel post is re¬ 
quired, a sentry squad should be allotted to the out- 
guard. If only a single sentinel is required, the out- 
guard should be a cossack post.” 

The Director: “That is exactly the point I wanted 
to bring out. We will take it up in detail later on 
in the problem. Let us assume that three outguards 
will be required to cover the front. No. 1, on the 
right of the road, is to be a sentry squad; No. 2, 
posted on the road, is also to be a sentry squad; and 
No. 3, posted on the left of the road, is to be a cos- 
sack post. How many men in a cossack post, Cap¬ 
tain Hodges?” 

Captain Hodges: “A noncommissioned officer and 
three men. This number furnishes a commander for 
the post and three reliefs for a single sentinel post,' ’ 

The Director: “That is correct. Are there any 

questions on the points that we have been discuss¬ 
ing?” * 

Solution 

The Director: “We are now ready to issue Lieuten¬ 
ant M’s order for the establishment of support No. 

* The Director should take advantage of every opportunity to get 
members of the class to ask questions. It is by this means that we are 
able to bring out the tactical points of the problems and make them 
clear. If no questions are asked, it is natural to assume that the 
members of the class understand everything that is under discussion, 
whereas many of them may not understand at all. The more ques¬ 
tions a Director can get out of a class the more effective will the 
training be. 



274 


Terrain Exercises 


1* Captain Hodges, please tell us the first and sec¬ 
ond paragraphs of the order. * ’ 

Captain Hodges: “I would tell the men about 
where the enemy is and all I know about our own 
troops and then tell them what we are going to do.” 

The Director: “All right. Now, assume that you 
are Lieutenant M, and the rest of us here are the 
members of your platoon. Put all you have said in 
the form of an order to us . 99 

Captain Hodges: “You want me to do everything 
I would do if I were Lieutenant M?” 

The Director: “Exactly.” 

Captain Hodges: “I would give the command: 1. 
Platoon, 2. ATTENTION, and order CLOSE UP. I 
assume that the men are in columns of files, one on 
each side of the road. I then give the command AT 
EASE, and caution the men, ‘Let me have your at¬ 
tention. 1 ’ I direct, ‘Noncommissioned officers as¬ 
semble here.’ I then give the order for the estab¬ 
lishment of the support as follows: 

Small detachments of the enemy have been reported 
at ( h ) and ( i ). Our 3d Battalion is halted for the night 
at W- Our regiment (less the 2d and 3d Battalions) is 
halted for the night at (l). Our Battalion halts for the 
night at (ra). Our company furnishes the outpost with 
the second platoon (less one section) as support No. 2 at 

. an d the remainder of the company as reserve at. 

March conditions have ceased. 

‘This platoon forms support No. 1.’ ” 

The Director: “'Captain Harvey, what does the 
third paragraph of the order deal with?” 

Captain Harvey: “With the disposition of troops.” 


\ 




275 


Posting an Outpost 

llie Director: "‘Will you state what you think 
should go into it?” 

Captain Harvey: “Yes, sir. I think it should be 
as follows: 

Sergeant X, with the first section (less one squad), 
will cover the posting of the outguards, and on comple¬ 
tion of that duty withdraw to the support. 

Corporal W, with the fourth squad, will form out- 

guard No. 1, which, posted in the vicinity of ., will 

cover the front from. (inclusive) to. (inclusive). 

Corporal V, with the fifth squad, will form outguard 

No. 2, which, posted on the main road at.will cover 

the front from. (exclusive) to . (exclusive). 

1 Corporal T, with the front rank of the sixth squad, 

will form outguard No. 3, which, posted at ., will 

cover the front from. (inclusive) to. (inclusive). 

Communication with outguard No. 1 of support No. 2 
will be maintained. 

‘The remainder of the platoon will be posted at. 

as support. 

“ ‘In case of attack the outguards will be supported.’ ” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, what elements 
does the rest of the order contain?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “The next paragraph contains 
the administrative arrangements. In the platoon 
the main thing is the messing of the men. They will 
all want to know about the arrangements for meals. 
I would say: 

“ ‘Meals will be distributed to the outguards by details 
from the support.’ 

“The next item is the designation of the place 
where to send messages. 












276 


Terrain Exercises 


“Message to the support.” 

‘ ‘ I would then direct: MOVE OUT. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Director: “I believe we have gone over and 
discussed the salient features of the problem. Now, 
I desire each member of the class to write out Lieu¬ 
tenant M’s order on his pad. Try to get it in the 
proper form and use as far as possible the wording 
as stated by Captain Hodges, Captain Harvey and 
Lieutenant Ralston. ’ ’ 

When the written orders have been completed they 
are disposed of in the same manner as indicated un¬ 
der Situation No. 1. 


0ut P ast Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to point on road where advance party is halted. 

2. Hand out Situation No. 2. Read and explain that each 

member the class is now supposed to be Lieutenant M. 

3. Security while outpost troops are getting into position. 

4. Mam elements of support line-observation, resistance. 

When they coincide. Location of support. 

5. Number of outguards required. Basis of strength of out- 

guards; sentinel posts; sentry squads; cossack posts. 

. Details of Lieutenant M’s order. Information of enemy and 
own troops. Plan of commander. Disposition of troops: 
Three outguards, location, strength, front each is to cover, 
location of support, action in case of attack. Meals. 
Messages. 

7. Have class write order. Collect solutions and redistribute 
them. Read and discuss solutions. 


Explanation 

The Director: “The next phase of our problem 
deals with the matter of covering the posting of the 




277 


Posting an Outpost 

outguards. In the posting of the outguards there will 
unavoidably be more or less moving around and ex¬ 
posure to view of the enemy’s patrols, should any be 
lurking in the vicinity. The noncommissioned offi¬ 
cers will be seeking out the best positions for their 
outguards, selecting observation posts for their sen¬ 
tinels and making arrangements for defense. The 
officers will be moving from point to point along the 
line making inspections, pointing out errors, recti¬ 
fying the position of the various elements and mak¬ 
ing a sketch of the sector covered. 

“In order that all of this may be accomplished in 
security, it is necessary to have covering detachments 
well out to the front to prevent small parties of the 
enemy interfering with the work in hand or making 
observations that would enable them to form an esti¬ 
mate of the position occupied by the outposts. 

“There are two methods by which the covering 
force may accomplish its mission: 

“1. It may deploy as a line of skirmishers at 
greatly extended intervals. 

“2. It may cover the front with a number of small 
patrols. 

“No hard and fast rule can be laid down that will 
provide for all contingencies. The first method has 
the disadvantage of being most difficult for the non¬ 
commissioned officers to control the action of the men. 
The second method possesses the great advantage of 
having each group directly under the control of a 
leader, so that in case the enemy’s patrols are en¬ 
countered and it is necessary to drive them back, 
there can be concert of action instead of dependence 
on the decisions of individual men as to what it to be 


278 




Terrain Exercises 

done in the emergency. The method to be employed 
will depend upon circumstances, the nature of the 
country, the number of men available for the duty 
and the proximity of the enemy. It may be advis¬ 
able to use a combination of the two systems/ * 

The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

You, Sergeant X, have been detailed to cover the 
posting of the outguards. Lieutenant M’s order to 
you is as follows: 

“Sergeant X, with the first section (less one squad), 
will cover the posting of the outguards and on completion 
of that duty withdraw to the support.” 

The troops have been turned over to you and you 
have been directed to move out. 

Required: 

Carry out your mission. 

Procedure 

The Director reads the situation aloud and calls 
upon one or more members of the class to state his 
understanding of it. 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to consider himself as being Sergeant X. You 
have your troops right here on the road and’every¬ 
thing is ready to proceed with the work in hand. Just 
how do you go about carrying out your mission? 
Lieutenant Wallace, what is the first move you would 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would want to get my men 
away from the rest of the platoon so I can give them 


279 


Posting an Outpost 

their instructions without having their attention 
diverted by other things." 

The Director: “ All right. Let us assume that you 
have done so and you have them right here. We are 

now ready to proceed. Go ahead with your solu¬ 
tion." 

Solution 

Lieutenant Wallace: “In the first place, I would 
not want the men to be burdened with their packs, so 
I would have them taken off and piled here." 

The Director: “Would you have them take off the 
entire pack? Tell us just what equipment they 
would carry.'' 

Lieutenant Wallace: “Only the rifle and belt." 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, do you agree 
with that?" 

Captain Hastings: “No, sir. I would have the 
men take off only the rolls. I would have them carry 
the haversack with them. The Infantry pack is de¬ 
signed for this very purpose. We can relieve the 
men of the burdensome part of the pack and still re¬ 
tain the essentials. I do not believe a man should 
ever be without his haversack in the field." 

The Director: “You are correct. Let us assume 
that we have taken the rolls off and piled them here. 
Now, Lieutenant Wallace, what are you going to 
do?" 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I am going to give my or¬ 
ders. All the men of the section have heard the pla¬ 
toon commander's orders about the enemy and our 
own troops, so there is no necessity for repeating 
them. The next thing is to tell the men what our 


280 


Terrain Exercises 


mission is to be. I would cover this by the simple 
statement: 


This section (less the first squad) will cover the 
posting of the outguards.’ 


I will now have to decide upon the formation that 
1 am going to take up. The front to be covered is too 
extensive to be covered by a line of skirmishers, and 
besides I do not approve of such a formation. It is 
too difficult to control the operations. I would use 
the patrol method. Divide the section up into small 
patrols and keep a small support. ” 

The Director: “'Captain Hastings, do you agree 
with such dispositions?” 

p j . . i ^ sir. I think the patrol 

oi mation is best. It has many advantages over the 
line ot skirmishers.” 

ha\-eV ,I)ireCt0r: <<H ° W many P atrols would you 


Captain Hastings: “I should have three patrols 
of a leader and three men each. This would account 
ioi the second squad and the front rank of the third 
squad. I would keep the rear rank of the third 
squad under my own control as a support.” 

The Director: “Based on that disposition, what 
orders would you give?” 

Captain Hastings: “I would say: 


Coipoial D, take the front rank of your squad and 

move out to the right oblique in the direction of that. 

Private E, you are detailed as acting corporal. Take 

the rear rank of the second squad and move to the front 
along this road. 


< ( 


Corporal F, take the front rank of your squad and 



281 


Posting an Outpost 

move out to the left oblique in the direction of that 

The rear rank of the third squad will accompany 
me. I will march 200 yards in rear of Private E’s patrol. 

Patrols will advance about 1,200 yards to the front. 
Keep in communication with me. Remain out until you 
receive orders to withdraw. 

“ 'Messages to me. 

Take charge of your patrols and move out. ’ 

I believe these orders would set the covering 
troops in motion.” 

The Director: “I agree with you. Are there any 
questions ? I asume that when no questions are 
asked every member of the class not only under¬ 
stands what is being done, but also the reasons for 
doing it that particular way. If there is ever any 
doubt in your mind about any part of the problem 
or the solution, you should ask questions and demand 
explanations until the matter is entirely cleared up.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to write out Sergeant X’s orders on his pad. 
The information about the enemy and our own troops 
that has already been given to the men by the platoon 
commander need not be repeated. The first para¬ 
graph might be. 

‘You have heard what the platoon commander said 
about the enemy and our own troops. There is no fur¬ 
ther information.’ ” 

When all the members of the class have completed 
writing the order the papers are collected and redis¬ 
tributed. One or more members may be called upon 



282 


Terrain Exercises 


to read the order in their possession and comment 
upon it. The whole idea is to impress the solution 
or each phase of the problem so firmly in the minds 
of the members of the class that, in case they should 
ever be called upon in active service to meet a similar 
situation, they would know exactly how to go about it. 


0ut P° st Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1* Explain necessity for covering the posting of the outguards. 
Formations that may be used: Skirmishers: patrols: 
advantages of patrol system. 

2. Pass out problem and read it. Have members of class ex¬ 

plain their version. 

3. Disposition of packs. Keep haversacks. Remove rolls. 

4. Orders: Information of enemy and own troops known. Sec¬ 

ond paragraph. Dispositions. Orders for patrols, 
three patrols and support. How far to go out. When 
to return. 

5. Asking questions. 

6. Have class write out solution. Collect and redistribute solu¬ 

tions. Read and comment on solutions. 

7. Explain object of problem. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted down the road to the 
point where outguard No. 2 is to be posted. 

Explanation 

T he Director: “The order of the platoon com¬ 
mander requires Corporal V, with the fifth squad, to 
post outguard No. 2 on the main road in this vicinity 

and covering the front from . (exclusive) to 

.(exclusive). 

(Note.—The Director points out the limits of the front to 
be covered by the outguards.) 





283 


Posting an Outpost 

There are some definite rules that may be laid 
down governing the location of an outguard. In the 
first place, the location within reasonable limits has 
been designated by the support commander in his 
order. We are to cover the main road leading from 
the direction in which the enemy is reported to be. 
The outguard should occupy a good defensive posi¬ 
tion that is, it should have a good field of fire to the 
front and in oblique directions toward both flanks. 
It should be so far concealed that the enemy could 
not discover it without attacking. ” 

Procedure 

Situation No. 4 is now handed out to the members 
of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

You, Corporal V, have been given the fifth squad, 
and ordered to establish outguard No. 2 in this vicin¬ 
ity. You have arrived at this point with your squad. 

Required: 

How will you carry out your mission ? 

Procedure 

The Director reads the problem aloud and calls 
upon one or more members of the class to explain 
their understanding of it. 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to visualize this situation—to consider himself 
as being Corporal Y. You have arrived here with 
your squad to establish outguard No. 2. Just how do 
you propose to go about it ? Captain Hastings, what 
would you do?” 



284 


Terrain Exercises 


Captain Hastings: “Well, sir, I would first decide 
where I am going to post the outguard and then de¬ 
cide upon the number of sentinels I am to post and 
where I am to post them. I have the limits of the 
front assigned to me definitely pointed out. I must 

first find a location for the outguard that will cover 
this front. ” 

The Director: “Have you decided upon such a lo¬ 
cation?” 

Captain Hastings: “Yes, sir. My outguard posted 

.would accomplish the desired results. In 

the fiist place, any considerable body of the enemy 
must travel at night on a well-defined road or trail. 
He cannot strike off across country unless elaborate 
preparations are made for guiding his columns. We 
would know about any such preparations and could 
counter them. If I cover this main road and the 
country adjacent to it, I will be able to accomplish 
my mission.” 


Di ^ ec l? r sh ° uld bring out all the elements con- 

tion d Thprp the -if lf Ctl0n ° f the ? ositiojl of the ground in ques¬ 
tion There will be many small points that may be brought 

mW 1 ' c ° n i lderatl0 _ n s uch as: Is the position selected a good 
one for defense? Is there a good field of fire? Is there cover 
for the enemy to conceal a formation for attack? Is the posi- 

be sotJ TV m ?i 0t ’ Can * be made so? Can obstacles 

? d T !i, t0 h ° ld the enem y under effective fire of the 
outguard . Is there ground to the front or flanks within rifle 

^n^ aChme g ? n range tbat commands the position? Are there 
good approaches to the sentinel posts from the outtruard? T« 

outwards 910 A re 6 f ° r T tUal su PP° rtin S fire with the other 

outguards and “eTis^ m&'TH 

that an outguard position will fulfill all of ? mte ™P lated 

^should he selected, so as 


The Director 
you stated that 


; “ In y° lu> discussion a minute ago 
you would determine the number of 



285 


Posting an Outpost 

sentinels to be posted. Just what do you mean by 
that?” J 17 

Captain Hastings: “I will want to post a sufficient 
number of sentinels to keep the sector of the front 
allotted to me under observation at all times. I have 
not yet decided how many will be required. ” 

The Director: “That is just the point I wanted to 
bring out. The number of sentinels that you can post 
is determined by the strength of your outguard. You 
can post only one double sentinel post from a squad. 
If more than one is required your outguard must 
be allotted additional men for the purpose. Now, let 
us see how this proposition works out in practice. 
You have seven men besides yourself. This will pro¬ 
vide three reliefs for one double sentinel post and 
give you one spare man. The outguard is to be on 
duty until the march is resumed tomorrow morning. 
You cannot expect to keep all the men on post all 
the time. They must have their rest if they are ex¬ 
pected to march tomorrow. Sentinels are ordinarily 
on post for two hours, after which they are given a 
four-hour period of rest before going on post again. 
To do otherwise is to wear your men out and render 
them unfit for further service. Let us all get this 
system firmly fixed in our minds. A squad furnishes 
three reliefs for a double sentinel post. If only a 
single sentinel is required, a cossack post will fur¬ 
nish three reliefs for it. I hope you will all see the 
point. ” 

Captain Hastings: “I understand the system now. 
But, suppose I should determine that at least two 
double sentinel posts are necessary, what should I 
do?” 


286 


Terrain Exercises 


The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, can you 
answer the captain’s question?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would send a report to 
the platoon commander setting forth my views of the 
situation and request that another squad be sent to 
the outguard.” 

The Director: “That would be a proper procedure. 
The initial disposition of the outguard is only ten¬ 
tative. Soon after the outguards are posted the sup¬ 
port commander will be out to make his inspection 
of them. At that time the situation may be repre¬ 
sented to him, and he can make his decision as to 
whether or not he deems it necessary to supply the 
additional men.” 

(Note.—The exact location of the outguard should be decided 
upon at this time, and the tentative position of the sentinels 
should be determined.) 

Solution 

The Director: “We have decided upon the location 
of the outguard, and the dispositions to be made. It 
is now necessary to embody these in the form of 
oiders to the members of the squad. Lieutenant 
Hunt, what should this order contain?” 

■. _ you want me to give the 

entire order for the posting of the outguard?” 

• Pi^eetof: “Yes. If any point comes up that 
is not fully understood by a member of the class, he 
should feel free to interrupt with a question.” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “The men have all the informa¬ 
tion about the enemy and our own troops. It is not 

necessary to repeat that. I would cover this by 
saying: 


Posting an Outpost 


287 


‘You have heard the information about the enemy 
and our own troops. The first section is out in front 
covering the posting of the outguards.’ 

“I would then state the mission of the squad. 

‘This squad forms outguard No. 2 of support No. 1.’ 

“The tactical dispositions are next in order. The 
reliefs have to be told off and other arrangements 
made. ’ ’ 

“ ‘Hanna and Crow (riflemen), first relief; Smith and 
Carney (riflemen), second relief; Harris and Welch 
(riflemen), third relief; Rainer (automatic rifleman), 
spare man. 

“ ‘Rainer, you select the tentative positions for your 
automatic rifle and get ready to prepare them for occu¬ 
pation. 

“ ‘The members of the second and third reliefs will 
prepare the bivouac for the outguard and the firing posi¬ 
tions which I will designate later. 

“ ‘In case of attack we will be supported.’ 

“The administrative arrangements are simple. 
They will relate to the messing of the men. 

“ ‘Meals will be sent up from the support.’ 

“Then the location of the outguard commander 
will be stated: 

“ ‘Messages to me, here.’ 

“I will then direct the men to remove their packs 
and order: 

“ ‘First relief, FOLLOW ME.’ ” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Y r ou seem to have covered the es- 


288 


Terrain Exercises 


sential points of the order of an outguard com¬ 
mander. Now, in order to impress it on your minds, 
I want each member of the class to write out the 
order on his pad. Follow the form of the five-para¬ 
graph order and try to get the wording just as was 
given by Lieutenant Hunt. ’ ’ 

When all have finished writing the order the 
papers are collected and distributed again. Mem¬ 
bers of the class are called upon to read and comment 
on the order they have in their possession. 

(Note.—The Director should insist that members of the class 
prepare these orders with great care and attention to detail. 
It will be found that there is a tendency to slight them and take 
a lot for granted.) 


0ut P° st Card No. 4 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class down the road to location of outguard No. 2. 

Indicate limits of front of outguard. 

2. Hand out Situation No. 4. Read and explain it to class. 

d. Location of outguard. Defense. Field of fire. Cover. 
Strength of position. Obstacles commanding ground. 
Approaches and communications. 

4. Number of sentinels supplied by outguard. Explanation of. 

5. Tentative dispositions. 

6. Orders for posting of outguards: Information of enemy and 

own troops; mission; disposition—division into reliefs; 
action m case of attack; messing; messages. 

7. Write out orders. Collect. Distribute. Read. 


Explanation 

The Director: “We are now ready to proceed with 
the next step of the problem, the posting of the first 
relief. Before we go into that I want to make a few 
remarks about the location of sentinel posts. 

‘ ‘ day the sentinel must be able to see the whole 



Posting an Outpost 


289 


of the ground allotted to him for observation. He 
should be provided with sufficient cover so that the 
enemy’s patrols will not be able to locate him. He 
should have good communication with the outguard 
and the adjoining sentinels. Excellent observation 
posts may sometimes be found in large trees, one of 
the sentinels of the double post being located in a 
tree and the other on the ground near the foot of the 
tree. It may be that the best location for observation 
is also the best for resistance, in which case the sen¬ 
tinels may be posted on or very near the actual lo¬ 
cality to be defended by the outguard. There is no 
objection to this, provided the members of the out¬ 
guard, as well as the sentinel, are well concealed from 
the view of the enemy. 

“The location of the sentinel post at night re¬ 
quires the most careful consideration. It depends 
considerably upon the degree of darkness, and conse¬ 
quently the value of eyesight as compared with hear¬ 
ing. On a very dark night, when the sentinel can see 
only a few yards in front of him, it is evident that his 
ears will be more useful than his eyes. Furthermore, 
the difficulties of the enemy will be increased by the 
darkness, and he is likely to make more noise by 
stumbling over unseen obstructions. On a still night 
a sentinel posted on high ground can hear better than 
when on low ground, because there is likely to be less 
obstruction in the way of trees and other objects to 
interfere with the sound waves passing through the 
atmosphere. It therefore appears that on a very 
dark night, when the ears are more efficient than the 
eyes, the sentinel should be posted on high ground, 
with low ground to his front. 


290 


Terrain Exercises 


When the darkness is not so great and the powers 
o sight more nearly approach in value the powers 
oi hearing, it is better to place the sentinel on low 
ground, with the sky line to his front. This is be¬ 
cause approaching persons will be silhouetted on the 
sky line and that it is difficult to see when looking 
down from a height into a dark valley. 

The night post should always be provided with 
an obstacle placed from 10 to 30 yards to the front of 
the sentinel. It must be low, so that it will not be 
seen by an approaching enemy. Its value is in¬ 
creased if a wire or rope is attached to some object 
that will fall down with a loud noise when anyone 
trips over the obstacle. ’ ’ 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the place where the 
sentinel post is to be established. 

Th e Director: “Lieutenant Barry, where would 
you locate your sentinel post?” 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would locate it at 




Situation r No t0 5 ^ distlibutes the sheets containing 


The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

It has been decided to locate double-sentinel post 

ral ' v °h ° utguard 5°,; 2 at this P° int You, Corpo- 
first relief" 3 amVed here Wlth the members of the 



Posting an Outpost 


291 


Required: 

The orders and instructions you give your 
sentinels. 

Explanation 

The Director: “The sentinels must have imparted 
to them all information of the enemy and our own 
troops. With respect to the latter, they must be fully 
informed of the covering patrols that have been sent 
out and the location of the adjoining sentinel posts. 
The location of the main body of the outguard should 
be pointed out, and, if practicable, the position of ad¬ 
joining outguards. 

4 ‘ They will be given the number of their own post 
and the number of the outguard from which they 
are posted. 

“They will be irformed as to the points to which 
the roads and trails lead, and, if practicable, the 
names of important topographical points in sight. 

“They will be given the countersign, if one is used. 
The method of challenge and identification of per¬ 
sons approaching the outpost sentinels at night 
should be changed from time to time so that there 
will be less chance for the enemy to know just what 
system is being used on a particular night. On one 
occasion a countersign using the name of a battle or 
general may be used; on another night the system of 
tapping the knuckles on the rifle stock may be em¬ 
ployed. 

“The mistake of giving sentinels too many orders 
and instructions should be carefully avoided. If 
their minds are burdened with too many details, they 
are likely to become hesitating, timid and confused. 


292 


Terrain Exercises 


J 1 ', *'? 1 '!. 2 ' (dd 11 ^ ea * s they should know where 
to^ook for the enemy and what to do if they see 

Solution 

I h^Z Ct0r: J <G l Vtain Hal1 ’ havin S in mind what 
sentinels?”" ’ * ° rderS W ° Uld you S ive your 

ordcTs- 1111 HaU: “ T W ° Uld give them the following 

‘ You have all the information of the enemy and our 
own troops. 

‘“You are double sentinel post No. 1 of outguard No 

2 of support No. 1. Outguard No. 1 is_ (point out 

location) Outguard No. 3 is ............ (point out location). 

ormation of the exact location of the sentinel posts 
will be given to you later. 

“ ‘This road leads to -. That trail leads in the 

irec ion of . That-is known as the-. 

tur£t^ew7 e and ° ther important topographical fea- 

“ ‘H you see the enemy, signal to me at the outguard. 
ie countersign will be given to you later.’ ” 

The Director: “I think that covers the orders for 

V veil- The big idea is Ct we 

thinlAbout b w 611 - Vlth t0 ° many thin gs to 

ti™ the ™ tten soIu ‘ i<>n ° f 

Explanation 

The Director: “There are certain rules for the 
guidance of a sentinel on post with which all officers 
and soldiers should be familiar. They must be sera- 








Posting an Outpost 293 

pulously observed under all circumstances. They 
are: 

“1. He must watch and listen without betraying 
his presence. Observation is the first consideration 
and concealment of secondary importance. 

“2. He must not smoke, and matches must not be 
lighted at night. 

“3. Such conversation as is absolutely necessary 
must be conducted in subdued tones. 

“4. He must not have any arms or accourterments 
that will glitter in the sunlight. 

“5. Except at night and in foggy weather, the bay¬ 
onet must be kept in the scabbard. 

“6. Persons arrested are ordinarily held at the 
post until a patrol comes out to take charge of them. 

“7. He will not allow his vigilance to be disturbed 
by the requirements of military etiquette. He pays 
no compliments and does not salute officers unless 
addressed by them. 

“8. Everything that he observes with respect to 
the enemy must be communicated to the outguard 
commander, especial care being taken to report 
promptly all indication of the enemy’s approach. If 
he is satisfied that the enemy is advancing to attack, 
the alarm may be given by firing. When immediate 
alarm is not necessary, firing should be avoided. 

“ There is nothing that so irritates troops as need¬ 
less outpost firing at night, when they need rest. 
Needless firing, besides alarming the outpost troops, 
and possibly those of the main body, gives informa¬ 
tion to the enemy of the location of the line of obser¬ 
vation, from which he is able to deduce the position 
of the outguards. It should be an invariable rule 


294 


Terrain Exercises 


tiiat sentinels do not fire except as a last resort. 
There is never any necessity for it except when the 
covering patrols are being driven in and are being 
hard pressed, in which case the sentinel may fire to 
assist in covering the withdrawal, if such action is 
absolutely necessary. Night firing is of little value 
m any event. It is only effective for very short dis¬ 
tances, and should be discouraged by every possible 
means.’ ’ 


Outpost 


Card No. 5 


Director’s Key 


1* L ° C ^° 1 1 * * * \ of , S 6 7 ? ntinel Posts. By day. At night. Obstacles, 
rield of view. 

t n" location V :r P oT Ie S6ntineI P ° St iS t0 be established ' 
°?' Situation No. 5. Read and discuss it 

5. Orders for sentinels: Information of enemy and own troops- 

number of post; identify support and outguard; counter¬ 
signs; too many orders. 

6. Proceed with verbal solution of problem. 

7. Explain rules for guidance of sentinels: Watch and listen- 

smoke; matches; conversation; arms; vigilance- pti’ 
quette; report of observations; night firing. ' 


Procedure 


The class is now conducted to the location of out¬ 
guard No. 1. 

Explanation 

The Director: “After sufficient time has elapsed 
tor the, outguards to get into position and post their 
sentinels the support commander makes an inspec¬ 
tion of the elements of his support. In this inspec- 
tion any or all of the following questions may be pre- 
sented for consideration. " ^ 





Posting an Outpost 


295 


“1. Is the outguard located at the best place to 
cover the sector of the front allotted to it? Is there 
a good field of fire over the ground by which the 
enemy may approach? 

“2. Are the sentinels so located that they can ob¬ 
serve all approaches? Are they well instructed in 
their duties ? Do they know what to do if they should 
see the enemy? 

“3. Have provisions been made for rapid commu¬ 
nication between sentinels and the outguard? Has 
communication been established with adjoining out- 
guards and sentinels and with the support ? 

“4. Have fire positions been prepared for all rifle¬ 
men, the automatic rifleman and the rifle grenadier ? 
Are the men well supplied with ammunition ? 

“5. Are all the men familiar with the plans for 
defense ? Do they know what to do in case the enemy 
attacks ? 

“6. Have necessary arrangements been made for 
patrolling ? 

“7. Have necessary arrangements been made for 
messing ? 

“In the course of the inspection the support com¬ 
mander will make such changes in the dispositions 
as may be necessary and will give such instructions 
as he may deem desirable for the proper conduct of 
the duty with which the support is charged. 

“Having completed this inspection he will return 
to the support and make his report to the outpost 
commander. This report may be made in the form 
of a message and must contain information as to the 
location of the main body of the support, the location 
of each of the outguards, their strength and disposi- 


296 


Terrain Exercises 


tion, the extent of patrolling contemplated, and 
finally the place where messages are to be sent is in¬ 
dicated. A report such as this received from each 
support and detached post commander gives the out¬ 
post commander detailed information regarding the 
disposition of the entire outpost upon which he may 
base his report to the commander of the main body. 

“When practicable the report is accompanied by 
a rough sketch showing the dispositions of the 
support.” 

Procedure 

While at the location of outguard No. 1, the Di¬ 
rector will point out the location of the outguard and 
the sentinels and question various members of the 
class regarding these locations and the instructions 
under which the outguard is operating. 

The class is then conducted to the location of out¬ 
guard No. 3, and the same procedure is gone through 

The class is then conducted to the position of the 
support, and Situation No. 6 is distributed. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 6: 

You, Lieutenant M, have completed the inspection 
o± your outguards and returned to your support. 

Required: 

Write out the body of the report that you would 
sencl back to the outpost commander. 


* The members of the class 
dispositions of outguard No. 2. 


are already familiar with the detailed 



Posting an Outpost 


297 


Procedure 

The Director: “ We have been over the entire front 
covered by our support and made a detailed inspec¬ 
tion of the dispositions, rearranged them where it 
was necessary and given instructions that will insure 
efficient outpost service. We have now returned to 
the position of the support. Word has been sent out 
to withdraw the covering troops. It is now up to 
Lieutenant M to make his report to the outpost com¬ 
mander. I want each member of the class to consider 
himself as being Lieutenant M and to write out on 
his pad the body of the report that he would send 
in.” 

The members of the class write out the report. 
When this is done they are collected and redistri¬ 
buted as indicated heretofore. Members of the class 
are required to read the solutions and comment on 
them. 


Outpost Card No. 6 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to location of outguard No. 1. 

2. Explain method of inspection of line of outguards by sup¬ 

port commander. Considerations that will come up: Lo¬ 
cation of outguard; location of sentinel posts; arrange¬ 
ments for communication; fire positions; men familiar 
with plans for defense; patroling; messing; changes m 
dispositions. 

3. Report and sketch. 

4. Conduct class to outguard No. 3. Discuss dispositions. 

5. Conduct class to support. Pass out Situation No. 6. Write 

out report of support commander. 





Terrain Exercise No. 8. 

A Visiting Patrol 

The Problem 

Special Situation: 

A blue force operating in hostile country halts at 
(a) and establishes an outpost along the line ( b ). 
Support No. 2 is located at (c) with outguard No. 1 
at ( d ) ; outguard No. 2 at ( e ) and outguard No. 3 
at (/). 

Situation No. 1: 

You, Lieutenant A are in command of Support 
No. 2, consisting of your platoon and located at this 
point. The first section furnishes the outguards and 
the platoon (less 1st Section) the main body of the 
support. You have made the inspection of your line 
of observation and sent your report to the company 
commander. 

Required: 

What arrangements do you make for visiting pa¬ 
trols ? 

Explanation of Letter Symbols 

(a) The location of the bivouac of the main body 
of the Blue force. This should be located at a cen¬ 
tral point with reference to the outpost line. 

(fo) Designate the general line of the Blue outpost, 
(c) The location of Support No. 2. It should be 
located at a central point with reference to the line 
of outguards. 


299 


300 




Terrain Exercises 


W‘H/) The location of the three outguards 
posted from Support No. 2. 

In fitting this exercise to the ground the location 
1 u , out guards should be selected first. Care 
. u n* be taken to so locate them that the ground is 
suitable for illustrating the tactical features that are 
to be brought out and discussed in the Terrain Exer¬ 
cise. The location of Support No. 2 should then be 
selected and finally that of the Blue main body. If 
you have had a previous Terrain Exercise covering 
e subject of outposts it may be convenient and ad¬ 
vantageous to base this Terrain Exercise on the same 
situation and covering the same ground. 


■Procedure 

The dass is conducted to (c), the location of Sup- 
port No. 2. ^ 

The Director distributes the sheets containing the 

Xf. lal S c f 10n a Y d Situation No. 1, reads them 
oud to the class and makes such explanation as mav 

be necessary. One or more members of the class may 
situation UP ° n t0 State lds understanding of the 

Explanation 

The Director: “It is fully realized that no member 
of this class will ever be called upon to conduct the 
operations of a visiting patrol. You will, however 
have to order your non-commissioned officers to do so 
and you must have a knowledge of how it should be 

performed! WhethCT ^ i§ bein S P**P^ 

‘‘The military text-books usually tell you that a 
visiting patrol consists of a non-commissioned of 


301 


Visiting Patrol 

ficer and two or three men that make the rounds 
along the outpost line of observation at night. That 
is about all. It is assumed that the subject is so 
simple that you just naturally know it and there is 
nothing further to be explained. Such is not the case 
and before we have completed this exercise we will 
demonstrate it to you. Another good test of the 
proposition is this: Take your non-commissioned of¬ 
ficers out on a Terrain Exercise and give them the 
situations that we will have today. See how many 
of them get away with it. I am sure you will be sur¬ 
prised at the results, especially with the men who 
have had no previous preparation for the exercise.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what is a 
visiting patrol?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “It is a patrol consisting of 
a non-commissioned officer and two or three men. It 
is sent out from the support at intervals during the 
night to keep up communication between the ele¬ 
ments of the outpost.” 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, tell us just how 
the visiting patrol makes its rounds.” 

Captain Hastings: “Let us say that the patrol is 
to start out from our support No. 2, which is located 
at this point. The patrol will go out to the right and 
touch upon the left outguard of Support No. 1; then 
pass along our own line of observation to the right 
outguard of Support No. 3 and then come back 
here.” 

The Director: “Yes, that is the general procedure. 
The details of how the patrol is to do all of this is 


302 


Terrain Exercises 


what we are interested in and that is what will be 
bi ought out in this Terrain Exercise. Lieutenant 
Wallace, what do you understand to be the specific 
duties of a visiting patrol?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “Included in the duties of 
visiting patrols may be enumerated: 

“1. They bring back information of incidents that 
may occur along the line of observation and form a 
medium of exchange of information between the va¬ 
rious elements of the outpost. 

2. In a measure, they prevent the unobserved ap¬ 
proach of the enemy between sentinel posts. When 
the enemy is very active there is constant patrolling 
between the observation posts. 

‘ ‘ 3. They drive off small patrols. 

4. They take charge of detained persons and con¬ 
duct them back to the support. ’ ’ 

The Director: “That is very good. Now, Lieuten¬ 
ant Ralston, suppose you were Lieutenant A com¬ 
manding Support No. 2. What instructions would 
you give regarding your visiting patrols?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: 1 ‘ The visiting patrol is a night 
institution. There is little necessity for its employ¬ 
ment in the day time, but I would not wait until dark 

to give my instructions regarding it. I would give 
orders: 6 

“ ‘There is no further information of the enemy and 
our own troops. 

‘“The second section will furnish the visiting patrols 
for tonight. 

‘“Corporal Black, with the 4th Squad, will conduct 
the visiting patrols at 8 and 10 o’clock p. m. 


Visiting Patrol 


303 


u ‘Corporal Canes, with the 5th Squad, will conduct 
the visiting patrols at 12 midnight and 2 o’clock a. m. 

“ ‘ Corporal Dorr with the 6th Squad, will conduct the 
visiting patrols at 4 and 6 o’clock a. m. 

“ ‘Patrol leaders will go over the route of their patrols 
before dark. 

“ ‘Messages to support, here.’ ” 

The Director: “I think you have covered the neces¬ 
sary points. 

“Are there any questions by any member of the 
class ? If so, now is the time to clear them up. ’ * 


Visiting Patrol Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Assemble the class at (c) the location of Support No. 2. 

2. Distribute sheets bearing the Special Situation and Situation 

No. 1. Read and explain. Have members of the class 
state their understanding of the problem. 

3. Explain that no member of class will ever be required to 

conduct a visiting patrol, but it is necessary for them to 
know how it should be done. Definition of visiting patrol. 
Test by taking N. C. O.’s on Terrain Exercise. 

4. Solution: What is visiting patrol. How it makes rounds. 

Duties. Orders given for visiting patrols. Any questions. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

You, Corporal Canes, have been designated to con¬ 
duct the visiting patrol that is to go out at 12 o’clock 
midnight and at 2 o’clock a. m. You have been given 
your squad to form the reliefs. 

Required: 

What do you do ? 



304 


Terrain Exercises 


Procedure 

The Director distributes the sheets bearing Situ- 

ation No 2 to the members of the class, reads it 

aloud and makes such explanations as may be neces- 
sary. 


Explanation 

The Director: “Now I want each member of the 
c ass to consider himself as being Corporal Canes. 

u yourself m hi s pi ace an( j consider what you 
would do under the orders you have received from 
the support commander. We are going to work 
these situations out in detail to show you how it 
ought to be done. Then when you are a support com¬ 
mander and give an order for your visiting patrols, 

■ v . ou y ! ]mo 'y, 0 ust how each Corporal should go 
about his job.” 6 

Solution 

do?” 6 Dlrector: “Captain Harvey, what would you 


Captain Harvey: “I would get the men of my 

t ° 8 ' et l01 ' 1 and whlle they are assembling I 
o T i„ y Ze Up the station and determine just what 
orders I am going to give. When the men are to¬ 
gether I would give them their orders: 

patrll 1811167 ’ HarriS ° n and Kline wil1 b e the first visiting 

patrol”™*’ HaSter aDd Payne Wil1 be the secona v^iting 

We go out at 12 and 2 o’clock tonight. Be ready 
at those hours. ^ 


“ £I am going over the route of the 
“ ‘Dismissed.’ 


patrol before dark. 


305 


Visiting Patrol 

I do not think of anything else to say at this 
time.” 

The Director: “ Captain Hodges, have you any 
criticism to make of Captain Harvey’s order?” 

Captain Hodges: “Yes, sir. In the first place, he 
has left out several things that ought to be told to the 
men. He has not provided any instructions for one 
man of the squad. He has not made it clear just 
which patrol each man belongs to. He has not told 
the men what equipment they are to carry with 
them.” 

The Director: “To what do you attribute these 
omissions?” 

Captain Hodges: “Well, sir, I could not say. The 
thing that appeals to me is that if I were one of the 
men I would want to know about them.” 

The Director: “I think, if you will all reflect, that 
the underlying trouble with Captain Harvey’s order 
is that he has not followed our five paragraph order. 
Had he done so, I am sure he would not have omitted 
these essentials. Now I am going to have Captain 
Harvey give the order again and follow the five para¬ 
graph order system and see how he comes out. Your 
first paragraph would be ‘ Information of the enemy 
and our supporting troops.’ All right, Captain 
Harvey, what would your first paragraph contain?” 

Captain Harvey: “Well, sir, the men know every¬ 
thing that I do regarding the enemy and our own 
troops. They all heard the Lieutenants order when 
he established the support. So I would say : 

“ ‘There is no further information of the enemy or our 
supporting troops.’ ” 


306 


Terrain Exercises 


The 1Du ector: ‘ You have stated it exactly in your 
last sentence. Now for your plan.” 

(Japtain Harvey: “My plan would be to have the 

squad furnish two of the visiting patrols—I see what 
you mean. 

Our squad will furnish two visiting patrols tonight. ’ ’ 9 

The Director: “Now conies the disposition of 
troops and orders for each element. ’ ’ 

Captain Harvey: “I would divide up the squad as 
1 ctid m my previous order and provide for that 
extra man that Captain Hodges spoke of. He is my 
Automatic Rifleman. X would say: 

“ ‘Manley, Harrison and Kline will be visiting patrol 

<< , It; wil1 g0 out at 12 o’clock midnight. 

“‘Oliver, Hasker and Payne will be visiting patrol 

f' If; wil1 g0 out at 2 o’clock a. m. 

Bailej (automatic rifleman) will be supernu- 
merary.’ 9 

The Director: “The next is your administrative 
ngements, paragraph 4 of an order. What 
would you include in that?” 

T ^ aj> ! f ' 1n Harvey: “The equipment to be carried 
I would say: 

“ ‘Rifle and belts of ammunition only will be carried. 

The bayonet will be fixed. The scabbard and canteen will 
be left here.’ 

I would not want the men to carry anything that is 

not absolutely essential. ” S 

The Director: “You are right. The members of 
the visiting patrol travel light. They do not want to 
be hampered with equipment that is not necessary 


Visiting Patrol 


307 


Above all, they do not want anything with them that 
will rattle and make a noise. They leave the bayonet 
scabbard at the post of the support because if they 
wear it on the belt it will be dangling between the 
men’s legs and interfere with their freedom of move¬ 
ment. They will probably not need any water on 
this short march so I see no objection to leaving the 
canteen behind, although, on the other hand, I can 
see no objection to carrying it. That is a mere 
matter of opinion. The bayonets are fixed so as to 
have them ready for hand-to-hand night fighting in 
case it is required. A great deal of the night work 
will be done with the bayonet. Rifle fire is effective 
only for short distances due to inability to see the 
target for any distance. Now, Captain Harvey, how 
do you conclude your order?” 

Captain Harvey: “In the usual manner by telling 
the men where messages are to be brought, I would 
say: 

“ ‘Messages will be brought back to the support, here.’ ” 

That concludes the order. I see my error and will 
profit by it in the future.” 

Captain James: “There is one point in the order 
that I did not understand. Captain Harvey detailed 
his automatic rifleman as ‘supernumerary.’ Just 
what does he mean by that.” 

The Director: “He means that he is an extra man 
not specifically detailed with either patrol. But, if 
for any reason, one of the other men is unable to go 
on the patrol when the time comes the supernumer¬ 
ary will take his place. Do you see the point now?” 


308 


Terrain Exercises 


Captain James: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “I hope you all now realize how far 
astray you can go in issuing tactical orders if you 
tail to follow the five paragraph system. On the 
other hand, I hope you have observed how simple it 
is to include all of the essential elements in an order 
i you do follow the system. You here see the sys¬ 
tem applied to the most insignificant element in the 
domain of tactics, the visiting patrol. You see how 
nicely it fits. If you were issuing an order for a divi¬ 
sion of 20,000 men you would see how well it works 
there. I hope you will all stick to this plan of issu¬ 
ing ordeis. \ou positively cannot go far wrong if 

you will If there are no further questions we will 
proceed.” 


Explanation 

me Director: “Corporal Canes will now dismiss 
the squad and the men will go about getting ready 
for their night work. Corporal Canes will go over 
the route that he is to conduct the patrol tonight. He 
will proceed to the right parallel to and in rear of the 
line of outguards to the left outguard of Support 
^O. 1; thence along our own line of observation to 
utguard N o. 1 of Support No. 3; and then back to 
the support. He will note the route carefully and 
mark it if necessary. He will especially note the ap¬ 
proaches to the outguard posts and arrange for re¬ 
cognition signals with the outguard commanders ” 


Procedure 

The Director: “Let us assume that it is now 11.50 
p. m. The obscurity is such that a man may see an- 


309 


Visiting Patrol 

other at a distance of about 12 yards. Corporal 
Canes has been awakened by the support sentinel. 
He is up and getting ready to start with his patrol. 
Captain James, you are now Corporal Canes. What 
would you do ? ’’ 

Captain Janies: “I would wake Manley, Harrison 
and Kline and say to them: 

“ ‘It is time to make our 12 o'clock patrol. Get up. 
You have about 5 minutes to get ready.’ 

“At 11: :55 I would have the patrol fall in for in¬ 
spection. I would inspect the men to see if they had 
the proper equipment and make sure that each man 
is fully awake. I would then give the command: 

“ ‘With ball cartridges. 2. LOAD.’ 

“I am now ready to start.’’ 

The Director: “All right. It is now 12 o’clock. 
Give the orders for the start.” 

Captain James: “I would say: 

“ ‘Manley, you will lead; I will follow at a distance of 
8 yards; Harrison, you follow me at 10 yards; Kline you 
follow Harrison at 12 yards. Move out.’ 

“I think that order would get the patrol under 
way. ’ ’ 

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, have you any 
criticism of the formation proposed by Captain 
James?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “Yes, sir. It seems to me that 
here is one instance where the patrol commander 
should actually lead the patrol himself. He knows 


310 


Terrain Exercises 


the route that is to be taken and no other member of 
the patrol knows it. He is the man that knows the 
recognition signals with the outguard commanders. 
I think there is every reason why he should physi¬ 
cally lead the patrol. ” 

The Director: “I think so, too, and feel that Cap¬ 
tain James will when he considers the situation. Now 
then, this new disposition will change the orders 
somewhat. Lieutenant Baker how would you state 
the orders now?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I would say: 

I will lead. Manley, you follow me at a distance of 
about 8 yards. Harrison, follow Manley at a distance of 
about 10 yards; Kline will follow Harrison at a distance 
of about 10 yards. 

Keep the man ahead of you in sight at all times. 

Manley, you will be second in command. 

“ ‘Follow me.’ ” 

The Director: “I think this order will get our 
patrol under way in the proper formation. I hope 
you see and understand the necessity for going into 
the minute details of these situations. Herein lies 
one of the gieatest values of the Terrain Exercise. 
It not only teaches the student of Minor Tactics the 
punciples, but affords practice in giving the orders 
to meet the various situations and fixes all indelibly 
on the nund. When you conduct a Terrain Exercise 
yourself you cannot be too particular about ffoina: in¬ 
to the details of every situation.” 


Visiting Patrol 


311 


Visiting Patrol Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 2. Each member 

of class is now Corporal Canes. Explain why this Ter¬ 
rain Exercise is given to officers. 

2. Orders for squad. Failure to use five paragraph order. In¬ 

formation of enemy and own troops. Plan of commander. 
Tactical dispositions and order for each element; detail 
each patrol, time of going out, supernumerary, equipment 
—only rifle and belt of ammunition, no bayonets, canteen, 
messages. 

3. Meaning of supernumerary. 

4. Necessity for following five paragraph order system. 

5. Men get ready for patrol duty before dark. Corporal Canes 

goes over route of the patrol. 

6. State special situation. Now 11:50 p. m. Ready to start. 

Formation of patrol. Corporal leads. Load rifles. 

7. Orders for patrol:—Formation, communication, second in 

command. 

8. Explain necessity for going into details. Great value of 

Terrain Exercise. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 3: 

You, Corporal Canes, the leading man of your 
visiting patrol, have arrived at this point. Outguard 
No. 1 is right there (indicate) ; the double sentinel 
post is there (indicate). 

Required: 

What do you do ? 

Procedure 

The class is conducted to the point selected for 
Situation No. 3, which should be located between the 
outguard and the sentinel post if practicable. The 
Director reads the situation aloud and points out the 
position of the outguard and that of the sentinels 
posted from the outguard. 






312 


Terrain Exercises 


Solution 

The Director': “Captain Hall, let us assume you are 
Corporal Canes. You have arrived right here, the 
other members of your patrol are in the original for- 
mation behind you. Now just what would you do 
under the circumstances?” 

Captain Hall: “I would go to the sentinel post and 
ask the men.” 

The Director: “Wait a minute. Let us not go too 
ast on this proposition. You have the other men of 

x? atr - V01L What are you going to do 
with them?” 

Captain Hall: “That’s right. I would have to 

tone - 1 * 1 What t0 d °’ 1 W ° Uld Say t0 ManIe F in a low 
Have the patrol halt and remain in place.’ 

Which means the men would halt where they are and 

stay there until I return. ” ‘ 

b u h jib treC i° r i 3 e wil1 assume that you have 
halted the patrol. Would you go to the sentinel post 

without first notifying the outguard that you are go¬ 
ing to do so?” s 

Captain Hall: “No sir. I had forgotten about 
that. I would go to the outguard and tell the out- 
guard commander that I am going out to see his sen- 
_ s and would get him to come along with me.” 
he Director: Reflect a moment. Remember 
jour’s is not the only visiting patrol that cSs along 
the route tonight. There is one every two hours ' 
The outguard commander has to be up everv two 

L°s 1 £“ reIi t fs - The -PPortcoSnS 

as arranged his visiting patrols so that they will 


313 


Visiting Patrol 

come along the line of observation when the sentinels 
on post are about in the middle of their tour. If 
you get the outguard commander out at this time, he 
will be up practically all night and will not be fit for 
much service tomorrow. I do not think you would 
insist on seeing the outguard commander unless he 
happened to be awake at this particular time. It 
would be sufficient to tell the outguard sentinel what 
you are going to do.” 

Captain Hall: “I would go to the outguard and 
notify the man on duty there that I am going out to 
the sentinel.” 

The Director: “Don’t go too fast. What I want 
to bring out at this time is just how you are going to 
approach the post of the outguard. Tell us in detail 
how you would do it. ’ ’ 

Captain Hall: “I will go up to this point. (Cap¬ 
tain Hall advances to the point indicated). I will 
call in a low tone of voice 6 Visiting patrol.’ If I get 
no response I will advance a little closer and repeat 
my recognition signal and would continue until I am 
recognized. When the man on duty hears my call he 
will probably say to me ‘Give the countersign.’ I 
will give the countersign in a low tone of voice. He 
will tell me to advance and I will then go to the post 
of the outguard.” 

The Director: “Those are the details I wanted to 
bring out. And that is the value of the Terrain Ex¬ 
ercise. We come out here and learn to do the things 
that we must do in actual campaign when we do not 
have to pay for the mistakes with our own lives or 
the lives of our men. You have to draw upon your 
imagination to picture the situation that confronts 


314 


Terrain Exercises 


you. 1 ou have to use your gray matter to figure out 
and decide just what you are going to do. Finally, 
you have to draw upon your power of speech to put 
your decision into words and express it in a clear and 
intelligent manner. 

“When you get up to the outguard you find that 
ie outguard commander is asleep. You decide not 
to awaken him. You tell the man on duty that you 
are going to the sentinel post. Now Lieutenant 

Larry I want you to tell us and show us just how you 
do it.” J 

Burry: “I would proceed cautiously in 
the direction of the sentinel post. When I figure I 
am within hearing distance I will give the recogni- 
1011 signal. The sentinel will give me the return sig- 

nal and I will know everything is all right and be free 
to go up to him.” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I do not understand this recog¬ 
nition signal proposition. Can the director enlighten 
us on that?” 

Explanation 

The Director: “Yes, we will go into that in a few 
minutes. Before doing so I wish to review and con¬ 
sider m detail this comparatively simple proposition 
ot approaching a sentinel post at night. You must 
remember that the line of observation of an outpost 
is a spooky’ place at night and that outpost sentinels 
are as easily flushed as a pheasant. Their nerves 
are strung to the breaking point. In every shadow 
an enemy lurks. They soon learn to take no chances. 
It becomes the rule to shoot first and challenge after¬ 
wards. If one makes a practice of running headlong 
into sentinel posts on dark nights he may get away 


Visiting Patrol 


315 


with it a few times, but you are taking serious 
chances and the game will finally get you. Having 
these things in mind, let us review the process of ap¬ 
proaching the sentinel post. 

“1. The patrol leader halts his patrol some little 
distance from the post. He gives the orders for the 
other members to stand fast until he returns. He 
then goes to the outguard and notifies them that he 
is going out to the sentinel. There is no necessity 
for any other person than the patrol commander go¬ 
ing up to the post. If others go it makes just that 
much more confusion and adds that much more 
chance for lurking scouts to locate the post and get 
information. 

“2. The patrol leader advances towards the post 
and when he is near enough he calls in a low tone, 
‘ Visiting patrol/ and continues to call until he is 
recognized. We never approach a sentinel post 
from the front at night and, if it can be avoided, 
never from a flank, always from the rear. 

“3. When the sentinel discovers the presence of 
the patrol leader he will verify his identity by calling 
upon him for the countersign. Corporal Canes gives 
the countersign, and the sentinel directs him to ad¬ 
vance. 

“This countersign is the recognition signal that 
Lieutenant Hunt asked about. It may be given by 
word of mouth. It may consist of whistling a few 
bars of some familiar service call. It may be made 
by tapping with the knuckles on the stock of the rifle. 
The number of taps to represent a number, for ex¬ 
ample : The countersign or recognition signal is 22- 
33. Corporal Canes would approach the sentinel 


316 


Terrain Exercises 


post and strike his rifle, tap, tap (pause) tap, tap. 
The sentinel will answer in the same manner tap, 
tap, tap (pause), tap,"tap, tap. He would then know 
that he had been recognized as a friend and proceed 
to the post. If the sentinel discovered Corporal 
Canes first he would keep him under observation and 
when he is close enough to hear would challenge him, 
tap, tap (pause), tap, tap. Corporal Cane’s answer 
would be tap, tap, tap (pause), tap, tap, tap. The 
system is interchangeable. The first number may be 
said to be the challenge or inquiry signal and the sec¬ 
ond number the recognition. 

It is not well, however, to confine ourselves to 
any one set of signals or method of identification. 
They should be changed frequently, so that the 
enemy will never know what system is being used on 
any particular night. 

“When the countersign is a word it should be 
spoken in a very low tone of voice for fear of betray¬ 
ing it to the enemy’s scouts who may be near by. 
Histoiy is replete with incidents of disaster to cover¬ 
ing detachments arising from the enemy’s knowledge 
of the countersign.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Now, Lieutenant Hunt, let us as¬ 
sume that you are at the sentinel post and ready to 

make your inspection. Just what would you sav to 
him?” J 

Ueutmant Hunt: “Well, sir, I am free too confess 
that I do not know just what I would say, but I would 
make a stab at something. ’ ’ 

The Director: “That is just the point. Our text 



Visiting Patrol 317 

books are here deficient again. They assume that 
is is so simple that we just naturally know what to 
o and what to say. Have you ever seen in any text 
book, any where, detailed instructions as to just how 
to iMpect a sentinel on post. They say: ‘The officer 
o t e day will inspect. ’ I should like for you to be 
m a concealed position and hear some ‘Officer of the 
day make his inspection of a sentinel. Try it some¬ 
time and see the results. 

During the time that Corporal Canes is with him 
the sentinel will not cease his vigilance. The inspec¬ 
tion will be conducted in a low conversational tone. 
I am Corporal Canes of visiting patrol No. 3 from 
support No. 2.’ ‘What is the number of your post ?’ 
What is the number of your outguard?’ ‘Where is 
it located?’ ‘Do you know the location of the senti¬ 
nel posts to your rirfit and left ?’ ‘In what direction 
is the enemy?’ ‘Where does that road (trail) lead 
to? Do you know what that light is (pointing) ?’ 
Have you observed any signs of the enemy since you 
have been on post?’ ‘What is the countersign (re¬ 
cognition signal) tonight?’ ‘What would you do if 
you saw any signs of the enemy out in front ?’ ‘How 
would you alarm the outguard?’ ‘I have no infor¬ 
mation of the enemy on this immediate front. ’ ‘When 
I was at outguard No. 3 of Support No. 1 the out¬ 
guard commander told me that an enemy scout had 
been picked up near the Outguard No. 1 of their sup¬ 
port about an hour ago?’ ‘Notify your outguard 
commander when you are relieved that I was here at 
.o’clock.’ 

“These are some of the things that would be in¬ 
cluded in the inspection by the patrol commander. 



318 


Terrain Exercises 


“Corporal Canes would now go back to the out- 
guard and tell the man on duty that he is going on 
with the patrol. If, in his inspection of the sentinel 
on post, anything happened that the outguard com¬ 
mander should know about Corporal Canes would 
wake him and tell him about it. He will then join 
the other members of the patrol and proceed along 
the route selected before dark. ’ ’ 


(Note.—To give the Terrain Exercise added interest it may 
be well to send two of the members of the class ahead to repre¬ 
sent sentinel post No. 2 and one to represent the outguard. 
They will take post in the normal location of those elements of 
the line of observation. Then have four members of the class 
represent the visiting patrol. Have the leader conduct them 
just as he would under actual service conditions. Make the 
appioach to outguard No. 2 in the same manner as indicated 
herein and carry out all the details of the situation.) 


Visiting Patrol 


Director’s Key 


Card No. 3 


1 . 

2 . 


3. 


4. 

5. 


6 . 


7. 

8 . 


Conduct class to point near location of Outguard No. 1. 

Distribute Situation No. 3. Point out location of the out¬ 
guard and Sentinel Post. 

Details of approach to outguard. Halt patrol. Recognition 
signal. Do not disturb outguard commander. Explain 
necessity for details. P 

Approach sentinel post. Necessity for caution. 

Review problem up to this point. Explain recognition sig- 


Corporal Canes inspection of the sentinel. Inder.tify himself 
to sentinel. Number of post, outguard, location. Posts 
on light and left. Road lead to. Light. Any signs of 
enemy. What he would do if he saw enemy. How alarm 
outguard. Give sentinel any news. Notify outguard 
commander of time of inspection. 

Corporai Canes goes back to outguard and then joins patrol, 
bend members of class out to represent Outguard No. 2 and 
sentinels posted from it. Detail a patrol from among 
class and conduct it to Outguard No 2 




319 


Visiting Patrol 
Procedure 

On completion of the problem at Outguard No. 2 

e c ass is conducted to a point somewhere between 
Outguard No. 2 and Outguard No. 3 where the fol¬ 
lowing situation is distributed: 

The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

The Visiting Patrol has arrived at this point. You, 
Corporal Canes, are right here (indicate). You 
hear a slight noise in that direction (indicate). In 
a moment you see the dim outline of a man. He is 
aimed with a rifle which he seems to be carrying at 
the position of “High Port.” He is stooping for¬ 
ward and moving very cautiously towards you. Ap¬ 
parently he has not seen you. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Procedure 

The Director will read the situation aloud and in¬ 
dicate where Corporal Canes is and where the man 
is. 

(Note.—The place selected for this situation should be chosen 
with great care. It should preferably be in a woods with some 
underbrush and some cleared places. The place where the 
patrol is located when the situation is given out should prefer¬ 
ably be at the near edge of one of these clearings.) 

Explanation 

The Director: “Now I want each member of the 
class to visualize the situation as it exists. You are 
reminded that it is supposed to be night and you 
should base your decisions and actions on that as¬ 
sumption.” 


320 


Terrain Exercises 


Solution 

^ Director: “ Captain Hastings, what would you 

Captain Hastings: u Am I to understand that the 

man approaching is one of our own force or one of 
the enemy ?” 

The Director: “That is one of the points of the 
problem. You do not know yet whether he is a 
friend or enemy. It is dark and impossible to tell. 
1 ou merely see the outlines of a man. He is crouch¬ 
ing. Has his rifle at a ‘High Port’ which places it 
m readiness for instant action.” 

Captain Hastings: “I would not want to shoot one 
of our own men. I guess I would halt and wait and 
see what he is going to do.” 

Th e Director: “The moment you let the man take 
the lead you are just one lap behind him in decision 
and action. If you do something and take the lead 
youiself he will have to make his decisions rapidly 
and base his action on what you do. Never lose the 
opportunity to put your opponent in that hole. As 
far as can be seen, you now have the drop on the man. 

on t make a blunder and lose the advantage. Of 
all tactical offenses, indecision and inaction are the 
most to be condemned. 

Wallace, how do you size up the sit¬ 
uation?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “Well, sir, I would hate to 
make the mistake of killing one of our own men But 
I consider that no man of this outpost has any'busi¬ 
ness running around between the lines at this time 
ot the night unless he is a member of a patrol If 
such is the case the sentinel at No. 2 Outguard would 


Visiting Patrol 


321 


have known about that and told me. So, I suppose 
if it came to the point of killing him, he would he 
paid for. Next, I do not know whether the man is 
alone or whether there are others with him. Up to 
this time I have only seen one man, and it is not like¬ 
ly that one man of the enemy would be wandering 
around in our lines alone. Considering the possibil¬ 
ity of his being one of our men, I would give him just 
one chance.” 

The Director: “That is a very good estimate of the 
situation. Now arrive at a decision as to what you 
are going to do and tell us about it.” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would halt and crouch 
down. The other members of the patrol seeing me 
do this would follow my action without any orders. 
Without making any noise I would unlock my piece 
and aim it at the approaching man. As soon as he 
arrived at a point where I could see him sufficiently 
in the dark to make sure of hitting him if it were 
necessary to fire I would call out in a tone loud 
enough for him to hear and understand that I meant 
business: 4 Halt! Drop that Rifle! Throw up your 
hands! ’ If there was the least hesitation on his part 
or any move to use his rifle I would fire. In other 
words, if he did not drop his rifle instantly and throw 
up his hands, I would shoot him. If he obeyed my 
orders, I would call to him in a low tone, ‘I have the 
drop on you. Do as I say, or I will fire. Walk five 
steps towards me and halt. ’ I would wait a few sec¬ 
onds to see if there were any more men behind him 
and then call to Manley and Harrison to join me at 
the edge of the clearing. While I still covered him and 
with my rifle, I would say: 


322 


Terrain Exercises 


“ ‘Manley, you go out and search the man. Take any 
arms that he may have. Keep out of my way, so I can fire 
if necessary. Now get his rifle. ’ 

I now have the man a prisoner, and.” 

TheDirector: “Wait a moment. That is as far as 
1 want you to go at this time. I think you have 
covered the situation very well. 

“Lieutenant Ralston, it develops that the man is 
one of the enemy. You have him a prisoner. What 
are you going to do now?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would post Manley and 
Harrison to guard against surprise. I would have 
Klme join me. Before the prisoner had a chance 
to get over his confusion and collect his thoughts 1 
would try to get some information from him.” 

him?” Dlrector: “ What questions would you ask 
Lieutenant Ralston: “I would ask him: 

‘What outfit do you belong to? 

“ ‘What are you doing in our lines? 

*y 6 there an V other me n of your outfit around here? 
What is your name and rank?’ ” 


•explanation 

positions*thot°T*' h ° P !£ ou have a11 noted the dis¬ 
positions that Lieutenant Ralston made. He posted 

mo« m „ e ?,t gUard lor there C be 

sume " en?in tj : e vleini V- It is fair to as- 

iS ti “ an 18 n0t ° Ut alone at this time of the 
ho™' - + i T n remaimri g man of the patrol is right 
here with Corporal Canes while he is questioning the 



Visiting Patrol 


323 


• _ . 

prisoner. He has him here for a purpose. Kline 
will take the prisoner back to the support and having 
been present at the examination, if he does give any 
information Kline will know all about it and can tell 
the support commander in case the man changes his 
statements after recovering his composure. 

‘ 6 It is one of the duties of a visiting patrol to pick 
up persons found in the lines. It is of importance 
that they be captured and every precaution towards 
that end should be taken. Make it a rule that per¬ 
sons wandering about in the outpost line have no 
business to be there and take no chances on them get¬ 
ting away.” 


Visiting Patrol Card No. 4 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to a point between outguard No. 2 and No. 3. 

2. Distribute Situation No. 4, read and explain. 

3. Remind class that it is supposed to be night. 

4. Enemy or friend. Size up the situation. 

5. Action. Halt. Cover man with rifle. Call on him to Halt. 

drop rifle. Hold up hands. Effect capture. 

6. Disposition of Patrol of guard against surprise. 

7. Question prisoner. 

8. Explain dispositions. Kline to take prisoner back. Duty of 

visiting patrol to pick up strangers on outpost line. 


The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

You question the prisoner. He refuses to give any 
information. Stands mute. To your question “ What 
are you doing in our lines?” he answers “Lost.” 

Required: 

What action do you, Corporal Canes, take? 



324 


Terrain Exercises 


Procedure 

The Director distributes Situation No. 5 and 
maices such explanation so as may be necessary. 

Solution 

do?” 6 Director: “ Ca Ptain Harvey, what would you 

. V. 1 ' . | ^ .•“lam going back to the support 

m a few minutes now, so I think I would take the 
prisoner along with me.” 

The Director:‘ 1 Captain Hodges, what do you think 
about that?” 

Captain Hodges: “I would not want to be bothered 
with him. Besides we may run into some more en¬ 
emy scouts any time and this man would be in the 
way and might make his escape. I would take no 

chances. I would send him back to the support com¬ 
mander at once. ’ ’ 

Captain James: “Why not send him over to out- 
guard No. 2 for the time being?” 

Captain Hodges: “That might be all right. But 
it I were a support commander and one of my visit- 
“S patrols picked up a prisoner, like we have I 
should want to see him as soon as practicable.’ I 
think it would be much better to send him directly 
back to the support. The support commander can 
question him and make his plans for finding out 
where the other scouts of the patrol to which he prob¬ 
ably belongs, are. ” y 

The Director: “That is the point that I wish to 
bring out In the first place, the Outguard Com¬ 
mander will have no time to question the man. He 



Visiting Patrol 


325 


will have to busy himself immediately making 
arrangements to send out patrols in his immediate 
vicinity to see if he can find any other members of 
the enemy’s forces. It is not likely that the man is 
running around in our lines alone. There are others 
with him. Corporal Canes would send the prisoner 
back to the support commander immediately in order 
that the Lieutenant may question him before he gets 
over the confusion of being captured, and in order 
that patrols may be sent out to find any of his com¬ 
rades that may also be within the lines. 

“Now, having decided to send the prisoner back, 
Lieutenant Baker, how would you go about it?” 

Lieutenant Baker: “There are several things to be 
considered in this procedure. The commander of 
outguard No. 2 must be informed of what has hap¬ 
pened so that he may take the necessary action. The 
support commander must be informed by a verbal 
message of the circumstances attending the capture 
of the prisoner. He must also be informed of the 
immediate future action of the visiting patrol. I 
would cover all of this in orders and a verbal mes¬ 
sage. Private Kline has been with me when I was 
questioning the prisoner. He knows the circum¬ 
stances attending the capture. I would send him 
back with the prisoner and a verbal message to the 
support commander. I would say to the prisoner: 

“ ‘Step over here and face in that direction. I am go¬ 
ing to send you back to our support commander by this 
soldier (indicating Kline). I want to warn you that any 
attempt to escape will be disastrous for you.’ 


326 


Terrain Exercises 


“I will say to Private Kline: 

You conduct this prisoner back to the support com¬ 
mander as quickly as possible. Have him march in front 
of you. Place the point of your bayonet close to his 
back. Do not let him escape. As you pass outguard No. 
2 notify Corporal W of the circumstances and tell him 
that we have gone on over to outguard No. 3. Tell the 
support commander where we captured the prisoner; 
that I could get nothing out of him except that he is lost; 
that you have notified Corporal W at outguard No. 2. 
That I am going to outguard No. 3 and will reconnoiter 
in that vicinity and over as far as outguard No. 1 of 
Support No. 3. You will remain at the support to be 
available as a guide in case the Lieutenant needs you. 
Ho you understand all that you are to do?’ 

“On receiving an affirmative reply I would direct 
ivlme and the prisoner ‘Move out.’ ” 

, The Director: “I should say that you have covered 
the situation most completely. It is most gratify- 
mg to see you officers go about the solution to these 
problems m this manner. It shows that you appre- 

them ” necessit - y for going into the details of 

Explanation 

The Director: “Having disposed of the prisoner, 
Corporal Canes with the remaining men of the visit¬ 
ing patrol will go to outguard No. 3 and make the ap¬ 
proach to it m the same manner as heretofore indi¬ 
cated. The prisoner’s rifle will be hidden in the 
Diusn. it can be secured in the morning. Corporal 

time 6 ” W ° Uld n0t Want t0 be bothered with it as this 


Visiting Patrol 


327 


Visiting Patrol Card No< 5 

Director’s Key 

1. Distribute Situation No. 5 and explain. 

o’ ls P os .iti°n of prisoners—send back to support commander. 

o. iL.xplain why send prisoner to support commander. 

4. Instructions to prisoner. 

5. Orders to Kline and message to support commander. Con¬ 

duct prisoner back. Notify commander of Outguard No. 
_ Contents of message to support commander. 

6. Move on to Outguard No. 3. Identification. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the sentinel post of 
outguard No. 3 where the following situation is dis¬ 
tributed : 

The Problem 

Situation No. 6: 

You have arrived at outguard No. 3. The out¬ 
guard has just been alarmed by the sentinel. The 
outguard commander suggests that you, Corporal 
Canes, accompany him to the sentinel post. You 
agree. The Corporal and yourself and the two mem¬ 
bers of your visiting patrol proceed towards the sen¬ 
tinel. As you approach the sentinel indentifies you 
and calls ‘ ‘ Silence. ’ ’ He tells you that he has heard 
a suspicious noise in front of his post and points in 
the direction from whence it came. 

Required: 

What do you do ? 

Solution 

The Director: “Captain Hall, what would you do 
under the circumstances V’ 

Captain Hall: “It is the business of the visiting 



328 


Terrain Exercises 


patiol to investigate suspicious incidents that may 
be reported by the sentinels. So I would go out and 
investigate this one. I would take the two men of 
my patrol with me.” 

The Director: u We will assume that you are senior 
to the outguard commander. Would you give him 
any instructions ? ’ ’ 

Captain Hall: “I think I would have him send out 

a small patrol to the interval between outguard No 
3 and No. 2.” 


Lieutenant Barry: “That is a point I had been 

thinking about and I had just decided that I would 
not do that.” 

The Director: “On what line of reasoning did you 
base the decision f ” 

Lieutenant Barry: “ Well, sir, if I were Corporal 
Canes and going out with my visiting patrol I would 
not want any other patrol out working around in my 
immediate vicinity. There would be too much dan- 
gei of an accident. I would have to put in about half 
of my time watching out for the other patrol to keep 
10 m shooting them or to keep them from shooting 
me I am sure if I knew another patrol from the 
outguard were out here I could not devote my un¬ 
divided attention to my reconnaissance of the enemy 
I would have Corporal R bring two of his men up to 
the sentinel post and remain there until I get back 
or if anything happens to me to come to my assist¬ 
ance. I would have the remaining men of the out¬ 
guard remain on the alert at their post.” 

The Director: “I think you are right in all you 
have said and I feel sure that Captain Hall will agree 


Visiting Patrol 


329 


with you on reconsideration. Is that not so, Cap¬ 
tain HalH” 

Captain Hall: “Yes, sir.” 

The Director: “We then decide that Corporal 
Canes is to make the reconnaissance with the two re¬ 
maining men of his visiting patrol; that he is going 
to have Corporal R bring up two men of the outguard 
to the vicinity of the sentinel post and that the re¬ 
mainder of the outguard is to remain at the alert at 
its post. Now, Lieutenant Hunt, just how will you 
put this decision into the form of orders ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would issue my orders as 
follows: 

“ ‘You have all the information of the enemy and our 
own troops. 

‘The visiting patrol will conduct a reconnaissance in 
that direction (indicating). 

‘Manley and Harrison will follow me at the usual 
distance. 

“ ‘Corporal R, have two men of your outguard come 
up here. If anything happens to my patrol come to our 
assistance. Have the remainder of your men remain at 
the outguard on the alert. ’ 

“When all is ready I will say: 

“ ‘Manley and Harrison, follow me.’ 

“We will proceed in Indian file towards the sus¬ 
picious noise reported by the sentinel.” 


330 


Terrain Exercises 


Visiting Patrol 


Director’s Key 


Card No. 6 


1- ° n expllh\. at 0utguard No ' 3 distribute Situation No. 6 and 

2 ' DUt on°ou^os?fin P e atr01 ‘° inVestigate •»«**»» occurrences 
3. Question of Patrol from outguard. 

’ VlSI to n fent a ine 0 l 1 reconnaissa »ce, Two men brought up 

place™e P a 0 l S ert aS * ° UtffUard to remain 

5. Orders. 


Procedure 

Varrhf+nlf r n( 7 r C0 ^ dUCted t0 a P° int about 100 
yai ds to the front of the sentinel post of Outeuard 

Silamiio? SltUat !° n No ‘ 7 is dis tributed and such 
explanation as may be necessary is made. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 7: 

You have arrived at this point. You discover a 
cavalryman’s horse, fully equipped, tied to that tree 

si^oTT^ the V1Cmity but ean find no other 
signs ot the enemy. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Solution 

The Director: "Lieutenant Williams, how do you 
size up the situation ?” you 

sion'twT/ WiUiams : have oome to the conclu¬ 

sion that the enemy prisoner told the truth when he 

said he was lost. I do not believe there are any other 

men of the enemy in this immediate vicinity. 7 Had 




Visiting Patrol 


331 


there been other men with the prisoner he surely 
would not have dismounted and tied his horse to a 
tree. If there were more in the party one man would 
have been left out here to hold the horse while the 
prisoner went forward to reconnoiter on foot. I 
arrive at the conclusion that this is his horse and that 
he is a member of the enemy patrol that was operat¬ 
ing over on the right of our line. He got lost and 
was trying to find some of the men of his own patrol 
when he ran into us. I do not think he realized that 
he was inside of our lines at the time he was cap¬ 
tured.” 

The Director: “Has any member of the class a dif¬ 
ferent version of the affair than what Lieutenant 
Williams has just explained?” 

Captain Hastings: “I do not think we would be 
justified in assuming that there are no more of the 
enemy in this vicinity. Two enemy scouts have been 
captured that we know of. These two men were not 
scouting around here alone. There must be more of 
them somewhere. It may be that others have come 
in contact with our outguards that we have not heard 
about.” 

The Director: “Have you heard any firing tonight 
along our lines?” 

Captain Hastings: “No, sir.” 

The Director: “Don’t you think that if there had 
been very much enemy activity along our lines that 
there would have been firing somewhere ? I think it 
is fair to assume that. I believe we would be pretty 
well justified in assuming that the enemy activity is 
limited to perhaps a patrol from which our prisoner 
became lost. 

“The question now before us is what are we going 


332 


Terrain Exercises 


to do F Lieutenant Wallace, what would you do r F’ 
Lieutenant Wallace: “I would get this horse back 
as quic i y as possible and then I would extend my 
reconnaissance farther to the front.” 

The Director: “Where would you send the horse ?” 

Lieutenant Wallace: “I would send him back to the 
support commander.” 

The Director: “Where would you send him, Lieu¬ 
tenant Ralston?” ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I am not so sure I would 
send him anywhere for the present. If we are to 
continue our reconnaissance to the front I do not 
ngure that I would spare a man to send the horse 
back. In any event I would send him no farther 
than outguard No. 3. And I am not so sure that I 
would go any farther on the reconnaissance. I do 
not think a visiting patrol—so few men—should go 
veiy far in front of the line of observation at night.” 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, what do you 
think about all of this ? ’ 1 ^ 

Captain Harvey: “I agree with Lieutenant Ral- 

fi on ; ™n noth ® r pomt that presents itself to me is 
ms: When the support commander gets the nris- 

oner we sent back he will probably send our section 
eader out with a patrol to reconnoiter the front and 
e sergeant will want to see me and get what infor¬ 
mation I have. The natural place for him to come 
hist to find me will be outguard No. 3 I think T 
should get back there at least by the time the patrol 
from the support reaches there. I estimate tw t 
could stay around here for a few minutes yet but I 
would have to be getting back pretty soon ” ’ 1 

The Director: “What would be your decision based 
on your sizing up of the situation ?” 


333 


Visiting Patrol 

Captain Harvey: “To send the horse back to out- 
guard No. 3 right away. 

Manley and myself would stay out here in con¬ 
cealment for, say five minutes longer, and then go 
back to the outguard by way of the sentinel post. ’ ’ 
The Director: “Any member of the class that does 
not agree with that decision? (After waiting a mo¬ 
ment.) There seems to be none, so we will agree to 
that solution of the problem.” 


Visiting Patrol Card No. 7 

Director’s Key 

1* Conduct class to a point 100 yards in front of sentinel post 
of Outguard No. 3. Distribute Situation No. 7. 

2. Size up situation. Estimate of connection of enemy prisoner 

with the cavalry horse. 

3. Disposition of horse. 

4. Future action of patrol commander. 

5. Decision; send horse to Outguard No. 3; Go to Outguard No. 

3 to meet commander of patrol sent out from support. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to outguard No. 3, at 
which place Situation No. 8 is distributed and ex¬ 
plained. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 8: 

You have arrived at outguard No. 3. On your 
way back the outguard commander who was at the 
sentinel post joined you. He left the two additional 
men at the sentinel post. You explained to him what 
happened on your reconnaissance to the front. 

At this moment Sergeant Hamilton, the section 
leader in command of a patrol of one squad from the 



834 


Terrain Exercises 


suppoit, ailives, and states that he has been ordered 
to make a reconnaissance to the front of our line of 
observation. Patrols are going out from the other 

supports to reconnoiter their fronts. Sergeant 
Hamilton says: 

Corporal Canes, 
have.” 


give me all the information you 


Required: 

State the information you, Corporal Canes, would 
give to Sergeant Hamilton. 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now, I assume that each of you 
have followed the details of the problem. You know 
just what has taken place. Now, I want each of you 
to write out on your pads just what you would say 
to Sergeant Hamilton in reply to his instructions, 

Give me all the information you have.” 

“I want you to write down the exact words that 
you would use if you were Corporal Canes ’ ’ 

When all the members of the class have completed 

eir solutions they will be collected and again dis¬ 
tributed, making sure that no man receives his own 
solution back again. 

The Director calls upon one or more members of 
i's discussed reat ^ S ° lution in his Possession and it 

At the conclusion of this the Director will submit 
the following solution for discussion (conies of thi« 
will be distributed to the class) : 11 ° f thlS 

Solution 

“When my patrol arrived about midway between 
outguard No. 2 and outguard No. 3 we captured a 


Visiting Patrol 


335 


soldier of the enemy. I asked several questions. He 
refused to answer, except that he said he was lost. 
I sent him back to the support and came on over to 
outguard No. 3. On arriving there the sentinel told 
me that he had heard a suspicious noise out in front 
of his post. I took two men and went out about 100 
yards where I found a cavalry horse, fully equipped. 
Sent him back to the outguard here. Made examina¬ 
tion to see if I could find any evidence of other horses 
or men. Found none. Stayed a few minutes out 
there. Heard nothing. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Director reads the solution aloud. The mem¬ 
bers of the class follow from the copy in their pos¬ 
session. 

The Director: “This is merely ore solution of the 
problem. There may be others equally good. This 
situation was devised to give you practice in impart¬ 
ing information that you may have. On occasions 
like this time may be limited and the information 
will have to be given hurriedly and without waste of 
words. The idea is that you should state the cir¬ 
cumstances of the incidents in the fewest words pos¬ 
sible and at the same time make clear just what has 
happened. You will find practice of this kind very 
valuable and will pay you large dividends on actual 
service .’ 9 

Explanation 

The Director: “This is the conclusion of our Ter¬ 
rain Exercise on the subject of the visiting patrol 
I feel sure that if any one of you ever have occasion 
to order out visiting patrols that you will have a bet¬ 
ter idea of how they go about their tasks than you 


336 


Terrain Exercises 


previously had. I am sure that you know what a 
visiting patrol is and what it is supposed to do. 

6 6 I am sure you will appreciate how necessary it is 
for your noncommissioned officers to be trained in 
this work so they may know how to meet the situa¬ 
tions and solve the problems that may confront them. 

“In outlining the future action of Corporal Canes’ 
patrol I may say that Sergeant Hamilton now as¬ 
sumes responsibility for the further reconnaissance 
to the front of the line of observation. Corporal 
Canes will send Harrison back to the support com¬ 
mander with the horse with a verbal message. Cline 
has again joined him at outguard No. 3. The three 
men, Corporal Canes, Manley and Cline continue the 
operations of the visiting patrol, going on over to 
outguard No. 1 of support No. 3 and then back to 
their own support. On arrival there Corporal Canes 
finds that it is about time for him to start out on the 
rounds with his 2 o’clock patrol. This has been his 
busy night. ’ ’ 


Visiting Patrol Card No. 8 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to position of outguard No. 3. Distribute 

Situation No. 8 and explain. 

2. Have members of class write out solutions on pad. Collect 

and distribute. Read and comment. 

3. Distribute solution for discussion. Read it aloud. 

4. Explain that this is merely a solution. 

5. Situation designed to give practice in stating information. 

6. Conclusion of Terrain Exercise. Knowledge of work of visit¬ 

ing patrol. Necessity for training of noncommissioned 
officers. 

7. Future action of visiting patrol. Send back horse. Continue 

patrol to outguard No. 1 of support No. 3; thence to 
support. Time to go out with 2 o’clock patrol. 



Terrain Exercise No. 9. 

A Reconnoitering Patrol 

The Problem 

General Situation: 

A Blue battalion has bivouaced at (a). An out¬ 
post with support along (6) has been established. 
Support number (c) under the command of Lieuten¬ 
ant A is at (d). It is now 2 o’clock p. m. The 
posting of the outguards has been completed. The 
support commander has made his inspection and sent 
in his report to the outpost commander. The cover¬ 
ing troops have been withdrawn to the support. 
There has been no contact with the enemy. 

Situation No. 1: 

At 2:05 o’clock p. m., a Mr., who lives at 

(e) comes to you, Lieutenant A, and gives you the 
following information : 

I have just had a telephone conversation with a friend 
of mine, who lives about (/) miles (g) of here. He states 
that there is a Red force in the vicinity of (h). The tele¬ 
phone went out before I could get any further information. 

Required: 

What action do you, Lieutenant A, take? 

Explanation of Symbols 

(a) State the location of the bivouac of the main 
body of the battalion. This should be at a logical 
point with reference to the location of the outpost 
line. 


337 



338 


Terrain Exercises 


(b) State the location of the general line of outpost 
supports. 

( c ) The number of the support commanded by 
Lieutenant A. This should be given a logical num¬ 
ber with reference to the whole line of supports. 

( d ) The location of support (c). The point 
where the Terrain Exercise is to start. 

(e) State where Mr. lives. 

(/) The number of miles from the support to 

where Mr.’s friend lives. This should 

be several miles away. 

(g) The direction stated by points of compass 
(North, South, East, West). 

(h) The general location of the enemy. This 
should be in the direction which it is intended to 
send the reconnoitering patrol. 

Procedure 

The members of the class are assembled at ( d ), 
where the outpost support is located. 

The Director will distribute copies of the problem 
to members of the class. A few minutes are allowed 
them to read it. The Director then reads the prob¬ 
lem aloud and points out the places mentioned. One 
or more of the members of the class are called upon 
to state their understanding of the situation. 

The Director: “Now, I want each member of the 
class to consider himself as being Lieutenant A, com¬ 
manding the outguard located at this point. Mr. 

. ; . has just given you the information as 

stated in the situation. What are you going to do 
about it? Lieutenant Williams, just what would 
you do?” 





339 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would send out a patrol.’ : ’ 

1 he Director: “How do you arrive at this decision 
so quickly V 7 

Lieutenant TVilliams: “Well, sir, I think that 
would be the thing to do. I have gotten some import¬ 
ant information about the enemy. Details are lack- 
mg. I would want to know more about how many 
tioops he has, what kind of troops they are and what 
he is doing. I can see no better way to get this in- 

foimation than by sending out a patrol to secure it 
for me.” 

The Director: “Captain Hastings, what do you 
think about that?” 

Captain Hastings: “There is always a question in 
a case like this as to whether a pair of scouts should 
be employed or whether a patrol is to be sent out. 
I should size up the situation a few minutes. Exam¬ 
ine my niap, if I had one, and then decide what meas¬ 
ures I would take. Another point that presents it¬ 
self to me is the question as to whether I should send 
out the men from this support or whether it would 
be better to send the information back to the outpost 
commander and let him decide what is to be done.” 

The Director: “Patroling is usually conducted 
from the supports. I think you would be justified 
in taking the initiative in this case. At all events, 
let us assume that you would.” 

Captain Hastings: “Can the Director give us some 
information on the question of the employment of 
scouts or patrols.” 

The Director: “There are no hard and fast rules 
that may be invoked in arriving at such a decision, 
but there are certain principles that may be applied, 


340 


Terrain Exercises 


and when reconnaissance enterprises are to be under¬ 
taken the condition should be examined closely. The 
scout or pair of scouts would, as a rule, be preferred 
when concealment is highly essential, and usually 
when concealment, though not essential, is possible 
throughout the reconnaissance, or when the enemy 
habitually conducts his reconnaissance with strong 
patrols and scouts have a better chance of eluding 
him. 

“In the following cases a patrol should be em¬ 
ployed: When information has to be sent in at inter¬ 
vals; when it is desired to capture prisoners; when 
concealment is deemed impossible; when the recon¬ 
naissance is to be extended over such a period of time 
that relief of scouts will benecessary; when an urgent 
mission has been assigned and it is necesary to push 
through the enemy’s covering troops. 

“In some cases it may be advisable to employ a 
patrol for the first part of the reconnaisance and at a 
certain point break up into scouting parties of a sin¬ 
gle scout or pair of scouts. 

“If possible, the individual preferences of the 
most efficient scouts should be considered. Some men 
lose self-confidence if attached to a patrol and are 
limited in their actions by the direction of the patrol 
leader; others dislike the responsibility of uncon¬ 
trolled action. 

“These are only general rules and cannot be fol¬ 
lowed blindly. The circumstances of each occasion 
must be taken into consideration in arriving at a 
decision. 

“Now, considering the points I have stated, would 
you employ scouts or a patrol in the case under con¬ 
sideration, Captain Hastings?” 


341 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 

6 aptain Hastings : “ I think a small patrol would 
be more suitable. There will probably be messages 
to send back and the patrol may have to remain out 
for a considerable length of time. I believe a patrol 
would be more suitable than individual scouts.’’ 

The Director: “Let us then decide that we are to 
send out a reconnoitering patrol to secure the infor¬ 
mation we desire. 

Before going further with the problem, I want to 
say a few words about the patrol. ’ ’ 

Explanation 

The Director: “The first duty of a patrol is to get 
information, and information is greatly increased in 
value if the enemy does not know that it has been ob¬ 
tained. The patrol is required, primarily, to dis¬ 
cover whether or not the enemy is in a certain lo¬ 
cality. This information is only useful to the officer 
who sent the patrol out. It is, therefore, the next 
duty of the patrol to get the information back as 
soon as possible, especially when the enemy is met. 

“Next of importance in the duties of the patrol is 
to continue to observe the enemy when once dis¬ 
covered, to follow him up and ascertain the direction 
taken if he retires, or to fall back if he advances in 
strength, endeavoring to keep even with him on a 
flank. The enemy is certain to send out scouts to his 
front, but may neglect his flanks. 

Boldness must be tempered with caution. It is 
useless to obtain information if you cannot get it 
back where it will do some good. A little informa¬ 
tion sent in in time to be of use is clear gain to your 
side. A patrol that finds out all about the enemy 





342 


Terrain Exercises 


and ends up by falling into the hands of the enemy 
is a dead loss not only in men but in time as other pa¬ 
trols will have to be sent out to get the same infor¬ 
mation on which important decisions may depend.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, one of the 
first questions that will present itself to the support 
commander is the selection of a patrol leader. What 
factors would you consider in this matter?” 

Lieutenant TV allace: “In the first place I would 
want a non-commissioned officer for patrol leader; 
further, I would want to send out the best qualified 
one in the platoon. To meet this requirement I 
would select the platoon sergeant to lead this patrol. 
The importance of the mission is such as to warrant 
sending him.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, do you agree 
with this solution?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “No, sir. I realize the impor¬ 
tance of the mission of the patrol. I know we should 
have a qualified man to lead it, but I should hesitate 
to send my platoon sergeant out. ’ 9 

The Director: “I think you are right and when 
Lieutenant Wallace reflects on the matter I think he 
will agree with you. The platoon sergeant has a mul¬ 
titude of duties to perform in connection with the in¬ 
terior administration of the platoon. In his admin- 
istrative capacity he is to the platoon what the first 
sergeant is to the company. In addition, he has his 
tactical duties to perform. He is the second in com¬ 
mand, and should anything happen to the platoon 
leader he automatically assumes charge. There is no 



343 


Rec onnoitering Patrol 

n 11 * n P! a ^ 00 P w ^° is so familiar with all 

e details of the dispositions of the support and the 
orders under which it is operating. I do not believe 
i would be good policy to send the platoon sergeant 
out on a reconnoitering mission which may well ex¬ 
tend into the night. 

Now, having rejected the idea of sending the pla¬ 
toon sergeant, what man would you send in charge 
of the patrol, Captain Harvey 

Captain Harvey: “I would send a section leader. 
The one whose section is on the line of outguards. 

He seems to me to be the most available man for the 
duty.” 

The Director: “I agree with you. Ordinarily in 
an outpost support of this kind we take the out¬ 
guards from one of the sections of the platoon and 
hold the other section to form the main body of the 
support. This leaves the commander of the out- 
guard section surplus in a way, and makes him avail¬ 
able for important patrol duty, such as that we have 
under consideration. 

“The next question that comes up is the strength 
of the patrol. This is a reconnoitering patrol. Its 
mission is to gain in formation of the enemy. It 
need not be made strong to give it fighting power, 
for it will not engage the enemy in combat except 
as the last resort. It must not have any more men 
than are absolutely necessary to carry out its mis¬ 
sion, for every additional man is a drag on the 
patrol leader and subject the patrol to just that much 
more danger of detection by the enemy. There will 
be messages to be sent back, at least one and possibly 
two or three. The patrol must be sufficiently strong 


344 


Terrain Exercises 


to provide these messengers without reducing it be¬ 
low two men. 

Having all of these points in mind, what would 
be the strength of the patrol, Captain Harvey V 9 

Captain Harvey: “I should say there would be at 
least two messages to be sent back, and it may be 
necessary to send one of them by two messengers. I 
would not want the patrol leader to be left out alone. 
These factors would indicate a strength of 5 men. 
The patrol leader and 4 men.” 

The Director : Has any member of the class a dif¬ 
ferent idea than this?” 

Captain Hodges-. “In my own mind I had tenta¬ 
tively decided to send a complete squad. It seems to 
me that we should send enough men so that if they 
have to fight their way through to get the informa¬ 
tion desired they could do it. Pour men would not 
be sufficient for the purpose. I should like some en- 
lightment on this phase of the subject.” 

The Dit ectoi .* Captain .1 ames, can you answer 
Captain Hodges?” 

Captain James: “In the first place, a reconnoiter- 
ing patrol does not fight except as a last resort to 
escape capture or to give warning of the approach of 
the enemy and to delay him by firing on him. In the 
next place, I do not see how this patrol will ever get 
close enough to the enemy to get any really impor¬ 
tant information if it starts to fight its way through 
the Red covering troops. Once a shot is fired the 
Red commander will send out sufficient patrols to 
keep your patrol at a distance, and it will get no in¬ 
formation whatever. My idea is that any informa¬ 
tion this patrol gets will be by avoiding the Red cov¬ 
ering troops and not by fighting. ” ° V 


Reconnoitering Patrol. 345 

The Director: “I think you are correct. The 
smaller the patrol, within limitations, the better. I 
think a leader and four men is about right. Lieu¬ 
tenant Baker, tell us what you would include in your 
order to the patrol leader.” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I would first tell the patrol 
leader all the information I have about the enemy 
and our troops. I would give him general direction 
as to where I want the patrol to go. I would tell him 
what information I want regarding the enemy. Tell 
him in general terms where to return and where to 
send messages.” 

The Director : “The final question that comes up is 
that of the equipment of the men. How would you 
have them equipped, Captain Hall?” 

Captain Hall: “I would want them to go lightly 
equipped. They should have a ration in their haver¬ 
sack; not over 40 rounds of ammunition and their 
rifle. I would have them leave the bayonets with 
their packs. They will not need them.” 

Explanation 

The Director: “You see the process we have gone 
through to determine that we are going to send out a 
patrol of five men from the support. You see how 
many things you have to consider in arriving at a 
decision as to what you are going to do. This is what 
we call making an 'Estimate of the Situation.’ It 
is merely a process of sizing up the situation and de¬ 
ciding on what you are going to do to meet it. An of¬ 
ficer who fails to do this will in the end make a fail¬ 
ure of the soldier game. The one who does it habit¬ 
ually has far greater chances for the operations he is 



346 


Terrain Exercises 


conducting to turn out a success. Just a few min¬ 
utes ? systematic thought will save you a lot of mili¬ 
tary blunders. 

Based on this estimate of the situation we arrive 
at a decision to send out a patrol of five men to secure 
information of the enemy. Lieutenant Barry, as¬ 
sume that you are Lieutenant A, commanding the 
support. Can you give us the orders necessary to 
put the decision into operation?” 

Solution 

Lieutenant Barry: “I will try, sir. I will order: 

“ ‘Sergeant C (platoon Sergeant) turn out a recon- 
noitering patrol of four privates, with Sergeant B (sec¬ 
tion leader) as patrol leader. Have the men carry a ration 
and 40 rounds of ammunition. Leave bayonets here. 
Have Sergeant B report to me as soon as he is ready to 
go out.’ 

“I will frame up my orders to the patrol leader, 

and as soon as he reports to me I will give them to 
him: 

“ ‘I have just received information that there is a Red 
force in the vicinity of (h). Here is the point. Here is 

the road leading in that direction. (Indicating on the 
map.)* 

“ ‘There are no other patrols out from this support. 

I will notify the other supports that you are going out. 

‘ ‘You will take this reconnoitering patrol of four men 
and proceed toward (k) and find out what you can about 
the enemy. Information as to his strength and composi¬ 
tion and what he is doing is particularly desired. 


■ * s 1}° map available the support commander should 

the road. 32 “ S practicabIe the location of the enemy and 



347 


Reconnoitering Patrol 

Return when you have accomplished your mission. 

Carlin will be second in command. 

“ ‘Here is a map. 

‘Send messages here.’ 

I will send a runner to the other support com¬ 
manders to inform them of the fact that I am sending 
out a reconnoitering patrol and give them the infor¬ 
mation we have about the enemy. 

“I will send the citizen who gave me the informa¬ 
tion to the outpost commander accompanied by a 
runner and a message: 

I am sending you a Mr... who lives at 

. He informs me that he just had a telephone 

conversation with a friend of his who lives . 

miles .of here and who states that a Red force 

is in the vicinity of ( h ). The telephone went out before 
he could get any further information. I am sending out 
a reconnoitering patrol of four men under Sergeant B to 
find out what they can. I will notify other supports of 
the action I have taken.’ 

“I will explain to Mr.that the infor¬ 

mation he has given me is very important and tell 
him that it will be necessary for him to go back to 
the outpost commander with the runner.” 

Procedure 

The Director: “That is very good. Are there any 
questions? Please do not hesitate to ask questions. 
They are the very life of the Terrain Exercise. ’ ’ 

The Director endeavors to answer any question 
that may be asked. 

Each member of the class is now required to write 





348 


Terrain Exercises 


out the orders of the support commander to Sergeant 
B, the patrol leader, and the message that he would 
send back to the outpost commander by the runner 
who conducts Mr.to him. 

The orders and messages are collected and distrib¬ 
uted again. One or more members of the class are 
required to read those in his possession. 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 1 

Director’s Key 

1. Prepare copies of the problem and situation, one for each 

member of the class. 

2. Conduct the class to the point where the problem is to be 

started. 

3. Distribute copies of problem. Read problem and have mem¬ 

bers of class explain tactical situation. 

4. Work out solution in detail. Scouts or a patrol. Patrol, 

messages, capture prisoners, concealment, combat. 

5. Duties of patrol. Combat with enemy. Continue observa¬ 

tion. Get information back. 

6. Selection of patrol leader. Platoon sergeant. Section 

leader. Explain duties of platoon sergeant. Availa¬ 
bility of section leader. 

7. Strength of patrol. 

8. Older for patrol: Information of enemy and our own troops. 

Where to go. When to return. Where messages are to 
be sent. 

9. Explain necessity for estimate of situation. 

10. Solution. Orders to platoon sergeant. Order for patrol 
leader. Runner to adjoining supports. Send citizen to 
outpost commander. 


Procedure 

Hie Director: ‘‘Each member of the class will now 
consider himself to be Sergeant B. who has been des¬ 
ignated as the patrol leader. Lieutenant Hunt, 
what equipment would you carry?” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I would not want to be encum- 




349 


Rec onnoitering Patrol 

bered with a rifle, so I would not carry one. I would 
want a pair of field glasses, a compass, a watch, a 
wire cutter, pencils and a book of field message 
blanks. If one were available I would want a map 
of the country over which the patrol is to operate. 
Each member of the patrol should be provided with 
a compass and a wire cutter. At least one man should 
carry a combination flag kit for wigwag and sema¬ 
phore signaling-” 

Lieutenant JVilhams: “I have understood that 
visual signaling is about to be discarded in the serv¬ 
ice. Can the Director give us some information on 
that point ?” 

The Director: “ There is a tendency to throw it 
into the discard, but I am not so sure that it is right. 
There are times when visual signaling has its place 
and will save a lot of time and trouble. The codes 
are easily learned and any intelligent man can mas¬ 
ter the process within a comparatively short time. 
I think there should be a few men in every rifle pla¬ 
toon who are good signalers. Going back to the 
equipment of the patrol, I think Lieutenant Hunt 
has enumerated the essential items of equipment. 

“ Lieutenant Williams, suppose you were out on 
patrol duty and captured one of the enemy scouts, 
what is the first thing you would look for on him?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I would look for some 
marking that would give me an identification—that 
would give me information as to the outfit to which 
he belongs.” 

The Director: “That is right. During the war 
both sides took exceptional measures to secure iden¬ 
tification of units that were opposed to them. Of 



350 


Terrain Exercises 


course, much of this work was done during the period 
of so-called trench warfare, but the same idea holds 
good in open warfare. Identification of the units to 
which prisoners belong is always sought after by the 
intelligence service. Now, Lieutenant Williams, 

what does all of this point to with respect to our own 
patrol?’ ’ 

Lieutenant Williams: “That the members of the 
patiol should carry nothing with them that will serve 

to give the enemy an identification, should one of 
them be captured.” 

The Director: “You are right. Should one of our 
soldiers be captured, the enemy should be able to 
secure from him only his name and rank. The pris¬ 
oner should give no other information whatever. 

“Before going out with a patrol the patrol leader 
makes an inspection of his men. What is included 
m this inspection, Captain Hastings?” 

Captain Hastings: “If I were making the inspec- 
tion I would satisfy myself that every man is physi¬ 
cally fit for the duty to be performed. I would not 
want a man who has been on some strenuous duty 
and is all worn out. I would see that every man is 
properly armed and equipped, that each man has a 
ration, 40 pounds of ammunition and a canteen full 
of water. I would not allow a man to carry his roll. 

would see that the equipment is arranged so that it 
will not rattle or glisten in the sunlight. I would 
see that no man carried anything that would give the 
enemy an identification or information that would 
e of value to him. I will verify my own equipment 

and make sure that I have everything that I will 
probably require.” 


351 


Reconnoitering Patrol 

The Director will now hand out the slips bearing 
special situation No. 2: 

The Problem 

Situation No. 2: 

You, Sergeant B, have been designated to com- 
mand the reconnoitering patrol, consisting of Pri- 
vates Anderson, Bailey, Carlin and Davis. Lieuten- 

ant A has given you your orders and turned the men 
over to you. 

Your orders are: 

'‘I have just received information that there is a Red 
force in the vicinity of (h). (The point (h) and the road 

leading toward it are pointed out on the map or on the 
ground.) 

There are no other patrols out from this support. 
I will notify the other supports that you are going out. 

“You will take this reconnoitering patrol of four men 
and proceed towards (h), and find out what you can 
about the enemy. Information as to his strength and 
composition, and what he is doing is particularly desired. 
Return when you have accomplished your mission. 
“Send messages here.” 

Required: 

The orders that you give. 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Wallace, we will as¬ 
sume that you are Sergeant B. You have made the 
inspection of your patrol and corrected all deficien¬ 
cies. You are ready to give your orders and arrange 
for the patrol to move out. Just what would you say 
and what would you do V’ 


352 


Terrain Exercises 


Lieutenant Wallace: “I would spread my map out 
on the ground where the men could see it. In the 
presence of the support commander I would give my 
orders: 

“ ‘ Information has been received that there is a Red 
force in the vicinity of (h). Here is the place on the map 
(indicating). We are here (indicating). This is the 
road that we will guide on (indicating). There are no 
other patrols out from our support. 

‘We are going out as a reconnoitering patrol. We will 
find out what we can about the enemy. Our special mis¬ 
sion is to find out his strength, his composition and what 
he is doing. 

‘Anderson, you will be advance man; march on the 
left-hand side of the road. 

“ ‘Bailey, you follow Anderson at a distance of 25 
yards, on the right-hand side of the road. 

Carlin, you will march with me. 

‘ k ‘Davis, you are get-away man. Follow me at a dis¬ 
tance of 75 yards. 

“ ‘I will indicate the route and assembly places as we 
go along. Drill regulation signals will be used. 

‘ ‘ ‘ Messages will be brought to the support commander 
here.’ 

‘ 1 1 will then inquire: What time has the Lieuten¬ 
ant ? I will set my watch to agree and direct: 

“ ‘All men who have watches set them at . 

(time).’ 

6 ‘ I will then command: 

1. Squad, 2. ATTENTION, and follow with 1. With 
ball cartridges, 2. LOAD. 



Reconnoiter i n g Patrol 


353 


‘ ‘ I will then direct: 

“ ‘MOVE OUT.’ ” 

Procedure 

The Director: “That is very good. I think you 
have covered all the points that should be included 
in the patrol commander’s order. I wish each mem¬ 
ber of the class would compare this order with the 
kind that is usually mumbled out to members of a 
patrol by the average patrol leader at maneuvers. It 
is a fact that most patrols go out, either with orders 
that they do not understand or with no orders at all. 
Do not allow this to be done under any circumstances. 
You can well afford to hold up the departure of the 
patrol until the patrol commander can dope out his 
orders and give them properly. And you must in¬ 
sist on this being done. If you do not do so it will 
never be done properly. 

“Now I want each member of the class to write 
our Sergeant B’s orders to his patrol. Try to get 
the order in the language that Lieutenant Wallace 
used in his solution. ’ ’ 

When this is completed the papers are collected 
and redistributed as indicated in previous exercises. 
The class is now ready to proceed with the next sit¬ 
uation. 


354 


Terrain Exercises 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 2 

Director’s Key 

1. Each member of the class to consider himself as being Ser¬ 

geant B. 

2. Equipment of patrol leader: Field glass, compass, watch, 

wire cutter, pencil, message blanks. Members:—Com¬ 
pass, wire cutter, flag kit. 

3. Visual signaling. Identification. 

4. Inspection: Physically fit for duty; arms and equipment; 

equipment rattle or glisten; verify own equipment. 

5. Hand out Special Situation No. 2. Explain. 

6. Map. Information of enemy and own troops; mission of 

patrol; tactical dispositions; signals; second in command; 
messages; synchronize watches; load rifles; move out. 

7. Explain necessity for training in giving these verbal orders. 

8. Write out the orders of Sergeant B. Collect and redistri¬ 

bute them. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted to the front to the 
point where one of the outguards of the support is 
supposed to be posted. 

The slips bearing Situation No. 3 are handed out. 

Situation No. 3: 

At this point is posted Outguard No. ... of Sup- 
• port No. (c). The main body of the outguard is (In¬ 
dicate). The outguard commander is here. 

Required: 

What do you, Sergeant B, do. 

Explanation 

The Director: “The commander of a patrol will 
see the commander of the outguard at the place where 
he crosses the line of observation and give him infor¬ 
mation as to where he is going and what he is going 






Recon n o i terin g Patrol 


355 


for. In addition to this he secures any information 
that the outguard commander may have of the coun¬ 
try to the front and the enemy. 

“This procedure is especially necessary in the pres¬ 
ent case. Sergeant B’s mission will probably keep 
him out late, so that it will be after dark when he 
comes back through the lines. In order to avoid 
chances of being mistaken for the enemy a recogni¬ 
tion signal should be arranged for at this time.” 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, you are Ser¬ 
geant B, the patrol leader. The outguard comman¬ 
der has come out to meet you. Just what would you 
do with respect to your patrol and what would you 
say to the outguard commander % ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “In the first place I will sig¬ 
nal the patrol to halt. I will then tell the outguard 
commander where we are going and all about the 
mission of the patrol. I will arrange a recognition 
signal with him. I will find out any information 
about the enemy that he may have. ’ ’ 

The Director: “All right. You have told us all 
about what you will do. Now let us do it. Assume 
that I am the outguard commander. Now just what 
will you say to me ? ’* 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I will say: 

“ 'Information lias been received that there is a Red 
force in the vicinity of ( h ). (Indicating on the map.) 
We are going out as a reconnoitering patrol, guiding on 
the . . . road. (Indicating on the map.) We are 

to determine the enemy’s strength, and composition and 
what he is doing. I have four other men with me. 


356 


Terrain Exercises 


“ ‘We will probably be out until after dark and I want 
to arrange a recognition signal with you. If agreeable 
to you it will be the call 3—4 or the same tapped on the 
rifle stock. 

“ ‘Have you any information about the enemy V 

“ After doing all of this I will signal the patrol 
FORWARD MARCH and proceed on my way.” 

The Director: “That is very good. I wish you 
would explain to the class just how you propose to 
employ the recognition signal.” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “In this case we agreed on 
the signal 3—4. When any of us approach the sen¬ 
tinel post of the outguard after dark we will use the 
recognition signal. If there is no danger of enemy 
patrols lurking in the vicinity the man approaching 
the post calls out 3—4; the sentinel on post answers 
the call by calling 3—4 and they both know that 
everything is all right and it is safe for the scout to 
proceed. If there is danger of enemy patrols dis¬ 
covering the signal should it be called out, the man 
coming in would approach the sentinel post cautious¬ 
ly. He would tap 3—4 on the stock of his rifle until 
it is recognized by the sentinel and the signal re¬ 
turned by the latter tapping 3—4 on the stock of his 
rifle.” (The method should be illustrated.) 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, why do we go to 
all this trouble?” 

Captain Harvey: “A sentinel on post, after he has 
been harassed by enemy scouts for a while, takes no 
chances. He generally shoots first and then chal¬ 
lenges. The recognition signal is simply an expe¬ 
dient to lessen the chances of accident.” 








357 


Reconnoiter i n g Patrol 

The Director: “Now all of these details may seem 
to be small affairs to you. But the man who knows 
them and requires them to be carried out in service 
is the man who will be successful in military opera¬ 
tions. Almost any dub can blunder through, pay¬ 
ing the price in the lives of his men. It is the man 
that knows all of the little details of tactics that will 
come through successfully with his command without 
the sacrifice of a man more than is necessary to ac¬ 
complish his mission. The proposition of measuring 
accomplishment by the number of casualties is old 
stuff and will not go with the commander that is up 
to his job. It is the man who accomplishes his mis¬ 
sion with the least number of casualties that is the 
successful military leader/’ 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 3 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to point where outguard is supposed to be 

posted. Hand out Situation No. 3. 

2. Explain what is done by patrol leader. Tell outguard com¬ 

mander about patrol going out. Arrange for recognition 
signal. Get information of enemy. 

3. Proceed to solution. Require member of class to state exact 

words used by patrol commander. 

4. Explain the method of using the recognition signal. 

5. Explain necessity for details. Measure success by ncmber 

of casualties avoided. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted along the route of the 
patrol for a distance of some 600 yards, where it is 
halted. 

Explanation 

The Director: “It is assumed that the patrol has 
advanced a distance of some two miles from the out- 



358 


Terrain Exercises 


post and has arrived at this vicinity. This assump¬ 
tion is made in order to save time and energy. We 
can get just as much training out of our Terrain Ex¬ 
ercise by coming this 600 yards as we could by walk¬ 
ing the entire two miles. The idea is that we get in¬ 
to new terrain for each phase of the problem. ” 

Procedure 

The.Dilector now distributes the papers bearing 
Situation No. 4 to the members of the class. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 4: 

You, Sergeant B, the patrol leader, have arrived 

at this point. There has been no contact with the 
enemy. 

Required: 

What is the formation of your patrol at this 
moment? 

Explanation 

+h?J le + D Z eCt °T :Before going into the details of 
this situation, I desire to say a few words about the 

conduet of the operations of a patrol. It is impos- 
abfe to lay down any hard and fast rule for the con¬ 
duct of a patrol. Each situation will have to be 
worked out by itself. Each solution will vary with 
ie nature of the country over which you are oper- 
a mg and what the enemy does. A few general prin¬ 
ciples only may be enunciated. 

* J * • -| ^ as he advances toward his ob¬ 

jective, will mentally make note of various interme¬ 
diate objectives to serve as stepping stones for his 
further advance. He can never be certain that he 










359 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 

will not encounter the enemy, and must be prepared 
at all times for such an event. 

“If the patrol advances in one body, a hostile pa¬ 
trol will allow them to approach and then ambush- 
cade and capture them. Further, all the members of 
the patrol would not be able to see much more than 
one man. If the patrol advances in an extended line 
of skirmishers, capture is rendered much more diffi¬ 
cult, but each man will be acting more or less inde¬ 
pendently, and it will be most difficult for the patrol 
leader to control the operations. 

“A patrol should assume the general formation of 
a column on the march, i. e., there is an advance 
guard, a main body, flankers, and a rear guard. 
These several elements may be represented by only 
one man, but the principle is exactly the same. The 
advance man is necessary to give warning of the ap¬ 
proach of the enemy. The flankers are necessary to 
watch toward the flanks and prevent the enemy from 
ambuscading the patrol or working around its rear 
unobserved and cutting off its line of retreat. The 
main body is necessary to back up the advance man 
and protect him. The rear man is the “get-away 
man,” so that in case the patrol is surprised by the 
enemy, at least one man will have a good chance to 
escape and carry the news back to the support com¬ 
mander. You must always remember that a patrol 
that goes out and does not return, or is not heard 
from within a reasonable time, is the cause for a 
great deal of uneasiness and anxiety back at the out¬ 
post line. 

“Some authorities advocate that the patrol com¬ 
mander march as the advance man of the patrol. 


360 


Terrain Exercises 


This is not believed to be good tactics. He should be 
centrally located so that he will be able to control the 
operations of the patrol. The patrol leader has been 
selected for this particular line of work. The officer 
who sent him out is depending on him to carry out the 
mission upon which he has been sent and to get in¬ 
formation back. He should not, therefore, needless¬ 
ly make himself a target for the enemy marksman 
who may be lying in concealment at the turn of a 
road or trail. If he is the leading man he will be so 
busily occupied with the task of observation, that he 
will have little time available for conducting the oper¬ 
ations of the other members of the patrol. Further¬ 
more, if anything happens at the front that needs 
his attention, he can go there in a very short space of 
time. 

When a small patrol is advancing along a road 
which is more or less winding and has brush and trees 
along the side, it is believed that the Boni point for¬ 
mation will usually meet the requirements. In this 
formation the leading man walks along one side of 
the road, close up to the brush. The next man fol¬ 
lows him at a distance of about 25 yards on the oppo¬ 
site side of the road. The remaining men follow at 
varying distances on alternate sides of the road. The 
rear or get-away man should march at least 75 yards 
in rear of his next preceding man. Flankers are 
sent out when necessary and where it is possible to 
do so. 

“You will be surprised to see how admirably this 
formation will meet the situation under the condi¬ 
tions stated. The next time you are out on a winding 
road through the woods, step over to one side and ob- 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 


361 


serve to the front. Then go to the other side and 
repeat the operation. You will find that from one 
side your view will be very much restricted, while 
from the opposite side it will be much more extended. 
One trial will convince you of the suitability of this 
formation. ’ ’ 

Procedure 

The Director: “Now, having in mind what I have 
just said, I want each member of the class to deter¬ 
mine for himself just where each member of the pa¬ 
trol would be at the moment he, himself, arrived at 
this point. (The Director indicates the point on the 
ground where the patrol leader is.) Make a rough 
sketch of this vicinity to show the solution. 

(Note.—The location selected for this situation should be 
one where there is something that will test the tactical knowl¬ 
edge of the student. To base it otherwise would be of little 
value.) 

“We will allow a few minutes for the solution of 
this part of the problem, during which time you 
should look over the ground and decide upon the dis¬ 
position of your patrol, just where each man will be 
at this particular moment.” 

When the members of the class have completed 
this solution they will be collected and discussed. 

(Note.—The discussion will depend upon the solution. The 
points included in the Director’s explanation should be brought 
out and fully discussed.) 


362 


Terrain Exercises 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 4 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class along route of patrol to a distance of 600 

yards. 

2. Explain distance assumption. 

3. Hand out Situation No. 4 and explain. 

4. Operation of patrol; no hard and fast rules; objectives; ad¬ 

vancing in one body; skirmishers; column on march; 
patrol leader; Boni point system. 

5. Solution: Make sketch showing disposition of patrol. 

6. Discussion of solution. 


Procedure 

The members of the class are now conducted along 
the line of march of the patrol to a point where the 
road may be observed for a distance of some several 
hundred yards. 

The Director distributes the papers containing the 
following situation: 

The Problem 

Situation No. 5: 

The patrol has arrived at this point. You, Ser¬ 
geant B, are here. The leading man halts, crouches 
(jlown, points down the road, and holds his rifle hori¬ 
zontally above his head. 

j Required: 

What action do you, Sergeant B, take? 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Ralston, just what 
would you do under the circumstances?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would interpret the actions 
of the leading man to indicate that he has observed 



R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 


363 


the enemy and that they are in small numbers. I 
would signal the patrol to halt and then signal 
‘DOWN/ which would indicate to the men that they 
are to take cover. I would then join the leading man 
to see for myself what is happening out in front. ” r 

The Director: “I think we may all agree that your 
solution up to this point is correct. Now, let us as¬ 
sume that the leading man is at. (indicate ex¬ 

act location) and you are here. I want you to show 
the class exactly how you would join him. > 

(Note.—Lieutenant Ralston gives the practical demonstra¬ 
tion and the class moves up to where the leading man is sup¬ 
posed to be.) 

“Is there any member of the class that would do 
it differently V 7 

(Note.—If any member has any criticism of the solution, 
have him go back to the starting point and demonstrate how he 
would do it.) 

Solution 

j 

The Director: “Captain Harvey, let us assume 
that you are Sergeant B. You have joined your 
leading man here and he points out to you what he 
has seen. You observe six enemy infantrymen 
marching down the road in a formation similar to the 
one your patrol is now in. The leading man is at 

. (The Director points out the exact location 

of the enemy’s leading man, which should be at least 
500 yards distant.) Apparently they have not ob¬ 
served you. What is your reaction to this situa¬ 
tion'?” 

Captain Harvey: “At this moment I would have 
no means of telling whether these men are an enemy 
patrol or the point of an advance guard. The for- 




364 


Terrain Exercises 


mation would be about the same. Can the Director 
give us definite information on that point?” 

The Director: “All right. Let us assume for the 

moment that it is an enemy patrol. What would 
you do?” 

Captain Harvey: “Under those circumstances, I 

would have my patrol take cover and let the enemy 
patrol go on by.” J 

The Director: “That would be the logical thing to 
o. JN ow, let us assume that the enemy are the point 
o an advance guard. Wliat would you do?” 

Captain Harvey: “In that event I would open fire 
on them immediately. ’* ^ 

inJtha??” eC ^ r; “ What W ° Uld be 7 ° ur ob j eet in do- 

Captain Harvey: “By opening fire I give warning 
to our outpost that the enemy is advancing and I de¬ 
lay lum because he will have to stop and make more 
or less reconnaissance before proceeding.” 

thS'soE?”' “ Caplai11 H ° dges ’ d0 y0U agree witt 

Captain Hodges: “No, sir. This is a reconnoiter- 
mg patrol. Its mission is to get information of the 
enemy s strength and composition. If we fire on 
the point of this advance guard, all hope of getting 
any information of what is behind it is gone. It 
wi not take the advance party commander very 
long to discover that we are only a patrol and he will 

3 y thT fl r r rn Sufficient P atrols will be sent 
out to the flanks to keep us away and we will get no 

information of any value to our own commander. I 

most certainly would not fire on the enemy at this 


Rec onnoitering Patrol 


365 


The Director: “What action would you take*?” 

Captain Hodges: “I would wait a few minutes to 
try and determine the strength of the enemy’s ad¬ 
vance party. This would give me a general line on 
his strength. I would then send my leading man, 
who has seen the enemy himself, back to the support 
commander as fast as he could go with the informa¬ 
tion we have. This would be a verbal message. I 
would have no chance to write it out. I would then 

conduct the rest of my patrol off to the.flank 

under cover with a view to working around abreast 
of the enemy’s main body to secure information of 
his strength and composition. I would keep in con¬ 
tact with him to try and discover the direction of his 
deployment and what his intentions are. I would 
make strenuous efforts to get all of this information 
back to my support commander.” 

The Director: “Those are the points I wanted to 
bring out. I do not think our patrol would be justi¬ 
fied in opening fire on the enemy under the circum¬ 
stances. We will assume that the enemy troops are 
a patrol, and that we have decided to avoid them and 
let them go on by. Just how would you go about 
that task, Captain James ?” 

(Note.—Captain James’ solution will depend upon the Ter¬ 
rain and the cover available.) 

Procedure 

The Director will point out to the class and dwell 
upon the principle that, having decided to avoid the 
enemy’s patrol, the all-absorbing duty of the patrol 
leader is to conceal his patrol so that the enemy will 
have no information that it is anywhere in the vicin- 



366 


Terrain Exercises 


ity. The measures to accomplish this will then be 
worked out in the minutest detail. It may be well to 
have members of the class take post to represent the 
members of the patrol and have other members of 
the class to go out and represent the enemy’s patrol 
and advance just as they would under service condi¬ 
tions. Then have Captain James solve the problem 
of getting his patrol under cover without being dis¬ 
covered by the enemy. 

Explanation 

The Director: “We must give the enemy’s patrol 
credit for being on the alert and for having such a 
knowledge of tactics that he will do the reasonably 
proper thing. If he sees one member of our patrol, 
the difficulty of avoiding him will be doubly in¬ 
creased. Our task, then, is to get to cover as quickly 
as possible. It is this seeming trivial action that 
sometimes calls for all the ingenuity that the patrol 
leader may possess. The road may be open for a con¬ 
siderable distance, so that if one of the members of 
our patrol crosses from one side to the other he will 
be seen and the position disclosed to the enemy. It 
may be necessary for the patrol to fall back a short 
distance in order to secure the necessary cover. It 
may be necessary, in order to avoid discovery, to 
direct all men on one side of the road to take cover 
on their side and the remainder to seek cover on the 
the opposite side. This means a dispersion of the 
patrol and the consequent danger of getting lost and 
also the difficulties of assembling again. This points 
to the advisability of training the men to all take 
cover on the same side of the road when the enemy is 
encountered as in this case.” 


367 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 
Procedure 

When members of the class are in place to repre¬ 
sent the enemy and our own patrol, the Director will 
give a signal and the movement starts. The enemy 
patrol moves along as it would naturally and Cap¬ 
tain James proceeds to get the members of his patrol 
under cover. His method should be discussed by the 
class and the defects of it pointed out. It may be 
necessary to enact the solution several times before 
a satisfactory one is found. 

The demonstration completed and the class again 
assembled, the Director proceeds with the problem. 

The Problem 

The Director: “Lieutenant Baker, would you send 
back any message to the support commander about 
the enemy patrol ? ’ ’ 

Solution 

Lieutenant Baker: “I think that is a point that the 
patrol commander should consider. I am not clear 
in my own mind just what should be done under the 
circumstances. I would be pleased to have the 
Director enlighten us on the subject.” 

The Director: “We assume that this is a small en¬ 
emy reconnoitering patrol. It would have the same 
mission as our own patrol. The point to be con¬ 
sidered is whether or not anything in the message 
you send back would materially assist in the defense 
of the outpost line, or whether it could contain any 
information of special value to the outpost com¬ 
mander. Our covering patrols sent out from the sup¬ 
ports will keep the enemy away from the outpost 
line. They will soon discover that it is only a small 


368 


Terrain Exercises 


patrol and will drive it off. We have only a few men 

^ 4 -i ^ le P a ^ 10 ^ f f one is sent back with a message 
at this time it may leave the patrol leader short- 
handed when there is something really important 
that must be sent back. The mission of the patrol is 
mu s f cure ^formation 0 f the enemy’s main body, 
lhat is the information that is of importance to the 
support and outpost commander. I do not believe 
the patrol commander would be justified in sending 
back a message at this time.” 

Lieutenant Baker: “I see the point.” 


(Note.—Should any members of the class insist that a mes- 

mlssaee'an A* h ® ““T be called upon to impose the 
message and it should be examined to see whether it contains 

information that is vital to the defense of the outpost.) C ° ntamS 


Reconnoitering Patrol 


Director’s Key 


Card No. 5 


1. Conduct class to point where a view of road to front for 
o tv s ^veral hundred yards is available. 

2. Distribute problem. 

3 ' Ent fead”ng 0 man n: Si8 '" al ° f leading man; method of joining 

4 ‘ Ene enemy dVanCe gUard ° r patroL Q““tion of firing on 

5. Method of evading enemy patrol. Practical demonstration 
Discussion of methods; difficulties. monstration. 

n e out mes sage. Contents; information of enemy main 


Procedure 


The class is now conducted to a point where thev 
have a view of an open field some 1,200 yards distant. 
It may be assumed that the patrol has marched sev¬ 
eral miles m order to arrive at this place 

. T h e D ii; ect or now distributes the sheets contain¬ 
ing Situation No. 6. 




369 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 

Situation No. 6: 

The patrol successfully evaded the enemy’s patrol, 
continued the march, and without encountering any 
other enemy troops has arrived at this point. The 
enemy patrol proceeded on down the road toward the 
outpost line. 

On arriving here you observe a force of the enemy 
marching into that field. They are apparently go¬ 
ing into bivouac. You estimate the enemy to be one 
regiment of Infantry. 

Required: 

What action do you take ? 

Procedure 

The Director should point out the location of the 
enemy and should indicate the exact location of each 
member of the patrol, so that all members of the 
class will make their solutions on the same basis. 

The Director: “Captain Hall, what would you do 
under the circumstances?” 

Captain Hall: “I would send a message to the sup¬ 
port commander telling him what I have seen.” 

The Director: “Is there anything that you would 
do before starting to compose your message?” 

Captain Hall: “I do not think so. I have located 
the enemy and want to get the information back as 
quickly as possible.” 

The Director: “That is true. But there are cer¬ 
tain things that must be done in connection with it. 
You have discovered what you estimate to be the en¬ 
emy ? s main body. You know the strength and com¬ 
position of it. You know what he is doing for the 
time being. The members of your patrol are still 


370 


Terrain Exercises 


in patrol formation and must be told what to do. In 
other words, there are several things to be done. In 
the first place, you want to dispose your men for ob¬ 
servation of the enemy and to prevent surprise. En¬ 
emy patrols may be operating in the vicinity. One 
of these may pick you up and prevent you from get¬ 
ting any information back. This is the thing you 
must guard against. You must consider the con¬ 
tents of your message and you must figure out how 
you are going to get it back considering the fact that 
there is an enemy patrol of six men operating be¬ 
tween you and the outpost line. 

When the patrol has encountered the enemy the 
disposition must be such as to permit the leader to ob¬ 
serve the hostile force for the purpose of forming an 
estimate of its strength and composition, disposi¬ 
tions, and probable intentions. With this end in 
view, the leader must go to a vantage point from 
which he may obtain a good view of the enemy. The 
remaining members of the patrol must be so disposed 
as to guard all the avenues of approach from the 
known direction of the enemy’s forces, in order to 
prevent surprise. 

Lieutenant Barry, what disposition would you 
make of the members of the patrol?” 

Solution 

Lieutenant Barry: “I would select a good observa¬ 
tion point where I can see the enemy and what he is 
doing. I would select two of the men to carry the 
message back. I would post a man to watch for en¬ 
emy patrols and post a get-away man somewhat to 
my rear.” 


R e c o n n o i t e r i n g Patrol 


371 


The Director: “All right. Select your observa¬ 
tion post and give the orders necessary to carry out 
what you have just said.” 

The solution will depend upon the lay of the 
ground. The points to be brought out are that pa¬ 
trol leaders must be able to observe the enemy in se¬ 
curity and not have to bother about being surprised 
by enemy patrols. The lookouts will be posted so 
that they can watch the approaches. The men that 
are to carry the message should be with Sergeant B 
while he is composing it so that they will be able to 
tell the support commander all about the situation 
when they get back with the message. The get¬ 
away man will be posted in such position as will make 
sure that he will not be included in any disaster to 
the patrol. 

Procedure 

The dispositions having been completed, the next 
question is that of the contents of the message. 

The Director: “I want each member of the class to 
write out the body of the message that he would send 
back to the support commander.” 

When the message has been completed and turned 
in by all the class they are distributed and various 
members called upon to read and comment on the 
one in his possession. The points that should be in¬ 
cluded in the message are: 

1. Information of the strength and composition 
of the enemy main body. What he is doing. 

2. Information of the strength and composition 
of the enemy patrol that was passed. 

3. The future action of the patrol in so far as it 
can be determined. 


372 


Terrain Exercises 


Solution 

The Director should then compose a message cover¬ 
ing the above requirements and submit it to the class 
for discussion. 

Have observed a force of the enemy, estimated one 

legiment of Infantry at . (give location). 

They are now going into bivouac. A hostile patrol of 

six men passed my patrol at . (give location) 

at . (time) which proceeded in the direction of 

the outgost line. I will remain in observation until forced 
to retire or darkness prevents further reconnaissance.” 

The Director: “Lieutenant Hunt, how would you 
get the message back to the support commander 7” 

Lieutenant Hunt: “I have had Anderson and 
Bailey here with me while making my observations 
and composing the message. I will send it back by 
them, each man taking a different route. I will read 
the message to them. I will indicate on the map the 
general route that each man is to take in going back 
to the support and caution each of them to look out 
for the enemy patrol that is between us and the out¬ 
post line. By sending the message by two men going 
over different routes I am almost sure to get it 
through. If one of them runs into the enemy, it is 
pretty safe to say that the other will not.” 

The Director: “I think your sizing up of the sit¬ 
uation is very good. You have taken all the pre¬ 
cautions possible for getting the message back safely 
to the support commander. ’ ’ 





Reconnoitering Patrol 


373 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 6 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to point where they can see enemy. Distribute 

Situation No. 6. Point out location of the enemy. 

2. Disposition of the patrol for observation—observers, men to 

carry message, get-away man. 

3. Write out message. Contents; information of enemy main 

body, enemy patrol, future plans of the patrol leader. 
Prepare message for discussion. 

4. Send back message by two messengers. Chances for getting 

through with it. 


Procedure 

The Director now distributes the sheets containing 
Situation No. 7 to the members of the class. A few 
minutes are allowed to read it over, and it is ex¬ 
plained. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 7: 

You are still observing the enemy. Nothing has 
happened to cause you to change your estimate of 
his strength and composition. His outposts are be¬ 
ing established and they are pushing out patrols to 
the front and flanks. Your position is becoming un¬ 
tenable. You have heard distant firing in the direc¬ 
tion of the Blue troops. 

Required: 

What action do you, Sergeant B, take? 

Solution 

The Director: “Lieutenant Williams, what would 
you do?” 

Lieutenant Williams: “I estimate that it is about 
time for me to be getting out with what is left of my 



374 


Terrain Exercises 


patrol. I have accomplished my mission in so far as 
the main body of the enemy is concerned. His biv¬ 
ouac for the night has been located. He has estab¬ 
lished his outposts, which indicates that he will prob¬ 
ably not make any more moves today. The opera¬ 
tions of the hostile patrols will soon make my posi¬ 
tion untenable. There is little to be gained by my 
staying here any longer and taking a chance on be¬ 
ing picked up. I would get on my way back to my 
own troops. ” 

The Director: “Has any member of the class any 
criticism of that solution V’ 

Captain Hastings: “It seems to me that Sergeant 
B would now have another mission imposed upon 
him by the conditions. It is that of intercepting en¬ 
emy scouts from getting back with information from 
the patrol that passed us. How about that % ’ ’ 

The Director: “That is true. It is the point that 
I was going to bring up next. The fact that you 
have heard firing from the direction of our own 
troops indicates that contact has been gained and the 
enemy patrol has gotten some information of our 
forces. This he will endeavor to get back to his own 
commander. In view of the fact that the patrol 
leader does not know that our patrol is between him 
and his own troops he may not think it necessary to 
take the piecautions to send it by two messengers 
and I think it is reasonable to assume that he will 
direct his messenger along the main road where he 
can make the better time than he can in going across 
country. You now have two men with you, Carlin 
and Davis. How would you manage the withdrawal 
and what would be your formation on the way back ? 


Reconnoiter i n g Patrol 


375 


What route would you take % How would you solve 
all of these points, Captain Hastings V 7 

Captain Hastings: “I would signal Carlin, who is 
observer, to join me. This accomplished, I would 
signal Davis to move out toward the main road. I 
would make my withdrawal as rapidly as possible 
and when we get away some little distance I would 
signal Davis to slow down until we caught up with 
him. I would get on or near the main road and 
march with Davis as the leading man, following him 
at a distance of about 25 yards and have Carlin fol¬ 
low me at the same distance. I would keep a sharp 
lookout for enemy scouts with a view to intercepting 
them. ’ ’ 

The Director: “I think your solution meets the 
situation very well. Are there any questions V 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 7 

Director’s Key 

1. Distribute sheets containing Situation No. 7. Read and ex¬ 

plain. 

2. Withdrawal of patrol. Accomplished mission. 

3. New mission to intercept messengers from enemy patrol. 

4. Formation for withdrawal. 


Procedure 

The class is now conducted back along the main 
road to a point selected for Situation No. 8. 

The Problem 

Situation No. 8: 

When you arrive at this point you observe an en¬ 
emy scout coming down the road in your direction at 
a walk. You can see some distance beyond him and 



376 


Terrain Exercises 


he appears to be alone. (The Director will point out 
the location of the enemy scout.) 

Required: 

What do you do ? 

Solution 

The Director: “ Lieutenant Ralston, how do you 
size up the situation?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: U I estimate that the man is 
carrying a message from his patrol leader to the com¬ 
mander of the Red forces. My mission is to capture 
im anc ^ P r event the message going back. If prac¬ 
ticable the capture must be effected without resorting 
to filing. If we have to fire it will give warning to 
the enemy’s patrol operating toward our outpost 
and the patrol commander would assume that his 
messenger is in trouble and would send another mes¬ 
sage by another route. Furthermore, firing at this 
time would give the alarm to the patrols operating 
fiom the hostile outpost, and they would rush to the 
rescue of their comrades.” 

The Director: ‘ ‘ Tell us just how you would go about 
the capture of the messenger ? ’ ’ 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would form an ambuscade 
here with Davis and myself on one side of the road 
and Carlm on the other side about 25 yards in rear 
of us. When the messenger arrives at about 10 yards 
from us, Davis and myself will jump out into the 
road and order him to surrender. We will endeavor 
to surprise him and take him without firing a shot. 
It by any chance he should get by us, Carlin would 
be m position to intercept him.” 


377 


Recon n o i terin g Patrol 

The Director: “ Just what would you say when you 
order him to surrender?” 

Lieutenant Ralston: “I would jump out on the side 
of the road, level my rifle at him and yell at him as 
loud as I could, ‘Drop your rifle—throw up your 
hands. 7 If he did as ordered I would explain to him 
that he is now a prisoner of war and that resistance 
is useless. If he did not do as I told him on the in¬ 
stant or if he made any attempt to escape or move to 
fire on me I would open fire on him at once. I would 
take no chances with him. ’ * 

The Director: “That seems to be a reasonable solu¬ 
tion. This is a very simple proposition and presents 
little difficulty. It is brought before you at this time 
merely to show you the procedure that makes for 
reasonable chances for success. The capture of sev¬ 
eral scouts or a patrol is a much more difficult under¬ 
taking. 

“It is a general rule in the attempt to capture 
members of a patrol that the situation we desire to 
produce when we meet them is that they should be 
marching and that we should be halted. By adopt¬ 
ing this method, we form an ambuscade.” 


Reconnoitering Patrol Card No. 8 

Director’s Key 

1. Conduct class to point where ambush may be arranged for. 

2. Distribute Situation No. 8 and explain it. 

3. Size up situation. Enemy messenger. 

4. Details of ambush and method of capture. 



378 


Terrain Exercises 


Table 28 W.— RIFLE COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT. 

(War Strength) 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

1 

Units 

» 

Specialist Rating (Class) 

j---1 

Company Headquarters 

One Platoon 

-—______ _1 

Total Company (3 Platoons) 

and Company Headquarters 

Platoon Headquarters 

T3 

aS 

3 

O* 

co 

1 Section (3 Squads and 

Section Headquarters) ( d) 

Total Platoon (2 Sections 

and Platoon Headquarters) 

2 

3 

4 

5 

Captain. 


1 

lx 





1 

2(1*) 

2 

5(1*) 

First Lieutenants. . . 


w 

1 



w 

1 

Second Lieutenants 




Total Commissioned 


2 (lx) 



6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

17 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

First Sergeant. . . . 


1 

3 

(1) 





1 

12 

Sergeants, incl.. . . 


1 


1 

3 

Mess. . . . 



Platoon Sergeants.... 


(1) 





Section Leaders... 




(1) 



Signal. 


(1) 

(1) 

2 

(1) 





Supply. 







Corporals, incl.. . 



1 

4 

8 

26 

Company Clerk.. . 



Section Guides 




(1) 



Signal. 


(1) 





Squad Leaders.. 



(1) 

7 

(3) 

21 



Pvts. 1st Cl. & Pvts., incl.. 


17 

(1) 

(2) 

(1) 

(2) 

(2) 

(2) 

4 

46 

161 ac 

Barber. . . 


Buglers. 







Cobbler.... 







Cooks (First). . . 

4th 

5th 

6th 






Cooks (Asst.). 






Mechanics. . . 






Riflemen... 


(5) 

0) 




Riflemen, automatic.... 

6th 



(1) 

(2) 

(2) 

(4) 

(6) 

(12) 

Riflemen, automatic... 



Riflemen, with grenade disch. 




(1) 

Runners and Agents. 


(6) 

(1) 

23 

(4) 




Tailor.... 






Total Enlisted.. 


5 

8 

26 

57 

200c 



32 

AGGREGATE. . 


25 

6 

8 

2 6d 

58 

205 



33 

34 

35 

36 

Pistols.... 


9 

16 

2 

4 

1 

6 

1 

1 

3 

20 

3 

3 

8 

44 

6 

6 

33 

148 

18 

18 

Rifles. 


Rifles, automatic... 


Rifles, with grenade discharger. 









2- Fifth CWh c: 3 vf ? ri pi ates I st 108 Privates. Summary of Specialist Ratings: Fourth Class 

2 , hitth Class, 2, Sixth Class, 8. ( x) Second in Command. Not authorized for War Strensrth Com 

aSergeSfand 1 Co^oraf) W IndUdeS 6 eXtra privateS - (d) Includes Section Headquarter^ 


























































































































































Tables of Organization 


379 


Table 29-W — MACHINE-GUN COMPANY, INFANTRY REGIMENT 

(War Strength) 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

Units 

Specialist Rating (Class) 

Company Headquarters 

Company Train 

* 

One Platoon 


Total Company (2 Platoons, Com¬ 

pany Hq. and Company Train) 

Platoon Headquarters 

1 Squad (1 Machine Gun) 

1 Section (2 Squads and Sec¬ 

tion Headquarters) (b) 

Total Platoon (2 Sections and 

Platoon Headquarters) 

2 

Captain. 


lh 






1 

3 

First Lieutenants. 


lhx 


1 



1 

3(lx) 

4 

Second Lieutenants. 


lhc 






1 

5 

Total Commissioned. . . . 


3 (lx) 


1 



1 

5(lx) 

6 

First Sergeant. 


lh 






1 











7 

Sergeants, incl. 


4 

1 

1 


1 

3 

11 

8 

Mess. 


(1) 







9 

Platoon Sergeants. 



(1) 





10 

Reconnaissance. 


(1) 






11 

Section Leaders. 





(1) 



12 

Signal. 


(1) 






13 

Stable. 


(lm) 






14 

Supply. 


(1) 















15 

Corporals, incl. 


2 


2 

1 

2 

6 

14 

16 

Agents. 




(1) 





17 

Company Clerk. 


(1) 






18 

Signal. 


(1) 







19 

Squad Leaders. 




(1) 




20 

Transport. 




(1) 













21 

Privates, 1st Cl. and Priv.. 


17 

4 

7 

10 

20 

47 

115a 

22 

Barber. 


(1) 







23 

Buglers. 


(2h) 







24 

Cobbler. 


'(1)' 







25 

Cooks (First). 

4th 

(1) 







26 

Cooks (Asst.) 

5th 

(2) 







27 

Gunners. 

6th 



(1) 

(2) 

(4) 

(3) 

28 

Gunners. 






(5) 

29 

Horseshoer 

4th 


(1) 
















Continued on Page 380 






















































































































380 Terrain Exercises 


Table 29-W—MACHINE-GUN COMPANY, INFANTRY REGI¬ 
MENT —Continued 
(War Strength) 



1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

1 

Units 

Specialist Rating (Class) 

Company Headquarters 

Company Train 

One Platoon 

Total Company (2 Platoons, Com¬ 

pany Hq. and Company Train) j 

Platoon Headquarters 

1 Squad (1 Machine Gun) 

1 Section (2 Squads and Sec¬ 

tion Headquarters) (b) 

Total Platoon (2 Sections and 

Platoon Headquarters) 

30 

Mechanics. 

6th 

(2) 







31 

Motorcyclist. 

6th 

(1) 






32 

Saddler. 

5th 


(1) 






33 

Tailor. 


(1) 





:::::::: 

34 

Miscellaneous. 


(7d) 

(le) 

(7d) 

(9f) 



j 

35 

Total Enlisted. 


24 

5 ' 

10 

11 

23b 

56 

141 

36 

AGGREGATE. 


27 

5 

11 

11 

23 

57 

146 

37 

Horses, riding. 


6 


1 



1 

8 

38 

Mules, draft. 





2 

4 

8 

16 

39 

Mules, riding. 



1 





1 











40 

Total Animals. 


6 

1 

1 

2 

4 

9 

25 

41 

Carts, ammunition, M. G.. 





1 

2 

4 

8 

42 

Carts, M. G. gun. 





1 

2 

4 

8 

43 

Bicycles. 


1 


1 



1 

3 

44 

Motorcycles, with side cars 



1 





1 

45 

Guns, machine. 





1 

2 

4 

8 

46 

Pistols. 


27 

5 

11 

11 

23 

57 

146 


Remarks: 

(h) Mounted on horse. 

(m) Mounted on mule. 

(a) Includes: 35 Privates 1st Class, 80 Privates. 

Summary of Specialist Ratings: 4th Class, 2; 5th Class, 3; 6th Class, 6. 

(b) Section Headquarters includes 1 sergeant. 

(c) Reconnaissance Officer. 

(d) Signalmen, runners, agents and orderlies, 1 bicyclist. 

(e) Stable orderly. 

(f) Includes 2 drivers for gun and ammunition carts. 

(x) Second in Command. Not authorized for War Strength Companies organized in time 
of peace. 











































































































Reserve 

Officers’ 

Examiner 


SUBJECTS 

Administration 
Military Law 
Customs of the Service 
Field Service Regulations 
Military Hygiene 


‘‘Please RUSH a copy of Reserve Officers’ Examiner to 

my address” 

This is the form of order that comes to us day after 
day. Sometimes in a letter, sometimes by wire, often ac¬ 
companied by a request for special delivery service. Many 
times a passage is added: 

“I am ordered up for examination and need the book 

right away.” 

The point we make is this. The mere possession of a 
copy of Reserve Officers’ Examiner will not prepare you 
for examination for promotion or keep you in touch with 
the subjects it covers. You must know its contents. These 
may not be absorbed by the average man by a casual 
glance through the book. Its contents must be studied 
the same as you study anything else you want to learn. 

You should not put off getting your copy of Reserve 
Officers’ Examiner until the last minute—when you are 
face to face with your examination. Get your copy now. 
Devote a little time to the study of its contents. Then 
when the opportunity comes for promotion—as it surely 
will—you will be prepared for it. 


Price, $2.00 


United States Infantry Association 

WASHINGTON, D. C. 





Steele’s 

American Campaigns 

Prepared originally for students of the 
Army Service Schools in conjunction with 
their course in military history. 

Much has been written on the individual 
campaigns and battles that mahe up our mil¬ 
itary history, but this is the only single work 
that contains a comprehensive narrative of 
the whole down to and including the Span- 
ish-American War. 

The present edition is a reprint from new 
type and plates of the work which originally 
appeared in 1909, and which has been unob¬ 
tainable except in second-hand book shops 
for many years. 

Two handsome volumes in box 
Price, $10.00 per set 

A postcard will secure a copy for you 


United States Infantry Association 

WASHINGTON, D. C. 









EMPLOYMENT OF 
MACHINE GUNS 

By Major WALTER C. SHORT, Infantry 


The first comprehensive study of American 
machine-gun tactics as developed in the World 
War. 

The only text on machine guns based on the 
present Tables of Organization. 

The proper tactical employment of machine 
guns. 

Tactical principles and orders illustrated by 
means of map problems. 

Gives the complete organization and equip¬ 
ment of machine-gun units. 

Illustrates the effective cooperation of infantry 
and cavalry machine-gun units. 

Shows the company machine-gun officer how 
to support the rifleman. 

Duties of the personnel and characteristics of 
machine guns discussed. 

PRICE $3.50 

United States Infantry Association 

WASHINGTON, D. C. 





Thirty-Minute 

Talks— 

By 

COLONEL M. B. STEWART 

and 

LT. COL. W. H. WALDRON 


Cloth Bound—387 Pages 


Explaining is half the work of instructing. Talk saves 
work—when it is the right kind of talk. For the instructor, 
explaining—talking is the hardest part because it means con¬ 
stant brushing up, reading, study, thought and planning— 
all of which takes time, and time counts heavily in the game 
of intensive training. 

THIRTY-MINUTE TALKS are offered as time-savers for 
the instructor. They are in no sense treatises of the subjects 
considered—just plain, everyday talks, in language the man 
new to the service will be able to understand. They will save 
the instructor’s time by furnishing him with a guide which 
he may rearrange or elaborate as he chooses. 

The subject matter of the Thirty-Minute Talks are as fol¬ 
lows: 


Organization. 

Training. 

Instructing. 

Physical Development. 
Close Order Drill. 
Extended Order Drill. 
Military Courtesy. 
Military Discipline. 

Care of Arms and Equip¬ 
ment. 

Advance Guards. 


Outposts. 

Scouting and Patrolling. 
Combat. 

Approach March and Deploy¬ 
ment. 

Musketry. 

Orders and Messages. 

Field Fortifications. 

Map Reading. 

Military Sketching. 
Contouring. 


PRICE, $2.50, POSTPAID 

U. S. Infantry Association 

Washington, D. C. 














- : 












■ 



















■ 



















JUN 7 192 3 



























































